Knovvledge of the times or, the resolution of the question, how long it shall be unto the end of wonders. By John Tillinghast, a servant of Jesus Christ. Tillinghast, John, 1604-1655. 1654 Approx. 620 KB of XML-encoded text transcribed from 195 1-bit group-IV TIFF page images. Text Creation Partnership, Ann Arbor, MI ; Oxford (UK) : 2012-10 (EEBO-TCP Phase 2). A94356 Wing T1179 Thomason E1467_1 ESTC R203797 99863614 99863614 115824

To the extent possible under law, the Text Creation Partnership has waived all copyright and related or neighboring rights to this keyboarded and encoded edition of the work described above, according to the terms of the CC0 1.0 Public Domain Dedication (http://creativecommons.org/publicdomain/zero/1.0/). This waiver does not extend to any page images or other supplementary files associated with this work, which may be protected by copyright or other license restrictions. Please go to https://www.textcreationpartnership.org/ for more information about the project.

Early English books online text creation partnership. (EEBO-TCP ; phase 2, no. A94356) Transcribed from: (Early English Books Online ; image set 115824) Images scanned from microfilm: (Thomason Tracts ; 188:E1467[1]) Knovvledge of the times or, the resolution of the question, how long it shall be unto the end of wonders. By John Tillinghast, a servant of Jesus Christ. Tillinghast, John, 1604-1655. [30], 346, [14] p. by R.I. for L. Chapman, and are to be sold at the sign of the Crown in Popes-head Alley, Printed at London : 1654. "An appendix" has separate dated title page; pagination and register are continuous. With four final contents leaves followed by two advertisement leaves. Annotation on Thomason copy: "Decem: 9". Reproduction of the original in the British Library.

Created by converting TCP files to TEI P5 using tcp2tei.xsl, TEI @ Oxford.

EEBO-TCP is a partnership between the Universities of Michigan and Oxford and the publisher ProQuest to create accurately transcribed and encoded texts based on the image sets published by ProQuest via their Early English Books Online (EEBO) database (http://eebo.chadwyck.com). The general aim of EEBO-TCP is to encode one copy (usually the first edition) of every monographic English-language title published between 1473 and 1700 available in EEBO.

EEBO-TCP aimed to produce large quantities of textual data within the usual project restraints of time and funding, and therefore chose to create diplomatic transcriptions (as opposed to critical editions) with light-touch, mainly structural encoding based on the Text Encoding Initiative (http://www.tei-c.org).

The EEBO-TCP project was divided into two phases. The 25,368 texts created during Phase 1 of the project (2000-2009), initially available only to institutions that contributed to their creation, were released into the public domain on 1 January 2015. The approximately 40,000 texts produced during Phase 2 (2009- ), of which 34,963 had been released as of 2020, originally similarly restricted, were similarly freed from all restrictions on 1 August 2020. As of that date anyone is free to take and use these texts for any purpose (modify them, annotate them, distribute them, etc.). But we do respectfully request that due credit and attribution be given to their original source.

Users should be aware of the process of creating the TCP texts, and therefore of any assumptions that can be made about the data.

Text selection was based on the New Cambridge Bibliography of English Literature (NCBEL). If an author (or for an anonymous work, the title) appears in NCBEL, then their works are eligible for inclusion. Selection was intended to range over a wide variety of subject areas, to reflect the true nature of the print record of the period. In general, first editions of a works in English were prioritized, although there are a number of works in other languages, notably Latin and Welsh, included and sometimes a second or later edition of a work was chosen if there was a compelling reason to do so.

Image sets were sent to external keying companies for transcription and basic encoding. Quality assurance was then carried out by editorial teams in Oxford and Michigan. 5% (or 5 pages, whichever is the greater) of each text was proofread for accuracy and those which did not meet QA standards were returned to the keyers to be redone. After proofreading, the encoding was enhanced and/or corrected and characters marked as illegible were corrected where possible up to a limit of 100 instances per text. Any remaining illegibles were encoded as <gap>s. Understanding these processes should make clear that, while the overall quality of TCP data is very good, some errors will remain and some readable characters will be marked as illegible. Users should bear in mind that in all likelihood such instances will never have been looked at by a TCP editor.

The texts were encoded and linked to page images in accordance with level 4 of the TEI in Libraries guidelines.

Copies of the texts have been issued variously as SGML (TCP schema; ASCII text with mnemonic sdata character entities); displayable XML (TCP schema; characters represented either as UTF-8 Unicode or text strings within braces); or lossless XML (TEI P5, characters represented either as UTF-8 Unicode or TEI g elements).

Keying and markup guidelines are available at the Text Creation Partnership web site.

eng Eschatology -- Early works to 1800. 2011-11 Assigned for keying and markup 2011-11 Keyed and coded from ProQuest page images 2012-01 Sampled and proofread 2012-01 Text and markup reviewed and edited 2012-05 Batch review (QC) and XML conversion

KNOWLEDGE OF THE TIMES, OR, The reſolution of the Queſtion, how long it ſhall be unto the end of WONDERS.

By JOHN TILLINGHAST, a Servant of Jeſus Chriſt.

Dan. 12. Verſ. 8 — Then I ſaid, O my Lord, what ſhall be the end of theſe things?

Verſ 9. And he ſaid unto me, Go thy way Daniel, for the words are cloſed up, and ſealed till the time of the end.

Verſ. 10. Many ſhall be purified and made white, and tried; but the wicked ſhall do wickedly, and none of the wicked ſhall underſtand, but the wiſe ſhall underſtand.

Chap. 7.21. I beheld, and the ſame Horn made war with the Saints, and prevailed againſt them

Verſ. 22. Until the Ancient of days came, and judgement was given to the Saints of the moſt high, and the time came that the Saints poſſeſſed the Kingdom.

Printed at London by R. I. for L. Chapman, and are to be ſold at the Sign of the Crown in Popeſ-head Alley. 1654.

Knowledge of the Times.

〈1 page duplicate〉
TO The faithful VVitneſſes of CHRIST, Within the Common-wealth of England, Scotland, and Ireland. Dearly beloved in our Lord:

IT was not doubtleſs without a ſpecial and moſt wonderful deſign of Heaven, in order to the making of Chriſts Kingdom, and the Adminiſtrations thereof the more welcome to the World, when the Fathers appointed time of ſetting the ſame up ſhould be come, That the power of the Fourth Monarchy in its ſecond ſtate ſhould be in all reſpects, but chiefly in its riſe, worſe, more odious, and abominable than ever was power in the World before it; for as for all the three firſt Monarchies, and the Fourth alſo (conſidered in its firſt ſtate, before the Antichriſtian Beaſt was Mid-wived into the World) they did receive their power from God, upon which account the Apoſtles in the New Teſtament urge obeto the ruling Powers of the World that then were, telling Beleevers to whom they wrote, that there was no power (i. e. then ſtanding) but what Originally, in reſpect of the derivation of the power, was of God, and ordained by God, Rom. 12.1. 1 Pet. 2.13, 14.

But now the power of the Roman Monarchy in its ſecond State, as ſubjected to Antichriſt (which Beaſt was not then riſen, but to aſcend to the Throne afterwards, Revel. 17.8.) is (as in many other reſpects, ſo eſpecially in this, viz. of the firſt riſe or derivation of the power) made to differ vaſtly from all thoſe preceding powers, which were parts of the Great Image, as well as it; for thoſe, though their power was abuſed, yet had they it originally from God; but of the Antichriſtian Power the contrary is expreſly declared, namely, That when the Ten-Horned blaſphemous Beaſt ſhould ariſe, he ſhould receive his power from the Dragon, or Devil, Revel. 13.1, 2. And I ſaw a Beaſt riſe up out of the Sea, having ſeven Heads, and ten Horns, and upon his Horns ten Crowns, and upon his Heads the name of Blaſphemy. And the Beaſt that I ſaw was like unto a Leopard, and the Dragon gave him his power, and great authority. Hence, Revel. 11.7. and again, Chap. 17.8. where his riſe is ſpoken of, he is ſaid, not to have a deſcent from Heaven, as had the former powers, but an aſcent out of the bottomleſs Pit, i.e. from Hell, noting (as before) that the derivation of this Power ſhould not bee from God, but from the Devil.

Which Poſition is yet more clear, if wee conſider, how that Jeſus Chriſt, all the time of the Beaſts Kingdom, doth ſet up a two fold power, viz. a power Magiſterial and Miniſterial, (which he calls his two Witneſſes, Revelation 11.3.) For this very end, to oppoſe the Beaſt, by bearing conſtant witneſs againſt, and ſmiting ſo farre as in them lyes, the Beaſt and his Powers. This witneſſe-bearing Power ſet up in direct oppoſition to the Beaſt, though in reſpect of their outward condition they are at and under all the time of the Beaſts Kingdom, he, till his day is out, ruling the roſt, for which cauſe they wear Sackcloth; yet being declaredly of Divine appointment, and ordination; I will give power to my two Witneſſes, hence it neceſſarily followeth, that the power of the Beaſt cannot be ſuch too, unleſſe we ſhould ſuppoſe Divine appointments to be manifeſtly contradictory within themſelves, and to fight the one with the other, which to ſay, would be rather a blaſphemy than an abſurdity. And it is for this reaſon, becauſe the Beaſt receives his power from the Dragon, that the Worſhippers of the Beaſt are ſaid to worſhip the Dragon, Revelations 13.4. And they worſhipped the Dragon that gave power to the Beaſt, and they worſhipped the Beaſt. From all which it appears, That Power conſidered as Antichriſtian is not of divine inſtitution, but Diabolical.

This Antichriſtian power is that which of all the Powers of the Four Monarchies takes laſt place, cloſing up the Worlds day, and ſtanding next to Chriſts Kingdom in regard of time, God ſeeing it beſt in his infinite and unſearchable Wiſdom to ſuffer things, before he will erect his own Kingdom of righteouſneſs, and holineſs, to grow to ſuch a height of unparalelled impietie in the World, as that the principal affairs thereof, which in all Ages and Generations formerly had ever been ordered and diſpoſed by men, as his Subſtitutes, ſhould in this laſt time (namely the time of Antichriſts Kingdom) bee diſpoſed of, and governed by men as Subſtitutes of the Dragon.

In the ruines of this Power Chriſt begins his own Kingdom; for as the Perſian Monarchy had its beginning in the ruines of the Babylonian, and the Graecian in the ruines of the Perſian, the Roman afterwards in the ruines of the Graecian; ſo the Kingdom of Chriſt, or the Fifth Monarchy, hath its firſt riſe in the ruines of the Antichriſtian Kingdom, with which (the Antichriſtian Kingdom being the Fourth Monarchy in its ſecond and laſt ſtate) the Fourth Monarchy it ſelf goes to ruine, and way is made for the riſe of the Fifth, which ſucceeds it.

This thing is moſt evident in the two firſt of Daniels Prophecies, viz. That of the Great Image, Chap. 2. and that of the four Beaſts, Chap. 7. for the one tells us, that Chriſts Kingdom ariſeth by ſmiting and breaking the feet of the Great Image; the other, that it ariſeth by judging, caſting down the Throne, taking away the Dominion of the Little Horn, either of which are the ſame, both pointing (as the future Diſcourſe proveth at large) at the Kingdom of Antichriſt, and Chriſts judging thereof.

Now, that this Kingdom of Chriſt, which Daniel ſpeaks of, as ſucceeding the Kingdom of Antichriſt, taking its beginning in the others ruines, cannot be a meer Spiritual Kingdom (as many would have it) but muſt bee an outward and viſible Kingdom, is manifeſt enough, though wee had no other proof thereof, but what is couched in theſe two Prophecies; though yet I might ſay it, and ſpeak truth, that this Doctrine of Chriſts viſible Kingdom, is that great Truth of which all the Prophets of the Old Teſtament, more plentifully than of any one beſides it, have ſpoken, and Chriſt himſelf, with the Apoſtles, and Evangeliſts, of the New likewiſe.

But (not to enter into ſo large a field, which requires a Book, not an Epiſtle) let us (becauſe the Rulers of this World begin at this day to be jealous of this Notion, and to look bigge upon Chriſts outward Kingdom) conſult with Daniel upon this Queſtion, Whether the Kingdom hee ſpeaks of in his two firſt Prophecies be meerly Spiritual, or whether it bee not, as Spiritual, ſo outward too. And although ſome Arguments urged from Daniels firſt Prophecy, to prove this Kingdom to be not Spiritual only, but outward alſo, are laid down in our following Diſcourſe; yet do I not here judge it amiſſe to enlarge ſome of them, and alſo adde ſomething new, to vindicate thereby a moſt bleſſed, but ſuffering truth, hoping my labour in ſo doing may not be altogether loſt. Let us therefore (I ſay) ask Daniels minde upon our Queſtion.

Firſt, As for his Prophecy of the Great Image, Chapter two, the Stone, verſe thirty fourth, which is interpreted Chriſts Kingdom, verſe forty fourth, cannot be meant of Chriſts Spiritual Kingdom, but muſt neceſſarily point at an outward.

The Reaſons are,

1 Becauſe the riſe of this Kingdom is not till after that the feet of the great Image, i. e. the Roman Monarchy in its Antichriſtian ſtate, is riſen and in being, which is clear;

1 Becauſe Daniel, to whom things in the Viſion were repreſented (as his interpretation, verſe thirty ſixt to forty ſixt, doth evidently manifeſt) in that order of ſucceſſion that they were to come forth in afterwards, beholds the Feet before yet hee ſees the Stone; as verſe thirty four, Thou ſaweſt till that a ſtone was cut out without hands, which ſmote the Image upon his feet; the ſeeing of the Stone cut out, and ſmiting, was after that the whole Image in its ſeveral parts had been preſented to him; therefore I ſay, as all the other parts, ſo likewiſe the Feet of the Image were in being before the Stone.

2 Becauſe Daniel beholds the Stone, ſo ſoon as formed, to ſmite the Feet, verſe thirty four, therefore muſt the Feet bee in being before the Stone was formed.

3 Becauſe the Kingdom ſignified by the Stone is not ſet up till in the days of the ten Antichriſtian Kings, verſe forty four, And in the days of theſe Kings ſhall the God of Heaven ſet up a Kingdom. That theſe Kings can point at no other but the ten Antichriſtian Kings John ſpeaks of, Revelations 17.12, 13, 14. See our future diſcourſe, page three hundred and eighteen, and three hundred and nineteen. Now the Kingdom of the Stone being to bee ſet up in the days of the ten Antichriſtian Kings, therefore muſt the Antichriſtian State be before the Kingdom of the Stone. If ſo, then cannot Chriſts Spiritual Kingdom be the thing ſignified by the Stone, for that was ſet up when Chriſt firſt gave forth his Spirit, immediatly upon his Aſcenſion, which was within the time that the Iron Leggs of the Image, verſe forty, i. e. the Roman Monarchy in its firſt, and as yet Pagan ſtate, did bear rule, being three hundred years and upwards before the Feet, viz. the Antichriſtian State had exiſtence or being in the World. Chriſts Spiritual Kingdom therefore being long before Antichriſts Kingdom was begun; but the Kingdom of the Stone having not being till afterwards, it follows that the Kingdom of the Stone cannot bee Chriſts Spiritual Kingdom, but muſt be an outward.

Second Reaſon, Becauſe it is the Stones proper and peculier work to break in peeces the Great Image, i. e. outward Powers.

Firſt, That it is its proper work, is clear, becauſe it doth the thing not accidentally, but intentionally, and therefore it is ſaid to do it by ſmiting, verſe thirty four, thirty five, & forty five; which Phraſe notes the intention of the Agent, it ſmites the Great Image, with full purpoſe and reſolution to break it, and therefore obſerve, it never leaves ſmiting, after once it hath begun, till it hath beaten the Great Image to very chaff and duſt, verſ. 35.

Secondly, That it is its principal work, is clear, becauſe no other work is attributed to the Stone but this only, which ſheweth, that the Kingdom of the Stone is a Kingdom ſet up by God to perform this work, which in caſe it doth it not, it doth nothing. But now the proper and principal work of Chriſts Spiritual Kingdom is another thing, viz. The increaſing and edifying it ſelf in love; and it doth not at all intermeddle, much leſs undertake it as its proper and principal work, with the routing and breaking of Worldly Powers, which if indeed it ſhould, then Chriſts Spiritual Kingdom (the proper and principal work hereof being once rightly apprehended by the Saints, the Children of this Kingdom) would ſoon prove a thing of as dangerous conſequence to the Rulers of this World, as the Doctrin of the Fifth Monarchy either is, or can be. But this I ſay is not the work of Chriſts Spiritual Kingdom, therefore cannot the Kingdom of the Stone bee Chriſts Spiritual Kingdom, but muſt bee an outward.

Third Reaſon, Becauſe the Kingdom of the Stone is ſuch a Kingdom, as that the ſtanding and continuance of the Great Image is altogether inconſiſtent with the growth and proſperity thereof; which is clear, becauſe it neither doth, nor can grow up to be a great Mountain, filling the whole Earth, till the total removal of the Great Image, verſe thirty five. But now the ſtanding and continuance of the Great Image is no way inconſiſtent with the growth and proſperity of Chriſts Spiritual Kingdom, but rather is indeed advantagious unto it, as the Perſecutions that Chriſts Spiritual Kingdom hath met with, and that in all Ages, from the Great Image, which have always been the greateſt and moſt effectual means of its growth, and fruitfulneſs, do bear witneſs; therefore cannot the Spiritual Kingdom of Chriſt bee the Kingdom here meant.

Fourthly, Becauſe the Kingdom of the Stone is a Kingdom in reſpect of Nature, the ſame with the Kingdoms repreſented by the Great Image, i. e. it is outward as they are outward; which appears,

1 From the general ſcope and drift of the Prophecy which runs upon outward Kingdoms, all the firſt four Kingdoms, or Monarchies are outward, as none can deny; why then the Holy Ghoſt in ſpeaking of the Fifth and laſt ſhould ſo farre vary his ſcope, as preſently to glide from the outward Kingdom to the inward, ought (beſides the bare ſay ſo) to have ſome ſolid and ſubſtantial reaſon brought for it, by thoſe, whoſoever they are, that either do or ſhall aſſert it.

2 Becauſe it is not proper to ſay, that a bare Spiritual Kingdom, conſidered only as Spiritual ſhould break in peeces, beat to very chaffe; grind to Powder the Great Image, i. e. deſtroy the very being of worldly Kingdoms, which work is yet notwithſtanding done by the Stone, as Verſ. 35.44, 45. Indeed Chriſts Spiritual Kingdom may by that light and life it gives forth, much refine, and reform outward Kingdoms, but when once the work comes to breaking and beating to pecoes, i.e. ſubverting Kingdoms, razing their very foundations, and deſtroying their being, as they are the Kingdoms of this World, here (unleſs we conceive God to do it by a Miracle) muſt we alſo conceive ſome other hand, beſides a Spiritual, to bee put to the work.

3 Becauſe the Stone, to the end there might not be a vacancy in the world, comes ſtraightway in the place and room of the Great Image, ſo ſoon as ever the ſame is totally broken, verſe thirty five; for as the Great Image, while ſtanding, bears rule over all the earth, verſe thirty nine, ſo the ſame being broken, the Stone becomes a Mountain, and fills the whole Earth, verſe thirty five, therefore muſt the Kingdom of the ſtone be ſuch a Kingdom as was that of the Great Image, viz. outward, or otherwiſe the coming of that in the place of the other now taken away, could not ſupply the want of the other. From all which reaſons (and ſome others alſo that are laid down in the following Diſcourſe, page one hundred and five, one hundred and ſix.) It is clear, That the Kingdom of the Stone, mentioned Daniel 2. cannot be a Spiritual Kingdom, but muſt be an outward. Thus much from Daniels firſt Prophecy.

Secondly, As for that Kingdom Daniel ſpeaks of in his Second Prophecy, Chapter ſeven, which is there ſaid to be given to the Saints, and to ſucceed (in reſpect of the greatneſs and glory of it, though not in reſpect of the beginnings) the Kingdom of the Little Horn, that it cannot be a Spiritual Kingdom, but muſt alſo be an outward and viſible, is clear, for theſe reaſons.

Firſt Reaſon, Becauſe it is a Kingdom in which outward judgement is given to the Saints, verſe twenty two, Judgement was given to the Saints of the moſt High. This Judgement muſt be outward, becauſe the effect of it is ſuch, viz. a caſting down the Thrones of the Fourth Beaſt, verſe nine, by conſequence therefore the Kingdom it ſelf muſt be ſuch.

Second Reaſon, Becauſe it is a Kingdom the Saints are ſaid to poſſeſſe, verſe twenty two, The time came that the Saints poſſeſſed the Kingdom, but it is more proper to ſay of the Spiritual Kingdom that it poſſeſſeth them, than they it.

Third Reaſon, Becauſe it is the very ſame Kingdom which was before governed by the Little Horn, that is given to the Saints; now that being an outward Kingdom, ſuch muſt the Kingdom given to the Saints be alſo.

That the Kingdom given to the Saints is the very ſame Kingdom that the Little Horn did before poſſeſs, is clear, from the plain words and expreſſions uſed by the Holy Ghoſt, verſe twenty one, twenty two, I beheld, and the ſame Horn made War with the Saints, and prevailed againſt them; until the Ancient of days came, and Judgement was given to the Saints of the moſt High, and the time came that the Saints poſſeſſed the Kingdom. Note, we do not read it, That the Saints poſſeſſed a Kingdom upon this their judging of the Little Horn, but the Kingdom, teaching us thus much, That that very Kingdom which the Saints by judging the Little Horn do take from him, they themſelves do afterwards poſſeſſe. So verſe ſeventeen and eighteen, Theſe great Beaſts which are four, are four Kings which ſhall ariſe out of the earth; but the Saints of the moſt High • eall take the Kingdom, and poſſeſs the Kingdom for ever, even for ever, and ever. Obſerve, the Kingdom, or that very Kingdom which was before governed by the four great Beaſts, and by the Little Horn, as the laſt Limb of the Fourth Beaſt, is the Kingdom that the Saints take, i.e. from this Little Horn, and ſo conſequently from all the Beaſts, or Powers, his Predeceſſors, and having taken it, do poſſeſſe it for ever and ever, i.e. it ſhall never be taken from them again, as they took it from all the other. So verſe twenty ſix, twenty ſeven, But the Judgement ſhall ſit, and they ſhall take away his Dominion, to conſume, and to deſtroy it unto the end. And the Kingdom, and Dominion, and the greatneſs of the Kingdom under the whole Heaven, ſhall be given to the people of the Saints of the moſt High, whoſe Kingdom is an everlaſting Kingdom, and all Dominions ſhall ſerve and obey him.

Obſerve, The Saints, in the Evening of the Little Horns Kingdom, are by the Decree of Heaven conſtituted a High Court of Juſtice; hereupon they ſit in Judgement, by ſitting in Judgement they take away his Dominion; Whoſe? Why, the Little Horns, upon whom the Diſcourſe runs; but what becomes of it when they have taken it away, & deſpoiled him of it? why, it is by God given to them, the Kingdom, and Dominion, and greatneſſe of the Kingdom under the whole Heaven ſhall be given to the people of the Saints of the moſt High. Which yet further (beſides the general ſcope which ſhews this to bee the ſame Kingdom with that of the Little Horn) that this Kingdom ſhould bee an outward Kingdom, the uſe of that Phraſe, the greatneſſe of the kingdom under the whole Heaven, which cannot without forcing the words be reſtrained to a Spiritual Kingdom only, doth neceſſarily import. The Kingdom of the Saints therefore, which Daniel in his ſecond Prophecy makes mention of, cannot bee a meer Spiritual Kingdom, but is, and muſt be an outward.

But now as it was the great Maſter-peice of Satans policy at the time of Chriſts firſt coming, when hee ſet up his Spiritual Kingdom, to put that Generation of men altogether upon looking after the outward kingdom, drawing them thereby to a neglect of that Kingdom, which they in that day ought ſpecially to have attended to: So is it his great engine of Policy in the days a little before Chriſts ſecond coming, when now Chriſt is indeed, and in truth, entring into the World to ſet up his outward Kingdom, to turn the eyes of this Generation altogether upon the Spiritual Kingdom, drawing them thereby off from the outward, hereby cunningly holding forth one truth as a bait to allure from another, and endeavouring to draw the hearts of men from the great truth of the Generation, by preſenting them with ſome other truth, every way as glorious, conſidered in it ſelf (the time and ſeaſon only, which is ſtill the thing that adds beauty to Generation-truth, ſet aſide) as the truth it ſelf of the Generation.

Upon the fore-going Principle, That Chriſt is to have an outward viſible Kingdom, and the ſcope of the following Diſcourſe, which proves that the time of ſetting up this Kingdom is now approaching, and upon us, doth it not neceſſarily follow, that all thoſe who in this day, ſhall by their ſayings or actings be found to have any hand in keeping Chriſt from his Throne, are by ſo doing become guilty of High Treaſon againſt this King of Kings, and though they may and ſhould eſcape the judgement of man, may they not expect (in caſe they remember not from whence they are fallen, and repent) to be arraigned as ſuch before his Throne another day, who will then paſſe a Judgement of perſons and things, not as they are in mens interpretations, but according as he hath left them in his Word? yea, let it be ſeriouſly conſidered, and laid to heart, whether or no the condemning this bleſſed Doctrin, the glorious truth of the Age, viz. of the Fifth Monarchy, or Chriſts viſible Kingdom (conſidering that no five Parties this day in England have ſo much to ſay from the Word for their particular opinions, though all they have to ſay be put together, as may be ſaid for this) be a thing juſtifiable before Gods people, or rather in the ſight of God and out Father, eſpecially too when as the perſons condemning, have never to this day given the truth a fair hearing, by uſing ſuch endeavours for the finding out the minde of God in this thing, as they might, and as lies in their power to do, and which, were there nothing elſe but the diſ-ſatisfaction of Gods people, God declares from Heaven that he calls upon them to do? yea whether or no is not this very act of theirs a dealing more injuriouſly with the bleſſed Truth of Chriſt, the leaſt ïota of which is of farre greater worth than Men and Angels, than ever did the Pagan Powers of the Roman Empire in the Apoſtles days, with the perſons of particular men (though Malefactors) who always refuſed to paſs a Sentence till they had heard what the accuſed could ſpeak? Acts 25.16. yea whether or no ſuch perſons whoſe words and actions are Patterns unto Multitudes, will not have much to anſwer for (unleſs they repent) if ſo be Chriſt ſhall one day finde it, that by their ſlight ſpeeches, or frowning carriages towards the truth of the Generation, the generality of poor ſouls that know nothing, but are meerly led by example, ſhall be emboldned, encouraged to ſlight, revile, oppoſe, perſecute that truth in which his honour is more nearly and immediatly concerned, than in any other truth beſides it? And is it not poſſible that a man with a faithful and upright heart, (but conſidered as miſtaken, or darkned in his Principles) may do all this? Did not Paul act with an upright heart, conſidering he acted zealouſly according to his light, whilſt yet he perſecuted the Church, and the true way of the Lord? And in ſuch Caſes, is it not the better and ſafer way for a man to fear his own heart, and to be jealous that it acts under ſome diſtemper, and ſo makes not a judgement of it ſelf in the light of the Lords Spirit, but in the darkneſs of temptation, than to bee confident of it, eſpecially too when a general fear of ſuch a thing dwells upon the hearts of Gods people? David concluded himſelf then for certain to be under a temptation, when he ſaw that otherwiſe hee muſt condemn the generation of the righteous, Pſal. 73.15. Much more I could ſay, but that it is no delight to dig into a Wound.

To conclude therefore, ſeeing the viſage of our times (both in reſpect of the great oppoſition this day made to the truth of the age, and in many other reſpects) is grown pale and black, and that bleſſed Cauſe of Chriſt, that of late looked with a freſh and amiable countenance, begins now to appear wan with Death in the face of it, is it not high time for the Saints, and all thoſe who wiſh well to Sion, to cry mightily to the Lord, and to give him no reſt, to humble themſelves greatly before him, for thoſe manifold abominations committed in the Land, eſpecially that Pride, Luke-warmneſs, Wantonneſs, unthankfulneſs for Mercies paſt, love of this preſent World, open licentiouſneſs, groſs Apoſtacy, that ſuperabounds even among thoſe that bear upon them the Name of the Lord, which things have given our Father juſt cauſe, not only thus to frown, but to depart from us for ever? Yea, is it not high time, if wee have a tongue for Chriſt, now to ſpeak for him? if bowels, now to ſympathize with him? if tears in our eyes, now to pour them forth before the Lord? if groans in our hearts, now to ſend them up into Heaven? if faith in the Word and promiſe of God, now to act it? if exhortations in our Breaſts, now to bring them forth, and ſpeak often one to another? and will not the Lord hearken, and hear? and ſhall not a Book of remembrance be written before him, for them that now fear the Lord, and call upon his Name? Yea, will not God ſay concerning them, and they ſhall bee mine in the day when I make up my Jewels, and though they are Children full of failings, yet for this ſervice ſake I will ſpare them, as a man ſpareth his own Son that ſerveth him? ſurely he will.

And ſhould not this conſideration added to all the reſt, that the ſet time of our Redemption is at hand (which dwelling every day more and more upon my heart, hath cauſed mee to ſpeak) work up our hearts to all theſe things, and beget in us noble reſolutions to hazard whatever is precious to us in the World, for the ſake of Chriſt, and his now deſpiſed Cauſe? which though trampled upon at preſent, yet ſhall it ſuddenly ariſe with Power and great Glory, and then ſhall all its enemies melt away before it, as the Snow before the Sun; then ſhall the Armies of Heaven march forth with the Lord in the Head of them, and the Princes ſhall bee afraid of his Enſigne, whoſe fire is in Sion, and his furnace in Jeruſalem. The zeal of the Lord of Hoſts will perform this. So beleeves he, and ſo he prays, who is,

From my Study in Trunch, this 4th. day of the 9th. Month, 1654. A poor ſinful Creature, unworthy to make mention of the name of the Lord, John Tillinghaſt.
Errata.

PAge 2. line 10. for ſo even this alſo, read, ſo even in th • s alſo. p. 3. l. 26, 27. for, ſuch knowledge alſo is the root of grace, r. ſuch knowledge is the root of grace. p. 4. l. 14. for, apace, this way, r. apace this way. p. 6. l. laſt, for, be with Jew and Gentile, r. betwixt Jew and Gentile. p. 17. l. 18. for are the ſame, r. both which are the ſame. p. 22. l. 15. for at, r. as, l. 16. blot out which. p. 37. l. 20. for current, r. concurrent. p. 43. l. 29 r. Biſhop of Rome, Purgatory, p. 45. l. 25. r. they are to be, p. 77 l. 27. for conſiſts, r. inſiſts, p. 82. l. 31, 32. for terrible to the Saints, r. tetrible to the Nations, p. 85. l. laſt, r. Crowns, p 87. l. 11. for in. r. into p. 89. l. 13. for the beginning, r. our beginning, l. 21, 22. for the aforeſaid ending of the 1260. days, r. the ending of the 1260. days from the aforeſaid beginning p. 109. l. 24. for eleven, r. eleventh, p. 129. l. laſt, for 1230. r. 1150. p. 137. l. laſt. forhurt, r. hurts, p. 14 1. l. 29. for alſo, v. 3. r. v. 3. alſo I. p. 183. l. 25. for forth came, r. came forth, p. 160 l. 9. for who are, r. which is, p. 213. l. 3. for mollifie, r. mollifies, p. 232. l. 26. for four, r. fourth, p. 239. l. 234. for one, r. once, p. 265. l. 11. for Heſter ten, r. Heſter the 10th, p. 291. l. 29. for account, r. accounts Epiſt. p. 2. l. 8. r. obedience, p. 3. l. 25. r. are at an under.

Page 121. lines 27, 28, 29, 30, 31, 32.

Let the words which are printed greatly out of place be read thus:

Yea by conſequence many hundred years ſhould here be leaped over, which is not in any of the other Prophecies.

2 Becauſe the riſe of this Little Horn is in the latter time of the Graecian Monarchy, verſe twenty three, and in the latter time, &c.

Place the Title to the Appendix before Page 311.

Knowledge of the Times: OR, The Reſolution of the Queſtion, How long it ſhall be unto the end of Wonders. Divided into three Parts.
PART I.

Handling ſome things of more General concernment as to our whole Diſcourſe.

CHAP. 1. Of the Juſtifiableneſſe of this Enquiry.

AMongſt the many Queſtions that this Age abounds with, The Great Queſtion that we find in Daniel Cha. 12.6. How long ſhall it be to the end of Wonders? is neither of the leaſt of thoſe Gods people at this day are ſeeking reſolution in; Nor may it be ranked among thoſe we call Unneceſſary, ſeeing the Age it ſelf we live in, hath been, and is an age of Wonders.

And truly, that I, once, and now again have aſſayed it, doth not ariſe I hope from any confidence I have of my ſelf, that there is in me above others an ability to reſolve it (the thought of which thing I deſire to abandon) but having been moved of late to wait upon the Lord for light, as in other things, ſo even this alſo; and hoping that a door of light as to the Queſtion propounded, hath through the Lords merciful guidance of a ſinful unworthy creature, been ſet open to me, I have judged it a duty, and indeed the greateſt peece of ſervice that I find my ſelf in a capacity to do for Chriſt in my generation, to ſet this light on a Candleſtick, that Gods people may ſee it.

Yet in regard the Enquiry it ſelf is ſuch as lieth under the cenſures of ſome, the reproaches of others, and the general neglect almoſt of all, it will be neceſſary that ſomething be ſpoken in the firſt place, by way of Juſtification of the thing it ſelf, which I ſhall do in two or three Concluſions laid down and proved.

1. CONCLUSION.

That this Enquiry is no enemy to a mans own grace, or the grace of God in others; but rather a ſpecial help and advantage to the increaſe and quickning of grace, both in the perſon enquiring, and the perſon reading and hearing.

1 Becauſe it is included within that general Command, John 5.39. Search the Scriptures; now God doth not command that which is prejudicial to our grace.

2 Becauſe the word of bleſſing goes along with ſincere and faithful endeavours of this nature, Rev. 1.3. Bleſſed is he that readeth, and they that hear the words of this Propheſie, and keep thoſe things which are written therein, Rev. 22.7. Bleſſed is he that keepeth the ſayings of the Propheſie of this Book. The original word in either place tranſlated keep, comes from a verb that ſignifies to reſerve, or to obſerve; noting, That this keeping which hath a bleſſing twice annexed to it, firſt in the beginning, then in the end of the Apocalyps, is ſuch a keeping whereby a man layes up the things here written in his heart, obſerves how they are fulfilled, and acts towards God and man accordingly; and therefore (I take it) is this Book fenced in with Gods bleſſing, ſo as no other beſides it, to deliver us from ſuch a conceit as this, viz. That by ſtudying of it, our grace would either ſuffer decay, or be loſt.

3 Becauſe we have a particular promiſe of fruit and ſucceſſe annexed to ſuch an Enquiry, Dan. 12.4. Many ſhall run to and fro, and knowledge ſhall be increaſed; This knowledge here mentioned being a fruit of the Promiſe, is not to be looked upon as head-knowledge only, but heart-knowledge alſo, and ſuch knowledge alſo, is the very root and watering of grace, and therefore can be no enemy to it.

4 Not to multiply Reaſons, which of the two, whether to be ignorant of the times of Chriſts glorious appearances, and his coming, or to know them, if this knowledge be a thing attainable, eſpecially for perſons living in the laſt dayes, who are neer the times, and in a manner bordering upon them, be the moſt likely thing to make a heart ſecure, lull it aſleep in ſin, love of this preſent world, forgetfulneſſe of God, make it negligent in the holy Chriſtian duties of faith, patience, watchfulneſſe, prayer, &c. I call not Reaſon onely, but ſuch Chriſtians alſo, who knew their own hearts fifteen or twenty yeers ago with a principle then that Chriſts coming was at hand, and who know them now, but it may be with a contrary principle, to be Judges. And truly (to ſay no more) how Chriſtians, though they may rub and chafe their hearts, will yet be able, ſeeing that the Sun is coming up with the beams of his light and vigor apace, this way to keep them alive, or warm long, if they too come not up to truths of this nature, I do not know.

2. CONCLUSION.

That the Holy Ghoſt hath expreſly foretold that Saints at the time of the end, ſhall make diligent enquiry into theſe things. This I take to be the thing noted in thoſe words, Dan. 8.13. Daniel in the foregoing Viſion had had the three laſt Monarchies, viz. 1 Medes and Perſians, 2 Grecians, 3 Romans, repreſented to him. The Roman Monarchy (which is the laſt) is repreſented in its twofold ſtate; 1 In its pure civil ſtate; 2 In its mixt Antichriſtian ſtate. All which things occaſion will be offered to handle more fully in the following Diſcourſe. Now obſerve, after all theſe things had paſſed before Daniel in the Viſion, then as the very laſt thing of all, Daniel hears a diſcourſe of Saints upon our Queſtion; Then I heard one Saint ſpeaking, and another Saint ſaid unto that certain Saint which ſpake, How long shall be the Viſion concerning the daily ſacrifice, and the tranſgreſſion of deſolation, to give both the Sanctuary and the Hoſt to be trodden underfoot? The particle [then] denotes the thing to be ſucceſſive in time, as well as in place; that is, after Daniel had ſeen the whole Viſion, firſt the Medes and Perſians come forth, and for a while make a great noiſe in the world, but in the end vaniſh; Then the Grecians, who alſo for a time make ſome ſtir, and then vaniſh: After them the Romans, who firſt conquer Nations as they were a civil ſtate; then ſecondly, rage againſt the true worſhip of God, the holy City, and the inhabitants thereof, as they are an Antichriſtian ſtate. Now in the concluſion of all, after all theſe things had paſſed before Daniel, and he ſaw this laſt Monarchy, in its laſt ſtate upon the nick of vaniſhing away, as were already the former, then Daniel ſpecially obſerves another thing, of which he had not ſeen the like all the time and way before, viz. He beholds many Saints, and they are in very deep ſerious diſcourſe, and the ſubject of all their diſcourſe is this Queſtion, HOW LONG SHALL IT BE TO THE END OF WONDERS? or How long ſhall the Viſion be? To which Queſtion of theirs, Daniel hears anſwer given, and immediately thereupon the whole Viſion is at an end; onely the interpretation of it comes in afterwards; ſo that it is evident theſe words are properly the laſt in place and time both, of the whole Viſion, which clearly affords us this Obſervation:

That Saints in the time of the end, ſhall be much upon this Enquiry, How long it ſhall be unto the end of Wonders?

This is farther clear from Daniels great Propheſie, Chap. 11, & 12. in which two Chapters Daniel hath the very ſame thing, viz. the three laſt Monarchies declared to him by way of Voice, which in the former he ſaw by way of Viſion. Now after the declaration of the whole, Daniel Chap. 12. verſ. 5, 6. ſeeth two men ſtanding, betwixt which is a River, and one is on the one ſide, and the other on the other. A fit reſemblance of Jew and Gentile, ready to unite, yet not fully united; for ſtill there is a River betwixt them, which argues that theſe words relate to the time a little before the coming in of the Jews, when Jew and Gentile ſhall be upon the very bank of union, yet not united. Of theſe two, one propounds a Queſtion to the man cloathed in linnen upon the waters of the River, How long ſhall it be unto the end of theſe Wonders? This Queriſt I conceive to be not other then the Gentile Saints; and my reaſon is, becauſe verſ. 7. anſwer to him is made in the Gentile Dialect of a time, times, and a half, which is a time proper to the Gentile Churches, Rev. 12.14. and not to the Jews. And further I look upon the Enquirer here to be the very ſame for time and perſons both, with that Chap. 8.13. Onely with this difference, the Enquirers, though many, are here called but one, becauſe in oppoſition to the Jews we have one here put for the whole body of the Gentile Saints; there they are ſpoken of as many, becauſe in that Text is no ſuch oppoſition bewith Jew and Gentile.

Now from the whole I make up this Concluſion, That in the time of the end, a little before the Jews coming in, and Antichriſts fall, ſhall be great Enquiries made among the Gentile Saints, concerning the end of Wonders. And if ſo, then in caſe we are fallen into that time (as what I have ſaid already in my Key, and have farther to ſay, will manifeſt that we are) this Enquiry is not onely juſtifiable, but neceſſary, it being the great truth of this Age.

3. CONCLUSION.

That the Holy Ghoſt hath left particular and certain ground for the faith of Gods people in the laſt dayes to go to God upon for light and knowledge in this thing. I ſay not onely, that the promiſe made to runners to and fro, Dan. 12.4. that knowledge ſhall be increaſed, is, yea ought to be (for why is it elſe left upon Record?) a ground for our faith to build upon in making this Enquiry; nor onely, that the particular anſwers given to the Queriſts, Dan. 8. and Chap. 12. is, yea ſhould be another; for why is particular anſwer given to the Enquirers, but to ſhew that upon a ſober humble and beleeving Enquiry a knowledge of the thing ſought after ſhould be given forth? But that which I chiefly aim at, is, the particular aſſurance left us in the word that the ſealed Book of Propheſies ſhould be unſealed, the words opened, the underſtanding of the Viſion made manifeſt to the Saints at, or in time of the end; For this ſee Dan. 12.4. But thou, O Daniel, ſhut up the words and ſeal the Book, even to the time of the end. The Book is to be ſcaled, the words therein ſhut up; But how long? Why, but till the time of the end; then Book and Words both are to be opened and read.

So verſ. 9. Go thy way Daniel, for the words are cloſed up till the time of the end. Daniel heard the anſwer given by the man that was cloathed in Linnen, verſ. 7. to the Enquirer, verſ. 6. but ſaith he, I underſtood not; therefore from a deſire to know, Daniel himſelf puts the Queſtion, verſ. 8. to whom anſwer is given, verſ. 11.12. but withall obſerve, Daniel hath firſt a kind of gracious check, Go thy way Daniel, for the words are cloſed up untill the time of the end; as to ſay, Daniel, thou wouldeſt fain have the knowledge of theſe things preſently, but go thy way Daniel; for the time of Revelation is the time of the end; though I will give thee the words now, yet the unſealing of them ſhall not be till the time of the end, when (and not before) my mind in theſe ſealed myſteries ſhall be made known to my children.

Sutable hereunto are the words, Dan. 8.17. which words I have ſhewed in my Key, Theſi 3. are not to bee underſtood of the time of the Viſion, nor the ſubject matter thereof, but of the underſtanding of the Viſion, which though revealed in part to Daniel then, yet was not to be fully and clearly opened untill the time of the end.

The Concluſion is, That at the time of the end, the Book is to be unſealed, the underſtanding of the Viſion to be made known; and if ſo, then ſurely this our practice, we being fallen into the lap of the laſt times, is juſtifiable; for why hath God ſo long before given aſſurance that then he will unſeal the Book, open the words, but onely to this end, that our faith, when this time comes on, might as in other things, ſo in this, wait upon him for light and knowledge.

CHAP. II. Shewing, That the Myſtical Numbers of Daniel and the Revelations do hold forth a certain definite and determined time.

HAving in the foregoing Chapter ſhewed the juſtifiableneſſe of our Enquiry, and what comfortable hope the enquiring Soul may have of Gods preſence and aſſiſtance to accompany him in this work. In the next place it is requiſite, becauſe we have no ground in Scripture to go upon for an anſwer to this Queſtion, but onely the myſtical Numbers of Daniel, and the Revelations, that I proceed to ſhew that there is a certain definite and determined time held forth in thoſe numbers; onely in order to the thing, to the end ſome of the following Arguments may not want their weight, nor we be put in our proof to inſiſt upon each particular number by it ſelf, I premiſe, That look what is truly affirmed of any one, or more myſtical Numbers, the ſame may be as truly affirmed of all, except ſuch, where ſome ſubſtantial reaſon appears to the contrary. If therefore it may be truly affirmed of ſome one or more, that a definite time is held forth in them, then by the ſame rule of all, where (I ſay) appears not ſome ſolid reaſon to the contrary. This premiſed, my Reaſons that a definite time is held forth in the myſtical Numbers of Daniel, and the Revelations, are theſe.

1 Becauſe They are all broken Numbers; the two thouſand and three hundred dayes, Dan. 8.14. is a broken Number; for although the three hundred is a round Number in reſpect of Hundreds, yet it is a broken Number in reſpect of Thouſands, which is the way of numbring here. Upon the ſame account, but more evident, the one thouſand two hundred and ninety, the one thouſand three hundred thirty five dayes, Chap. 12. Johns one thouſand two hundred and ſixty dayes, his two and forty months are all broken Numbers.

Now it is a Maxime among Interpreters, that notwithſtanding round numbers do ſometimes ſignifie an indefinite time, yet broken numbers ever a definite.

2 Becauſe If they ſignifie not a definite time, no account can be made up from them; for who can define what is indefinite, or make up an account from uncertain numbers? But now the intendment of the Holy Ghoſt in laying them down, is, that from them an account might be made up, as is cleer.

1 Becauſe the ſcope of the Queſtions propoſed, Dan. 8. and Dan. 12. to which the myſtical Numbers there mentioned, are given in as anſwers, doth look at ſuch a determined time as known; ſome certain concluſion concerning the time, How long the things revealed ſhould be in accompliſhing, might from thence be drawn up; therefore the Queſtions do not run thus, Shall theſe things be long, O Lord in doing? but thus, How long ſhall the Viſion be? Dan. 8.13. How long ſhall it be to the end of theſe Wonders? Chap. 12.6. the thing enquired after in both, is a certain determined time.

2 Becauſe the Holy Ghoſt doth lay down a particular head of account, Chap. 12.11. Now this is never uſed but onely there where ſome account is to be made up. But were the time indefinite, there could (as before I have ſaid) be no making up of any account.

3 Reaſ. Becauſe ſhould we look upon them as holding forth onely an indefinite time, ſignifying no more but a long time, there would be manifeſt Tautologie in laying them down. For in Daniels Viſion, Chap. 8. where is recorded his two thouſand three hundred dayes, verſ. 14. it is ſaid over and above, verſ. laſt. The Viſion ſhall be for many dayes: If now the two thouſand three hundred dayes ſignifie onely a long time, it is the ſame with the other. So in Daniels Viſion Chap. 10, ch. 11, and ch. 12. where the one thouſand two hundred and ninety, the one thouſand three hundred thirty five dayes are ſpoken of, it is ſaid moreover, Chap. 10.1. The time appointed was long: The very ſame with the other, if not a dertain time but a long time onely be intended.

4 Becauſe For this very reaſon Daniel 8. verſ. laſt, it is ſaid the Viſion of the evening and morning is true. The Viſion of the morning and evening hath a particular and peculiar reference to the two thouſand three hundred dayes, verſ. 14. (or as the Hebrew reads it, two thouſand three hundred mornings and evenings.) Now Daniel in the foregoing verſes, from verſ. 20. having had the whole Viſion in an orderly manner interpreted to him, in the concluſion of all, leſt Daniel ſhould doubt of the time aſſigned of two thouſand three hundred mornings and evenings (which was the very laſt thing of the Viſion, and is here of the Interpretation) it is added, The Viſion of the evening and morning is true, that is, the two thouſand three hundred dayes, which thou heardeſt mention made of in the cloſe of the Viſion, are a certain and determined time, and therefore verſ. 19. the time is ſaid to be a ſet time, or an appointed time; At the time appointed the end ſhall be.

5 Becauſe God in former times under the Old Teſtament, hath ever meaſured out the Bondage and Captivity of his Church by ſet and determined times. Four hundred and thirty years was the time in Egypt, and this time ſet to a very day, Exod. 12.41, 51. Seventy yeers the ſet time in Babylon. Now is New Teſtament grace leſſe than Old Teſtament? Nay conſider the Egyptian and Babylonian Captivity were both Types of the great Captivity of Gods Church in the latter dayes. Now is it likely that in both the Types the time ſhould be determined, and yet undetermined in the Antitype? Is the Type more cleer, and the Antitype more dark? yet this will follow.

6 If any ſhould ſay ſo, let them ſay the ſame alſo for Daniels Seventy weeks, Chap. 9.24. for the reaſon is the ſame, Nay the Seventy weeks are a round number; ſo is none of the other; yet who doth, or will affirm an indefinite time to be there ſignified? or if any ſhould, let them when they have done, ſhew any ground at all (unleſſe bare humane authority) for above four hundred of the worlds yeers, and that too within ſuch a period, in which (without cenſure) leſſe credit is to be given to the Hiſtorians, then almoſt in any one period from the Flood to this day.

7 Becauſe ſuch a Principle would be very prejudicial to the faith, comfort, and prayers of the Saints; for the more certain ground any of theſe are built upon, the more ſtrongly do they act. Daniels aſſurance that Seventy yeers was the utmoſt terme of the Babylonian Captivity, raiſeth mightily his faith and prayer. But now were the time held forth in theſe myſtical Numbers an indefinite time onely, there ſhould be no certain ground for any of theſe: And hence it would follow that the people of God in the laſt dayes ſhould inſtead of having a more clear word of Propheſie, have a more doubtful ground for their faith and prayer in this reſpect, then had Gods people in times of old.

The Concluſion is, That the myſtical Numbers of Daniel and the Revelations, do hold forth to us a certain definite and determined time.

CHAP. III. Clearing and confirming our general Diſtinction, viz. That the end of the Beaſts Tyranny, relates to one time; the end of the fourth Monarchy to another.

IT is a truth, Nothing can be rightly defined, which is not firſt rightly divided. The very reaſon (as to the creature) why mens conceptions have been ſo dark as to the mind of the Holy Ghoſt in the myſtical Numbers of Daniel and the Apocalyps, hath ſeemed to me to be this, becauſe they who have undertaken the work, have not applied diſtinct numbers to their diſtinct times, but either carried them all in a heap, or handled them all ſeverally, i. e. made all to end at one and the ſame ending point, or made as many ending points as there are divers numbers. Now of theſe two, the firſt inevitably breeds confuſion throughout all the Propheſies of the Old and New Teſtament; the laſt leaves in the Enquirer after the moſt diligent ſearch a ſeed and a ground of doubting, becauſe the light he hath attained, is a word eſtabliſhed onely by the mouth of one witneſſe, and that witneſſe too (which makes the ſuſpicion greater) muſt of neceſſity be, where firſt numbers are not rightly diſtinguiſhed, for a principal part of its teſtimony, as namely, where I am to begin, or how to carry on the account having begun, onely humane; it being impoſſible for that man who would carry up each number ſeverally, to find divine Teſtimony either for the beginning, or carrying on of any one number; for of this kind of teſtimony; though there is ſufficient left us in the word for each number, both where to begin it, and how to carry it on, yet all is couched in the Harmony; and the Harmony it ſelf depends upon a right diviſion; ſo that conſequently, this wanting, we have nothing left us but humane teſtimony (which is a thing fallible, and no ground of faith) to warrant the beginning, or carrying on of any particular number that we have either in Daniel, or the Revelations.

That therefore we might have firm ground and ſure footing here, I have in my Key, Theſi 15. laid down (as the foundation of all) this Diſtinction, namely to diſtinguiſh betwixt the time of the Jews firſt ſtirring, and their compleat deliverance; betwixt the time where an end is put to the Beaſts Reign and Tyranny, and his final deſtruction; or (which is all one in reſpect of time with the other) betwixt Chriſt ſtanding up in his Witneſſes, and his ſtanding up in his Perſon.

Now although the Harmony that by vertue of this diſtinction is brought forth betwixt all the myſtical Numbers (of which in my Key, Theſ. 63.) be Argument ſufficient to make the diſtinction valid, yet that it may appear that all our ground for it lies not here, I ſhall briefly ſhew what particular ground and warrant beſides it, we have in the word for this Diſtinction.

For the firſt branch, which concerns the Jews delivery, our ground is ſo clear from Daniels diſtinguiſhing of times, Chap. 12. verſ. 11, 12. (where he treats of his own Nation more eſpecially) firſt one thouſand two hundred and ninety dayes, then one thouſand three hundred thirty five, that the truth needs no explication.

And although that Diviſion of times made by Daniel is foundation ſufficient for our whole diſtinction, conſidering that the end of the Beaſts Reign, and the Witneſſes Reſurrection, are things contemporary with the Jews firſt ſtirring, as is proved Key, Theſi 17. and alſo Chriſts Perſonal appearance, and the final deſtruction of the Beaſt or fourth Monarchy, contemporary with their compleat deliverance, as alſo ſee our Key, Theſi 34. yet becauſe I will not lay the weight of ſo material a diſtinction upon that ſingle Text onely, I ſhall produce other Scripture grounds which warrant this diſtinction.

Dan. 7.26, 27. A manifeſt diſtinction is made betwixt the end (i.e. the final deſtruction) of the little Horn, (i.e. Antichriſt) and the taking away his Dominion.

His Dominion is taken away at the end of the time, times, and a half, which is the very day of the Witneſſes Reſurrection; i.e. the Beaſts Reign and Tyranny ſhall expire with the time of the Witneſſes riſe; but obſerve, his final deſtruction is not as yet; for after his Dominion is taken away, there is betwixt that, and his end, a time of conſuming and deſtroying him by degrees, till at laſt upon Chriſts Perſonal appearance, a totall deſtruction comes upon him, and thereby a tranſlation of the fourth Monarchy to the Saints. verſ. 26. He ſhall ſpeak great words againſt the moſt High, and ſhall wear out the Saints of the moſt High, and think to change Times and Laws, and they ſhall be given into his hand, untill a time, times, and the dividing of time, verſ. 26. But the judgement ſhall ſit, and they ſhall take away his Dominion to conſume and deſtroy it unto the end. verſ. 27. And the Kingdome and Dominion, and the greatneſſe of the Kingdome under the whole Heaven, ſhall be given to the people of the Saints of the moſt High, whoſe Kingdome is an everlaſting Kingdome, and all Dominions ſhall ſerve and obey him.

So Rev. 11. It is evident that ſo ſoon as the Witneſſes riſe, the treading underfoot the holy City by the Beaſt is at an end; for as the two and forty months of the Beaſts continuance, Rev. 13.5. are interpreted, Chap. 11.2. by another phraſe of treading underfoot the holy City, are the ſame, and therefore both end together; no longer, according to the mind of the Holy Ghoſt, Ch • . 13.5. may he be ſaid to continue, then he treads underfoot the holy City. So it is moſt evident that the two and forty months of treading underfoot the holy City, ends with the end of the one thouſand two hundred and ſixty dayes of the Witneſſes wearing Sackcloth; for what cauſeth the Witneſſes to wear Sackcloth, but this, becauſe the holy City is trodden underfoot? therefore with the end of the one, the other ends. But now obſerve upon the Witneſſes riſe, and putting off their Sackcloth, where ends the Beaſts Tyranny, not the whole Kingdome of the Beaſt is deſtroyed, but a tenth part onely, Rev. 11.13. And the ſame hour the tenth part of the City fell. Yea farther obſerve, after the Witneſſes riſe, we read of a third wo to come quickly; therefore not come yet, verſ. 14. The ſecond woe is paſt, and behold the third woe cometh quickly. And of this woe the Beaſt bears a part, as well as Chriſts other enemies, and therefore not yet finally deſtroyed. Yea farther, (which ſerves us as a clear demonſtration of the thing in hand) we read of the Beaſt as one of the grand Leaders in the battel of Armageddon; Now as this battel ſucceeds the ruine of Rome (as formerly I have proved) ſo doth the ruine of Rome ſucceed the riſe of the Witneſſes, whoſe puniſhment comes in a way of revenge of their quarrel Rev. 18.6. of neceſſity therefore the riſe of the Witneſſes, and conſequently the end of the Beaſts Reign, which expires with the other, muſt be, yea and that ſome time, before the laſt and final deſtruction of the Beaſt.

To ſay, we finde the Beaſt raging even at the battel of Armageddon, as appears, Rev. 19.19. therefore the two and forty months of the Beaſt muſt be extended as far as that day; and if ſo, then our diſtinction is invalid.

I anſwer, True, the Beaſt ſhall then rage, and his rage at that day ſhall make him ſtark mad; but with what rage? not with the proud inſulting rage of a Conqueror, as he did all the time of the two and forty months, but with the mad and diſtracted rage of a loſer; before he overcame the Saints, and in his pride raged, and trampled the Holy City under his feet; now himſelf is overcome, and for madneſſe rageth, becauſe himſelf is trodden underfoot; before he was a raging ſpoyler, now a rager becauſe ſpoyled; and in this latter ſenſe he may be a rager, and yet the time of his Reign out; nay, that be who before trod underfoot, is now trodden underfoot; who led into Captivity, is led into Captivity; who killed with the ſword, is killed with the ſword, is an evident demonſtration (though his end be not preſently, yet) that the time of his Reign and treading underfoot the Holy City is over; the Woman is got out of the Wilderneſſe; for ſhe ſeeks not now any longer holes to hide her ſelf in from the rage of her Enemy, but dares appear in his very face, and can drive her Enemy before her. Adde alſo hereunto, that although the Beaſt rage after the two and forty months are expired, yet doth not he then rage alone as he did all the two and forty months. All the two and forty months he was able to tread underfoot the Holy City, and put the Woman to flight without help; but now he is glad to call in help, ſend Ambaſſadors to the Kings of the Earth, and the whole world to ſtand by him, Rev. 16.13, 14. as being not able alone, though a mad raging Beaſt, to deal with a Potent Woman, which is a manifeſt Argument that the time of his Reign is over, though yet his end be not preſently; and indeed the following time is not (to ſpeak properly) the Beaſts time, ſo much as the time of Gods enemies in general, in which they all hand in hand ſhall endeavour to deſtroy the Holy City, but the end ſhall be their own deſtruction, which they ſhall come to, and none ſhall help them.

And here methinks it doth wonderouſly affect my heart whilſt I ponder upon it, to think how that within theſe few dayes the poor Woman will come creeping out of the Wilderneſſe, armed with ſuch courage and divine power, as that ſhe, though but a weak Woman, ſhall yet with manlike reſolution flye in the very face of this monſtrous Beaſt, though all the Kings of the earth ſtand by him to help him; Un-horſe the Scarlet Whore that ſits upon him, drive the Whore, and the Beaſt that carrieth her (Antichriſts Civil and Eccleſiaſtical power) both before her, making them cry, Come help, come help, deliver us from the fury of the Woman.

From the whole it appears what footing we have in Scripture for this diſtinction, which is a fundamental thing, as to the Enquiry in hand; Yea where it is not made, and diligently obſerved, a cloud will of neceſſity be upon all the Propheſies of the Old and New Teſtament both.

The end of the Firſt Part.
PART. II.

Computing the Time of the Beaſt, and ſhewing where the limited time of his Tyranny ends.

CHAP. I. Diſcuſſing ſome things of more General Concernment as to the particular Queſtion.
SECT. 1.

THat diſtinction of Times (which we have noted before) namely to diſtinguiſh betwixt the time of the Beaſts Tyranny, and the time of the fourth Monarchy, being the foundation of this Enquiry, and that only which can produce a Scripture Harmony of all thoſe myſtical Numbers that bear any relation to the Queſtion in hand, it is neceſſary that we ſhould here make it our rule to walk by.

Now of theſe two, as the time of the Beaſts Reign is to expire firſt, the time of the fourth Monarchy ſome years after; So ſhall I in this Enquiry firſt, begin with the firſt, viz. the time of the Beaſts Tyranny?

And ſo the Grand Queſtion is:

Queſt. When, or with what time are we to put a period to Antichriſts Tyranny.

The onely ground we have to go upon to reſolve this great Queſtion, is, Daniels one thouſand two hundred and ninety dayes, Johns two and forty months, his one thouſand two hundred and ſixty dayes.

The firſt, viz. Daniels one thouſand two hundred and ninety dayes prove not this directly; for their aime is at another thing, viz. the beginning of the Jews delivery, but by conſequence onely at the end of Antichriſts Reign, and the beginning of the Jews delivery, which fall out at a point; I ſhall therefore (having alſo ſpoken ſufficiently to that number. Key, Theſi 20.) wave it here, and wholly inſiſt upon Johns numbers of two and forty months, one thouſand two hundred and ſixty dayes, both which tend directly to prove the thing in hand; only with this difference; the one, viz. the one thouſand two hundred and ſixty dayes, ſets forth the time in reference to the Churches ſuffering ſtate within this time; the other, viz. the two and forty months in reference to Antichriſts rage and tyranny throughout this time: yet both (I ſay) have a direct tendency to prove the thing, and anſwer our Queſtion. And (as Mr. Mede hath excellently obſerved) Antichriſts time is ſet forth by months, which are governed by the Moon, becauſe the worſhipping of Idols, and every ſin and error is of the power of darkneſſe and night, wherein the Moon ruleth; but the Churches time by dayes, becauſe true Religion is compared to the light, and to the day, of which the Sun is the Ruler.

SECT. 2.

That both Dayes and Months are Prophetical, is clear, becauſe (as Mr. Mede in his Comment upon Rev. 11. verſ. 3. well reaſons) if (ſaith he) the one thouſand two hundred and ſixty dayes be to be underſtood of natural dayes, then are the three dayes and a half, aſſigned afterwards to the death of the Witneſſes, to be ſo underſtood alſo, they being part of the one thouſand two hundred and ſixty; but they cannot be ſo taken, becauſe the things foretold to be done within the three dayes and a half, will no way agree to three dayes and a half of natural dayes; the one therfore being Prophetical, the other muſt alſo. Withall the very things ſpoken of the Beaſt, and the Witneſſes, have already taken up neer as much time as two and forty Prophetical months, one thouſand two hundred and ſixty Prophetical dayes, amounts to. I conclude, therefore the one thouſand two hundred and ſixty dayes; the two and forty months, are Prophetical Dayes and Months.

SECT. 3.

The Dayes and Months being Prophetical, the Queſtion now would be, Where are we to begin theſe numbers? Before I can take this Queſtion in hand, there is yet ſomething of more general concernment to be noted by the way, as,

Firſt, Let it be obſerved, that the two and forty months are twice ſpoken of. 1 Forty two months of the Beaſts continuance, Rev. 13.5. 2 Forty two months of treading underfoot the holy City, Chap. 11.2. Each two and forty months are one and the ſame in reſpect of beginning and ending. The difference between them is onely this, the firſt chiefly mentions the time allowed to the Beaſt to reign and domineer; the ſecond the work that he ſhall do within this time, viz, Tread down the Holy City. And indeed that theſe two muſt begin and end together, is clear; for were the treading underfoot the Holy City to have its beginning either ſome time before the riſe of the Beaſt, or ſome time after, and that as a diſtinct two and forty months from the other, then conſidering that the Beaſt muſt rage, and tyrannize two and forty months, in all which time the Holy City is trampled underfoot, the time (though ever ſo little) that we adde either before or after, will make the time of treading underfoot the Holy City to amount to more then two and forty months, which is the very time, and no longer, that the Holy City is to be trodden underfoot. The one thouſand two hundred and ſixty dayes, we have likewiſe twice ſpoken of. Firſt one thouſand two hundred and ſixty dayes of the Womans flight into the Wilderneſſe, Chap. 12.6. Secondly, one thouſand two hundred and ſixty dayes of the Witneſſes propheſying in Sackcloth. Chap. 11.3. Theſe two (as the other) are likewiſe one and the ſame, both for beginning and ending, the one (making mention of the ſtate of the Church more in general) ſetteth forth the place where the Church of God all the one thouſand two hundred and ſixty dayes ſhould abide, viz. in ſome obſcure corners of the world, as in a Wilderneſſe; the other (pointing at the ſtate of the Witneſſes in particular, which are not the whole Church, but a part onely, and this I take to be the main difference betwixt the eleven and twelve Chapters of the Revelations) tells us, the work Chriſts Witneſſes ſhould be employed in, notwithſtanding this their retirement, together with the Church into blind and obſcure holes and corners, in this time of the one thouſand two hundred and ſixty dayes, which is, they Propheſie, though in Sackcloth, i. e. in a poor oppreſſed ſorrowfull condition, through grief, to ſee all this time the Holy City trampled underfoot by the Beaſt. And indeed that theſe two alſo muſt be one and the ſame both for beginning and ending, is evident for the very ſame reaſon, as the former, becauſe if the one thouſand two hundred and ſixty dayes of the Womans flight into the Wilderneſſe, were to begin ſooner or later then the one thouſand two hundred and ſixty dayes of the Witneſſes propheſying in Sackcloth, then (as I ſaid of the other) ſeeing the Witneſſes wear their ſackcloth all the time the Church abides in the wilderneſſe, the added time whether before or after, would make the time of the Witneſſes propheſying in ſackcloth to ſurmount the number of one thouſand two hundred and ſixty dayes.

Now in the next place it would be farther enquired into, Firſt whether the two and forty months, and the one thouſand two hundred and ſixty dayes, are a different time? or whether both make up but one and the ſame number of yeers? Secondly, whether in caſe the ſame number of yeers be found in both, are we to conceive of either as beginning and ending together? or whether is any one to begin before the other?

To the firſt, I anſwer, That we are to conceive the time to be one and the ſame in both; the two and forty mouths, the one thouſand two hundred and ſixty dayes making both up but one and the ſame number of years. Not to inſiſt upon what Expoſitors generally ſay, that two and forty months, reckoning thirty dayes to a month, which is the Grecian account, make up the juſt ſumme of one thouſand two hundred and ſixty dayes; to me it appears that the thing I am ſpeaking of muſt be ſo, and cannot be otherwiſe, and that upon the former account ſtill; becauſe were the two and forty months a time longer then the other, then the Beaſts reign and treading underfoot the Holy City, being to continue two and forty months (which two things are the main cauſe why the Woman betakes her ſelf to the Wilderneſſe, and the Witneſſes continue there with here in a mournful poſture propheſying in ſackcloath) the Womans continuance in the wilderneſſe, and the Witneſſes propheſying in ſackcloth ſhould (the cauſe ſtill remaining) be above one thouſand two hundred and ſixty dayes. Or were the two and forty months a ſhorter time, then ſhould the flight of the Woman into the wilderneſſe, and the Witneſſes propheſying in ſackcloth, which continues no longer then the time of the Beaſts rage, and trampling the Holy City (that being (as I have ſaid) the cauſe of the other, which taken away, the effect ceaſeth) not be ſo long as one thouſand two hundred and ſixty dayes. Seeing therefore it cannot be either a longer time, or a ſhorter, we muſt conclude one and the ſame number of years to be included in both.

To the ſecond I anſwer, That we are without doubt to conceive of it, that the two and forty months, the one thouſand two hundred and ſixty dayes (making up but one and the ſame number of years) are to begin and end together. My reaſon is ſtill what I have urged; becauſe ſhould we ſuppoſe the two and forty months to begin either ſooner or later then the one thouſand two hundred and ſixty dayes, as a time diſtinct, and to be conſidered by it ſelf; it will then neceſſarily follow, ſeeing all the time of the Beaſts tyranny, and treading underfoot the Holy City, the Woman is to be in the wilderneſſe, and the Witneſſes to propheſie in ſackcloth, that by reaſon of the time which muſt be addedeither before or after, to make up the two and forty months compleat, the Womans continuance in the wilderneſſe, and the Witneſſes propheſying in ſackcloth ſhould be above one thouſand two hundred and ſixty dayes.

The concluſion is, That the two and forty months, and the one thouſand two hundered and ſixty daies, are one and the ſame, and alſo begin and end together.

CHAP. II. Diſproving the ſundry falſe beginnings.
SECT. 1.

IT being cleared in the former Chapter that both Months and dayes are Prophetical; and alſo that the two and forty months of the Beaſts continuance, the two and forty months of treading underfoot the Holy City; the one thouſand two hundred and ſixty dayes of the Womans abode in the wilderneſſe, the one thouſand two hundred and ſixty dayes of the Witneſſes propheſying in ſackcloth, do all make up but one and the ſame number of years; and alſo are one and the ſame both for beginning and ending; it comes next to be conſidered, where we are to begin this Epock of two and forty months, one thouſand two hundred and ſixty dayes.

Amongſt the variety of opinions which are extant of Writers ancient and modern, there are but three, ſave the opinion of our worthy German Author, from whom, though I judge, by comparing myſtical numbers together, that I ſee reaſon to vary ſomewhat, yet is not the variance ſuch as deſerves a conteſt; I ſay beſides him, there are but three that have ſo much colour of reaſon for their opinions, as that there will be any need of bringing them to the Touchſtone. And theſe are,

1 Thoſe who begin the Epock with the time of Conſtantine the Great.

2 A late Writer who begins with the time of Pope Leo the firſt.

3 Others who begin with the time when Boniface was created univerſal Biſhop by Phocas.

As for the firſt, viz. the opinion of thoſe who begin from the time of Conſtantine the Great (ſome of that opinion fixing upon the year 304. others differ as to a few years, yet keep within the compaſſe of 300. and 316.) I ſay not (in anſwer to it) that the very foundation of this opinion is a miſtake, viz. That the two Witneſſes are the Scriptures of the Old and New Teſtament.

But my reaſons againſt it are:

1 Becauſe by this opinion, the Harmony of the myſtical numbers is deſtroyed; for if the one thouſand two hundred and ſixty dayes, and the two and forty months begin with Conſtantines time, then is it not poſſible to bring the one thouſand two hundred & ſixty dayes, the two and forty months to concur in their end with Daniels one thouſand two hundred and ninety (which muſt be upon the grounds laid down in our Key, Theſi 17.) unleſſe we ſhall finde ſome action which may be accounted a fit Head for the one thouſand two hundred and ninety daies, thirty years above Conſtantine; and in caſe this ſhould befound, yet then will not the one thouſand three hundred thirty five (which begins from the ſame Head with the one thouſand two hundred and ninety) concur in their end with the two thouſand three hundred (which alſo muſt be for our reaſons, Key, Theſi 34.) unleſſe ſome other beginning and carrying on of that great number, may upon approved grounds be found, which will notwithſtanding bring the two thouſand three hundred dayes to end at the ſame point with the one thouſand three hundred thirty five.

2 Becauſe (ſetting the Harmony wholly aſide) by this computation the ſeventh Government in the Roman Empire, viz. by Chriſtian Emperors, which is that John calls a Government yet to come (Rev. 17.10. There are ſeven Kings (i.e. diſtinct kinds of Government) five are fallen, one is, and the other is not yet come) is either wholly cut off, or elſe confounded with the Beaſts: For this Government did not begin till Conſtantines time; now if we thence alſo begin the two and forty months of the Beaſt, then do we (I ſay) leave no room for the ſeventh kind of Government; ſo that either it muſt be cut off, or confounded with the Beaſts. That it ſhould be cut off, cannot be; for the Text ſaith expreſly, it was to come, i.e. as really to have a being as the five fallen had had, and the ſixth then in being had. That we ſhould confound it with the Beaſts, may not be.

Firſt, becauſe this Government is to continue a ſpace before the riſe of the Beaſt, And when it cometh, it muſt continue a ſhort ſpace. This ſhort ſpace muſt either be meant of the time before the Beaſts Kingdome, or the time of his Reign. If the time of his Reign be meant, and ſo the ſeventh Government, and his Reign be made one; how then is it called a ſhort ſpace? ſeeing the time allotted to the Beaſt is a long time, two and forty months; one thouſand two hundred and ſixty years; yea how is it called a ſhort ſpace comparatively with the ſixth or former Government, which continued not half, nay not one third part of this time? this Government therefore muſt be diſtinct from the Beaſts.

Secondly, becauſe the Beaſts Government as relating to this, is called the eighth, verſ. 11. And the Beaſt that was, and is not, even he is the eighth. Though the Beaſt in reſpect of his Seat and the Civil power he exerciſeth, which power did reſide in all the former Governments, is ſaid to be of the ſeven; and accordingly hath ſeven Heads, i.e. Rome the Seat of, and the Civil power of all the former Governments, yet is he not called the Seventh, but of the ſeven, becauſe ſucceſſively, and in order he followeth the ſeventh, and his Government comes in as the eighth, being a Government diſtinct from the ſeventh, and all theſeveral Governments before him; For which reaſon we may not confound the Beaſts Government with the ſeventh, which yet this opinion either doth, or ſhuts wholly out, neither of which can ſtand with truth.

3 Becauſe according to this ſupputation, the time is expired above a hundred years ſince. And being ſo;

1 How comes it to paſſe that yet of late yeers the Holy City hath been ſo trodden underfoot? Saints for Religion ſake driven to flight, as it hath been with us here in England; yea ſo many killed, and put to death, as have been in Germany, the Low-Countries, France, and all this within much leſſe time then one hundred yeers, yea the greateſt part of it not half the time? Certainly whilſt the Woman is driven from one corner of the world to the other to hide her ſelf, and her children are cruelly killed & maſſacred, we cannot look upon her as come out of the wilderneſſe; whilſt Antichriſtian injunctions and ſuperſtitions are ſet up, and impoſed inſtead of the pure worſhip of Chriſt, who will ſay the treading underfoot of the Holy City is at an end? and have not theſe things been more or leſſe, within leſſe then twenty, I may ſay within leſſe then half this twenty years? I would I could not ſay at this preſent.

2 How alſo comes it to paſſe that ſo many years ſince the expiring of this time, the Beaſt hath eſcaped, and neither been killed with the ſword, nor led into captivity, ſeeing it is ſaid of him that at the end of his Reign his two and forty months expired, He that leadeth into Captivity ſhall be led into Captivity, he that killeth with the ſword, ſhall be killed with the ſword, Rev. 13.10. If it be ſaid, Chriſt hath theſe many yeers ever ſince Luthers time in a ſpiritual manner with the ſword of his mouth been killing and captivating the Beaſt; I anſwer, true; But what hath been done againſt him by a Civil ſword, or towards a Civil captivating of him, which is the Sword and Captivity here ſpoken of? For obſerve ſuch a Sword as he hath killed the Saints with, and ſuch a Captivity as he hath expoſed them unto, ſuch a Sword, and ſuch a Captivity (it being brought upon him by God in a way of retaliation) ſhall himſelf ſuffer by, and be expoſed unto; but the one hath been Civil, therefore ſhall the other alſo. If it be replied, was not this done ſome years ſince in Germany by Guſtavus Adolphus? Anſw. Grant it ſo to be; Yet doth that fall many years too late; the one thouſand two hundred and ſixty (according to this opinion) being expired long before his time; but now no ſooner is the time expired, but inſtantly, Hee that leadeth into Captivity is led into Captivity, Hee that killeth with the Sword is killed with the Sword; Neither the German War therefore, nor any that hath been ſince will at all help this opinion. 2. If the Wan of the Swediſh King in Germany were a killing the Beaſt with the Sword, a leading him into Captivity, then moſt certainly, ſince, he is riſen, and come out of Captivity again; but let us aſſure our ſelves, that when Chriſt kills the Beaſt with the Sword, he ſhall have no reſurrection; when he leades him into captivity, no return.

Obj. But it may be objected, That we muſt of neceſſity begin this Epock of one thouſand two hundred and ſixty years as high as Conſtantine, if not higher; for (Rovel. 12.) it is the Dragon with ſeven Heads, and ten Horns, and ſeven Crowns on his heads; (which is the embleme of the old Roman Empire, and not the Empire of the Beaſt, who hath ten Crowns, and thoſe upon his Horns, (Revel. 13.1.) that drives the Woman into the Wilderneſs.

I anſwer; This cannot be for what hath been proved already, viz. That the forty two Months, and the one thouſand two hundred and ſixty days, are one and the ſame time, which begin and end together; and how could this be, in caſe the one thouſand two hundred and ſixty days were to begin before the riſe of the Beaſt, whilſt yet the Roman Empire was ruled by the Dragon?

2 Obſerve the Text it ſelf, and it will appear, That the act of the Dragon there mentioned, is not the driving of the Woman into the Wilderneſs, but another thing, viz. a lying in wait to devour her childe ſo ſoon as born, v. 4. And the Dragon ſtood before the woman which was ready to be delivered, for to devour her childe ſo ſoon as it was born. The meaning whereof is, That the faithful, the true members and children of the Church, (which becauſe one Body, are here repreſented by one Childe; and for dignity ſake, or elſe to repreſent their ſtrength in their head, Chriſt, a Man-childe) that in the time of Paganiſm had been oppreſſed by the Dragon; the Divel perceiving them now through Conſtantines means to be in a riſing way, and ready as with a Rod of Iron to cruſh in peices his Heatheniſh Worſhip; he therefore labours by ſtirring up the power of the old Pagan Empire to oppoſe Conſtantine, to ſtifle this work in the beginning; but this he cannot do; Conſtantine prevails, and the faithful in deſpight of him are caught up to God, and to his Throne, i. e. ſet out of the reach of the Dragon through Conſtantines prevailing. The Church now after her ſharp fiery Trial under the Pagan Emperours coming to enjoy great peace and proſperity under Conſtantine, it comes to paſſe that ſhee abuſing her proſperity, and Jeſuron-like now waxing fat, beginning to kick and grow wanton, her good is turned into evil, and within a ſhort time afterwards ſhee begins to Apoſtatize from her firſt Principles, and inſtead of being cloathed with the Sun (as was the Primitive Church, ver. 1.) and having the Moon under her feet, ſhe neglects the Sun, i. e. Chriſt crucified for Juſtification, and true Holineſs through his Death and Sufferings, and arrayes her ſelf with the Moon, i.e. worldly ornaments, as Dignities, Preferments, outward Riches, &c. which things a while after Conſtantine began to bee mightily ſtickled for by the Clergy generally, yea in Councels alſo. Now when it came to be thus, the Woman, i. e. the true Church vaniſheth away, and retires her ſelf into the Wilderneſs; and as ſhee retires, ſo in her room ſtands up the Beaſt, i. e. the falſe Antichriſtian Church. But this is not done inſtantly, but after the Church had had proſperity ſome time, and abuſed it, and thereby provoked Chriſt to with-draw his preſence and Spirit; which gone, the Church ſtraightway degenerates, and ſhee that was before the Spouſe of Chriſt, becomes an Antichriſtian Harlot.

Hence the Womans flight into the Wilderneſs is noted in the Text, as the very next thing after the childes being caught up to God and his Throne, ver. 5. And her childe was caught up to God, and to his Throne, ver. 6. And the woman fled into the Wilderneſs. Now obſerve, as the childes being caught up to God, and his Throne, was ſucceſſive to the Dragons gaping to devour the childe, which was whilſt yet the child was but in the birth; So the womans flight into the Wilderneſs (whence begins the one thouſand two hundred and ſixty days) is to be looked upon as a thing ſucceſſive, as well in time as place to the childes being caught up to God and to his Throne; And ſo the Objection is indeed a reaſon for us, that we may not begin the one thouſand two hundred and ſixty days, either before Conſtantine, or with him, but muſt ſome time afterwards.

The Arguments brought from Hiſtory Civil, or Eccleſiaſtical, to prove this fall to the ground upon the account of theſe two reaſons.

1 Becauſe Hiſtory is only a Human teſtimony, and therefore to be tried by the Divine; but the Divine teſtimony (or teſtimony of Scripture) cannot be made to agree to this beginning, as our two firſt Reaſons prove.

2 Becauſe all that is ſaid from Hiſtory, as viz. the Story of Conſtantines donation of Rome, Italy, &c. to Pope Silvester, the ſtory of Queen Helens Croſſe, &c. have only the authority of Popiſh Writers, and not any of the Ancients to countenance them; yea, are exploded by Proteſtant Writers as Fables; as ſee Melancthon in his review of Carions Chronicle, lib. 3. Johan. Wolf. cent. 4. Simpſons Hiſtory of the Church, lib. 2. cent. 4.

The Argument urged by ſome from the Indictions (which of all Arguments from meer Hiſtory is the moſt plauſible) tends only to prove that the Papiſts reckon the beginning of their Kingdom from about this time. But doth it follow that therefore we are ſo to do? What Scripture warrant is there for ſuch a thing, that there wee ſhould begin the time of the Beaſts reign, where the Beaſts own followers begin their Kingdome? Certainly, were this a rule to walk by, there would be no difficulty at all in making up our account of the forty two Moneths, & the one thouſand two hundred and ſixty days; yea take it at beſt, it is but an uncertain Argument; for ſome end the Olympiads, and begin the Indictions ſooner, ſome later; and what ſtrength this Argument hath in it (which in my account is but feeble) will as wel agree (according to ſome) to a more likely time, as to this; for Roſſe in his Hiſtory of the World ſaith, Lib. 3. Chap. 3. that about the year three hundred ninety five the Olympiads ceaſed, and the Indictions were inſtituted.

The concluſion of all is, That that opinion which begins the forty two Moneths, and the one thouſand two hundred and ſixty days with Conſtantine, is not that we are to cleave unto, as truth in this thing.

SECT. 2.

THe opinion of a late Writer (who hath beſtowed much labour upon our Queſtion) is, that we are to begin this Epocha with the time of Pope Leo the firſt; and the particular year pitched upon by our Author is the year four hundred forty two.

But though I honour the Author, yet cannot I receive his opinion.

1 Becauſe according to it the one thouſand two hundred and ſixty days cannot bee made current in their end with the one thouſand two hundred and ninety, unleſſe thirty years upwards, of the year four hundred forty two, a Head be found for that number; which could it bee, yet cannot then the one thouſand three hundred thirty five be made concurrent in their end (no not according to our Authors own Principles, and calculation) with the two thouſand three hundred.

2 Becauſe its evident the Beaſt was riſen above forty years before this time; therefore not now to riſe.

The account of the wonderful Numberer, Dan. 8.14. doth not (as ſaith our Author, but without giving any ſubſtantial reaſon for the thing) enforce this beginning, but indeed ſtrongly, if rightly computed, another, as appears from our Key.

His Human teſtimonies are wonderouſly miſapplied in point of time; for indeed not any one of thoſe Human Rites, Superſtitions, and Idolatries, which our Author makes mention of, as crept in at this time, but had their riſe, yea approbation too even in Councels ſome years higher, as is proved in my Key, Theſ. 23.

The Authors calculation of the time when the Beaſt ſhall begin to go to wrack, and that from the number of his Name, ſix hundred ſixty ſix, carries not weight with me, becauſe I finde the number of the Beaſts name put for a part or peece of the Beaſts Idolatry, which the true worſhippers of Jeſus are to ſhun, and get victory over, Chap. 15.2. And I ſaw them that had gotten the victory over the Beaſt, and over his Image, and over his Mark, and over the number of his Name. But now did the number of his Name hold forth the time of his continuance, it would contrariwiſe bee a great part of a Saints comfort and joy to know it.

Nay further, I finde the Papals ſeverely puniſhed by God for having to do with this Name, Chap. 14.11. And the ſmoak of their torment aſcendeth up for ever and ever. And they have no reſt day nor night, who worſhip the Beaſt, and his image, and whoſoever receiveth the mark of his name. The leaſt that can be inferred from theſe words, is, that the mark of the Beaſt and his name are things of neer kin the one to the other; therefore his mark, and the number of his name are both included in theſe words, The mark of his name. But were there any ſuch thing intended in the number of the Beaſts name, as the time of his continuance, this could not be, but contrariwiſe, the Beaſts mark, and the number of his name ſhould be things vaſtly different. To ſay the one and the other may be intended, cannot be, unleſſe we ſhould ſuppoſe contraries, viz. Sin and Comfort, a Curſe and a Bleſſing may be reconciled.

The concluſion is, That that opinion, which makes the two and forty months, the one thouſand two hundred and ſixty dayes to begin A. D. 442. cannot be the minde of the Holy Ghoſt in this thing.

SECT. 3.

There is yet another opinion, which begins the one thouſand two hundred and ſixty dayes with the time when Boniface was by Phocas made univerſal Biſhop. The Authors and Aſſertors of this opinion moſt of them begin about the year 600.

But this cannot be:

1 Becauſe all the wit of man can never according to this opinion bring forth a Harmony of the myſtical Numbers, i. e. make the one thouſand two hundred and ſixty dayes to end at the ſame point with the one thouſand two hundred and ninety, and the one thouſand three hundred thirty and five with the two thouſand three hundred, both which muſt be.

2 Becauſe it is ſaid of the ſeventh kind of Government in the Roman Empire that the ſame was to continue but a little ſpace, Rev. 17.10. And there are ſeven Kings, five are fallen, and one is, and the other is not yet come; and when he cometh, he muſt continue a ſhort ſpace. Now when the Angel ſaith, It ſhould continue but a little ſpace, he ſpeaks undoubtedly with a reference to that Government that then was in being, viz. by Pagan Emperours, comparatively with which the continuance of the ſeventh or following Government ſhould be but a ſhort ſpace. But now if the Beaſt who by coming in as the Eighth, puts an end to the ſeventh or following Government, did not riſe till about this time, then comparatively with the ſixth, could not the ſeventh be ſaid to continue a little ſpace; for its continuance ſhould be well nigh as long as the other.

3 Becauſe according to this account, all the Horns of the Beaſt ſhould be in being, and that above one hundred and forty years before yet there was any Beaſt; For the Beaſt had all his Horns (as ſhall appear by and by) before the year four hundred and ſixty; but how monſtrous and irrational a thing is it to affirm that Horns ſhould be before, or without a Beaſt?

The Concluſion is, That we are not to begin the two and forty months, or the one thouſand two hundred and ſixty dayes, with the time when Boniface was created univerſal Biſhop by Phocas.

CHAP. III. Stating and confirming the true beginning.
SECT. 1.

IT will now be ſaid, ſeeing I diſallow all the precedent accounts, What year do I my ſelf pitch upon for the beginning of this Epock.

I anſwer, The year I fixe upon, I have already ſtated in my Key, to be A.D. 396.

The Reaſons of this fixation are,

1 Reaſon, Becauſe that year, and no other can make the one thouſand two hundred and ſixty dayes concur in their end with the one thouſand two hundred and ninety; And alſo the one thouſand three hundred thirty five with the two thouſand and three hundred.

2 Reaſon, Taken from the words of the Apoſtle, 2 Theſ. 2.3. Let no man deceive you by any means; for that day ſhall not come, except there come a falling away firſt, and that man of ſin be revealed, the Son of perdition.

Out of which words I draw this Concluſion;

That the Revelation of the man of Sin was then to be, when as there ſhould appear ſome eminent defection in the Church from its primitive purity: For the Apoſtle makes the falling away, to be the Revelation of the man of ſin; as to ſay, the man of ſin ſhall then thruſt himſelf into the world, in, or with this falling away.

Now let us enquire when this eminent Apoſtacy from Primitive purity began, and therein undoubtedly are we to ſtate the riſe of the Antichriſtian Beaſt.

Much as to this I have written already, Key, Theſi 23. ſo as that it may ſeem ſuperfluous to adde any thing more. All therefore that I ſhall do farther, ſhall be onely to tranſlate ſome few things of many, which I finde gathered together out of the Ancients by Joan. Wolfius in his Centenaries, who applyes things to the particular year or time of their riſe, i. e. when a diſcovery was firſt made of theſe corruptions, and witneſſe born againſt them, by good men living in thoſe firſt ages.

And firſt as for what is by him laid down in his Epiſtle Dedicatory,

Out of Jerome he hath theſe ſayings, which he applies to the year 390.

Concerning the Avarice and corruption of the Clergy, Jerome thus;

Whence is this Avarice crept into the Church? the Law now periſheth from the Prieſt, the Viſion from the Prophet.

And again, Searching (ſaith he) former Hiſtories, I have not been able to find any who have ſo rent the Church, and ſeduced thoſe of Gods Family, as thoſe do who now go under the name of Prieſts; they are become a crooked ſnare, giving occaſion to ſcandal in all places.

Farther, He calls the then Roman Presbytery, Scribes, Phariſees, a Synod of Phariſees; and addes, that from the Apoſtles dayes untill that time the Church grew under Perſecutions, and was crowned with Martyrdome; But (ſaith he) at this day the ſame is greater in riches, and power, but leſſe in vertue.

Concerning the Prohibition of Mariage Meats, &c. the ſaid Jerome, thus;

IN HYPOCRYSIE they ſpeak, who when they cannot contain, will ſeem ſo chaſte as even to condemn Mariage, ſo abſtemious that they judge thoſe that uſe the creatures of God ſparingly, when as they give up themſelves to follow luxurious Banquets.

Our aforeſaid Author alleadgeth alſo a ſaying out of Auguſtine, applying it to the year 399. tending to ſhew how greatly the Church about this time was fallen from her firſt purity. The teſtimony ſpeaks thus, That Religion about this time was ſo corrupted with Traditions and humane Rites, that the very condition of the Jews under the Law was more eaſie then that of Chriſtians under the Goſpel.

Alſo under the very ſame year (as the next thing) he brings a teſtimony of Dionyſius Biſhop of Corinth, who by an Epiſtle admoniſheth another Biſhop, that he ſhould not load Chriſtians with heavy Burdens, Ceremonies and Traditions, nor obtrude upon his Brethren ſingle life.

After this he quotes Chryſoſtome declaming againſt the Biſhop of Romes Purgatory, &c. which things he applies to the year 410. the recital whereof I forbear to mention.

Hitherto of what I find in our Authors Epiſtle.

The Book it ſelf affords variety of the like, betwixt the years 390 and 400, whereof I ſhall onely glean up ſome things.

Cent. 4. A. D. 391.

Of the Clergies enriching themſelves by Auricular Confeſſion, he ſaith thus,

That when any Prince or great man confeſſed himſelf guilty of any crime by him committed, preſently by threats and perſwaſions he was made to beleeve that he could not be ſaved, unleſſe he did confer on the Church a good part of his eſtate; or elſe bidding farewel to all earthly things, devolving them upon the Clergy, ſhould betake himſelf to a private Monkiſh life; which done, he ſhould thereby not onely be freed from Hell, but alſo obtain a ſure certain and plentiful hope of life eternal.

A.D. 393. He ſaith thus, That in that very year was ſeen hanging in the Heavens, a burning Pillar by the ſpace of thirty dayes. And (ſaith he) about this very time began humane Traditions, Monkiſh life, &c.

A.D. 395. He makes mention of one Amphilochius Biſhop of Iconium, reprehending the worſhipping of Images; An Argument Image worſhip was up ſo early.

A. D. 396. He collects many things out of Epiphanius third Book, Contra Haereſes, ſhewing how great the defection was at this time.

Concerning Image worſhip, Epiphanius thus.

Whence is this Image worſhip, and deſign of the Devil?

And a little after, The Images of ſuch as never lived, do men introduce to be worſhipped, having the mind adulterated from the one, and only God.

And a little after that, Be mindful my beloved children, that ye bring not Images into the Church, but bear about God alwayes in your hearts; for it is not meet that a Chriſtian ſhould be held by his eyes, but by the occupation of his mind.

Concerning the Virgin Mary, Epiphanius thus;

The body of Mary was truly holy, but not God. The Virgin her ſelf was indeed a Virgin, and to be honoured, but not given us that we ſhould worſhip her, ſhe her ſelf worſhipping him who was born of her fleſh.

Much more is by the aforeſaid Author quoted from Epiphanius, which ſpeaks the very ſame language with theſe, all which he applyes to the year 396. the recital whereof I forbear.

A.D. 399. To this year Wolfius makes application of many ſayings of Auguſtine, who was made (ſaith Helvicus) Presb. Hyponenſis, A.D. 391.

Concerning Purgatory, Auguſtine thus,

The Catholick faith beleeves Heaven to be the firſt place; the ſecond Hell; as for a third, we are wholly ignorant, nor is it found in the Scripture.

Concerning worſhipping Saints thus,

It is not our Religion to worſhip dead men; they are honored for our imitation ſake, not to be worſhipped for the ſake of Religion, nor are we to conſecrate Temples to them, for they will not ſo be honoured of us.

Concerning Faith and Works.

Good Works do not precede Juſtification, but follow the juſtified.

Concerning Peter, and the Power of the Keyes thus,

We who are called Chriſtians do not beleeve in Peter, but in whom Peter did beleeve. And again, The Keyes of the Church are delivered to the whole Church, not to one Peter.

A little after, Auguſtine reprehending (ſaith our Author) the arrogancy of the Popes who ſuffered themſelves to be called Gods, ſaith, He that would ſeem to be God, when as he is man, doth not imitate him, who when he was God, was for our ſakes made man.

The aforeſaid Author quoteth a ſaying of Gregory Nazianzene concerning Councels about this time, Cent. 4. p. 127. If truth (ſaith he) be ſpoken, I judge it beſt that all Councels be avoyded; for I never ſaw good end of any Councel, nor the abrogation of any evill thereby, but only ambition, contention, and ſtrifes about Prerogative and Dignity.

This cloud of witneſſes ſtanding up for the truth, and that about this time is a manifeſt demonſtration of that great Apoſtacy from primitive principles and purity, which we are ſpeaking of, to be about this very time.

If any doubt of the Teſtimonies themſelves, or conceive I may in tranſlating them have corrupted them, they may ſatisfie themſelves by having recourſe to my Author; where likewiſe they ſhall find in moſt things, two for one of what I have tranſlated.

Adde hereto as a Celeſtial ſign of this defection, and of the riſe of the Antichriſtian Lucifer about this very time, what is by Alſted recorded, viz. That a little before this time, as namely, A. D. 383. And again, A. D. 389. were ſeen two Comets, one following the other like unto Lucifer, the like to which were never ſeen in any other Age. In Chronologia Cometarum.

Yet as concerning the defection I am ſpeaking of, I grant that the ſame was in part more early. The reaſon whereof is this, becauſe the myſtery of iniquity from the Apoſtles dayes did begin to work, and endeavour to thruſt it ſelf in, 2 Theſ. 2.7.

Hence in the year 198. when Victor was Biſhop of Rome, a great ſtir was made by him about the Celebration of Eaſter; but the ſame was oppoſed by ſome Councels at that time. Alſted in Chronologia Conciliorum.

So alſo in the year 326. It was endeavoured in the Councel of Nice, That Biſhops and Elders ſhould refrain from their wives: But Paphnutius oppoſed himſelf to the whole Councel, urging that of the Apoſtle, Mariage is honourable among all men, and ſo far prevailed as to bring forth a decree of liberty, that for chaſtity ſake ſuch might accompany with their wives. Alſted in Chronologia teſtium veritatis.

But now though Antichriſt was more early thruſting himſelf forth, yet are we not thence to reckon his riſe, but from that time when the Apoſtacy grew eminent, the Councels, and Miniſtry being more generally corrupted, which was about the aforeſaid year, 396.

And certainly if at this time after all theſe things before mentioned were come forth, we cannot yet ſee the Beaſt in the world, but muſt come down lower to find him, it argues that we either ſhut our eyes, or are blind whilſt we look for him.

The Argument then lies thus, If that falling away which is foretold ſhould be at the time of Antichriſts Revelation, were A.D. 396. then are we there to place the Beaſts riſe, and accordingly thence to reckon the two and forty months, and the one thouſand two hundred and ſixty dayes; but the Antecedent is true; therefore the conſequent.

SECT. 2.

3 Reaſon. A third Reaſon of the foregoing Poſition may be taken from the following words of the Apoſtle, verſ. 6, 7, 8. And now ye know what withholdeth that he might be revealed in his time: For the myſtery of Iniquity doth already work; onely he who now letteth, will let until he be taken out of the way. And then ſhall that wicked be revealed. Out of which words I draw this concluſion, viz. That the man of ſin, or the Antichriſt, was to be revealed, when that which then did withhold and let (viz. the Civil power of the Roman Empire, which would not admit of any Competitor, or the ſetting up of any other power equall with it, or above it) ſhould be taken away, i.e, removed from the ſeventh Head (which is the laſt Head of the ancient Roman Beaſt, i.e. of Rome as it was a pure Civil ſtate) and placed ſome where elſe.

Now before we can frame any Argument that ſhall have in it a concluding force, here are two things to be cleared, viz.

1 Whether this taking away be to be reckoned from the time that the Civil power of the Roman Empire was wholly taken off the ſeventh Head, and fixed ſome where elſe, or whether from the time when this began to be?

2 In caſe we incline to the one, or the other, what time are we to pitch upon, in which this was done?

Concerning the firſt, We are (as I conceive) to account from that time when this began to be done. My Reaſons are,

1 Becauſe it is proper and agreeable to the phraſe of taking away, to ſay a thing is then taken away when as ſuch a beginning is made as irreſiſtably cauſeth a total removing or taking away.

It is ſaid, Dan. 9.2. That ſeventy yeers were to be accompliſhed in the deſolations of Jeruſalem. Theſe ſeventy yeers are to bee reckoned from the firſt Captivity, which was in the third yeer of Jehoiakim, Dan. 1.1, 2. 2 Chon. 36.6, 7. as is clear,

1 Becauſe the Scriptures ſpeaking of the ſeventy years Captivity point us to Jehoiakims reign, as the time from whence we are to begin our account, Jerem. 25. verſ. 1. compared with verſ. 11, 12. Chap. 29. verſ. 1, 2. compared with verſ. 10.

2 Becauſe Iſrael was to ſerve the King of Babylon but ſeventy years, Jer. 25.11, 12. Theſe Nations ſhall ſerve the King of Babylon ſeventy years. And after ſeventy years are accompliſhed, I will puniſh the King of Babylon. Now Iſraels ſervitude to the King of Babylon beginning in the dayes of Jehoiakim, in caſe the ſeventy years were not to be begun till afterwards, then ſhould they ſerve the King of Babylon above ſeventy years.

3 Becauſe Iſrael was to be in Babylon but the terme of ſeventy years, Jer. 29.10. For thus ſaith the Lord, that after ſeventy years be accompliſhed, I will viſit you, and perform my good word towards you, in cauſing you to return to this place. But Iſrael for a conſiderable part of them were carried into Babylon in the dayes of Jehoiakim; if therefore we begin the ſeventy years afterwards, then ſeeing that untill the ſeventy years were expired, they came not out of Babylon, their being in Babylon ſhould be upwards of ſeventy yeers; therefore I ſay that the ſeventy yeers of Jeruſalems deſolations are to reckoned from the firſt Captivity; yet obſerve, their deſolations then were onely begun, not perfected till nineteen years after, in the eleventh of Zedekiah, when City and Temple were deſtroyed, 2 Chron. 36.19. yet notwithſtanding doth the Holy Ghoſt reckon their deſolations and captivity from the time the ſame was begun, though the compleating of it was not till ſome yeers after.

So Dan. 7.26. Its ſaid concerning the little Horn, the judgement ſhall ſit, and they ſhall take away his Dominion: And when is this taking away? Anſ. When the Ancient of dayes begins to ſit, and the Thrones of the Beaſt begin to be caſt down, though yet the final deſtruction of this little H • rn is not till afterwards, verſ. 11. And obſerve, if the ruine of the Roman Empire in its ſecond ſtate under Antichriſt be to be reckoned from the time when this begins, why not in its firſt likewiſe?

In Scripture Phraſe therefore a thing is ſaid to be taken away, when the deſolating and removing time is come, and the work begun, though yet the compleating of it be not till ſome time after.

2 Becauſe the Beaſt did not take up and exerciſe all the Civil power of the Roman Empire together, or at once, but did by little and little ingroſſe the ſame into his own hands, as the ſame by degrees fell off the ſeventh Head. And if ſo, then of neceſſity muſt the Beaſt, who pills the ſeventh Head, and robs him of his power, have a being before as yet the ſeventh Head had loſt all his power, or was totally deſtroyed.

3 Becauſe if we begin not till this work was compleated, then of neceſſity muſt we extend the forty months, the one thouſand two-hundred and ſixty dayes, beyond Daniels two thouſand three hundred, and his one thouſand three hundred thirty five, both which expire A.D. 1701. but ſo will not the one thouſand two hundred and ſixty dayes, if we find not a beginning for them till the compleat devaſtation of the ancient Roman Empire.

To ſay ſome middle beginning may be found, muſt be grounded upon ſome ſuch ſubſtantial reaſon as may enervate the force of ours; and withall be ſo carried on, as that the admirable Harmony betwixt Daniels numbers and Johns may be preſerved.

The concluſion therefore is, That we are not to reckon this taking away from the time that the Civil power of the Roman Empire was fully removed from the ſeventh Head, but rather from the time when this began.

Our next Queſtion is, What time are we to pitch upon when this was done?

Anſ. The year before fixed 396.

1 Becauſe at this time the Roman Empire (upon Theodoſius death) became divided betwixt Arcadius and Honorius his two ſons, of which ſee my Key, Theſi 22. This diviſion was ſuch that Carion treating upon the fourth Monarchy, doth hereupon prefix to the reign of Arcadius and Honorius this title, The ſpoyling of the fourth Monarchy.

2 Becauſe about this very time did the Goths and Vandals invade the Roman Empire, coming in as an overflowing deluge upon divers parts of the Roman Empire. A better teſtimony hereof I cannot produce, then by transferring hither what by the learned Mede is gathered together out of the Ancients relating to this time and thing, in his Comment upon the Apocalyps, Chap. 8. upon the firſt Trumpet.

He begins from the time of Theodoſius death, which was A.D. 395. (which becauſe the current year, we are in our account to let fall, and begin with the year following 396.) and ſaith thus, In this very year Alaricus with a huge hoſt of Goths, and other Barbarians, did firſt break in out of Thracia upon Macedonia, ſparing neither Towns, nor men. Thence marching forward through Theſſaly, and poſſeſſing himſelf of the Straits of Thermipolae, he enters Greece, i.e. Achaia, the Cities whereof, beſides Thebes and Athens, he razeth to the ground. He ruſheth into Peloponneſus, waſteth Corinth, Argos, and Sparta. Thence he marcheth into Epirus where he proceeds to make the ſame devaſtations and deſtructions. In the following year quitting Epirus, he invadeth Achaia, and it together with Epirus, and the adjacent Provinces, he laboureth four full years cruelly to deſtroy with fire and ranſackings; when thus for five years he had afflicted the Eaſt with mercileſſe ranſackings, he ſet his mind to invade the Weſt; he paſſeth into Dalmatia, and Pannonia, thoſe Regions he waſteth far and neer. Hear (ſaith he) Jerome, who then lived, bewayling the ſtate of this deplorable time, the tempeſt hitherto raging. In his third Epiſtle, the Roman blood is daily poured out between Conſtantinople; and the Julian Alps: The Goth, the Sarmatian, Quadus, Alanus, the Huns, the Vandals, the Marcomanny, do force and take by violence Scythia, Thracia, Macedonia, Dardania, Dacia, Theſſaly, Achaia, Epirus, Dalmatia, and all Pannonia. How many Matrons, how many godly Virgins, and beautifull noble bodies were mocking ſtocks to theſe Monſters? The Biſhops taken, the Presbyters ſlain. The Roman Empire goeth to ruine. What heart thinkeſt thou have the Corinthians now, the Athenians, Lacedemonians, Arcadians, and all Greece, whom theſe Barbarians command?

But in the year following, viz. Anno Dom, four hundred and one, the ſame Alaricus, followed by the Goths, Alans, and Huns, about to wage Warre in Italy alſo, brake through Noricum, and came through the Forreſt of Trent into Venice, thoſe Cities in a ſhort time he ſubdued, the Emperour Honorius he beſieged at Haſta, ſo as that all Italy thought upon quitting their Habitations. But here at length, 〈◊〉 the General of Honorius, having gathered 〈◊〉 Army, ſtopped his fury, and compelled him living once and again vanquiſhed, and wearied with 〈◊〉 Battels, to retire into Pannonia, whence he came, out of which a while after, a League being 〈◊〉 , and be honoured with a Military government 〈◊〉 Honorius, be departed into Illyricum, a Pro •••• of the Eaſt.

•••• icus being quiet a little while, leſt hence •••• 〈◊〉 or any time the Weſt ſhould bee vacant of 〈◊〉 preſently in the year four hundred and four, another mentorable breaking in of the Barbarians upon Italy is attempted, Radagiſo a Scythian being Captain, who with an Army of Goths, Sarmatians, and Germans, to the number of two hundred thouſand, the Forts in the Alps being beaten down, hee paſſeth into the Region of Venice, Aemilia, and Hetruria, he beſiegeth Florence, where being by Stilicho vanquiſhed with a great ſlaeughter, is taken and beheaded.

This enemy how ſoever terrible, in a little time, and with l • ſſe loſſe being taken away, forth with Anno Dom. four hundred and ſix, the third, and that the moſt grievous and deadly inrode of the Vandals and Alans, taking with them the Marcomanni, Heruli, Swedes, Alemans, Burgundians, with a rabble of other Barbarians, is made upon the Weſt, whereby firſt France, then Spain, laſtly Africa are taken; and afflicted with all kind of calamities; Which deſtructions Hierom in his eleventh Epiſtle hath thus partly expreſſed, partly implied.

Innumerable (ſaith he) and moſt fierce Nations have taken all France, whatſoever is betwixt the Alps and the Pyrenaean Mountains, which is incloſed with the Ocean and the Rhone; the Quadus, the Vandals, Sarmatians, the Alans, Gipides, Heruli, Saxons, Burgundians, Alemans, and Pannonian enemies have destroyed; Mentz is taken, and plundered, and many thouſand ſlain in the Church; the Vangions with ſtrong ſiege deſtroyed the ſtrong City of Rhemes, the Ambians, Attrebates, Morini, Tornacus, Nemete, Argentoratus tranſlated into Germany, Aquitane, and the Provinces of Novem Populorum, Lions, and Narbone, a few Cities excepted, all are ruined. I cannot make mention of Toloſe without tears, which that it is not yet ruined, is for the ſake of that holy Biſhop Exuperius; Spain it ſelf now ready to periſh trembles, Rome buyes her life with gold. Hitherto Maſter Mede, p. 71, 72, 73, 74.

Now upon the whole, obſerve, it being a thing expreſly fore-told, Revel. 13.1. that the Antichriſtian Beaſt ſhould have his riſe out of the Sea, i. e. from a confluence of People and Nations, the riſe of Antichriſt cannot more aptly be applied to any time then this, of theſe barbarous Nations over-flowing in this wonderfull manner the Roman Empire.

3 Becauſe ſuddenly after the year three hundred ninety ſix (as the iſſue of this invaſion) the Civil power of the Empire began by little and little to bee tranſplanted from the ſeventh Head, and to be ſeated in the Horns. Now, as it is an evident Argument that the Empire was going to decay, when there began to be a removall of the Civil power and authority from the Head to the Horns; ſo is it alſo as clear an Argument that the Beaſt was now riſing; for it is the Beaſts Horns that have Crowns upon them, the Dragons have none. But of this more in my next.

From the whole I frame this Argument; The forty two Months, and the one thouſand two hundred and ſixty days are there to begin where the Civil power of the Roman Empire began to go to decay, or to be taken away. But this was Anno Dom. three hundred ninety ſix. Ergo.

CHAP. IV. Proving and confirming yet farther our Poſition, laid down in the former.
SECT. 1.

A Fourth Argument, to prove that wee are to begin the time of the Beaſt in all likelihood with the year before ſtated, may be taken from the time of the riſe of the Horns; ſome of the Horns did ſuddenly after this year appear. For this ſee Alſted in Chronologia regnorum veterum. Roſſe Hiſtory of the world, Lib. 3. Cap. 3. Sigonius (as I finde him quoted by Mr. Mede, cl. p. 79.) of the Weſtern Empire, Lib. 10. & 11.

To theſe let me adde; Our German Author in his Cla. p. 127. teſtifieth, that Anno Dom. four hundred and three, ſome Horns did appear. Mr. Archer in his Perſonal Reign, p. 44. ſaith, That about the year four hundred, or four hundred and ſix, ſome of the ten Kingdoms in Europe began to riſe. Mr. Woodcock of the two Witneſſes, p. 81. ſaith. That Anno Dom. four hundred and ten, when Alaricus took Rome, ſeverall of the ten Horns even in that very year began to appear.

Mr. Medes own opinion is, That all the ten Horns were in being in the year four hundred fifty ſix, the Empire in that year appearing divided into ten Kingdoms, which together with the names of the People, and of the Kings, and Provinces over which they reigned, are by him laid down in this following Table, Cl. p. 80.

A Type of the rending of the Empire, or Roman Dominion, in the year of Chriſt four hundred fifty ſix, and thence forward. The Kingdoms. The Provinces wherein they reigned. The names of the Kings reigning in this year. 1 Of the Britains.   Vortimer. 2 Of the Saxons. In Britain. Hengiſt. 3 Franks. Firſt, In Gallia Belg. ſuddenly after in Celtica alſo. Childerick. 4 Burgundians. In Gal. Sequan. and Lions. Gunderick. 5 Wiſigothes. In Aquitane & part of Spain. Theodorick. 6 Swedes and Alans. In that Tract of Spain which is contained in Gallecia and Luſitania. Riciarius. 7 Vandals. In Africa, but a little before in Spain. Genſericus. 8 Alemanes. In that Tract of Germany, which was called Rhetia. Sumanas. 9 Oſtrogoths. In Pannonia the Huns being ſubdued, neither was that age run out when they did enlarge their Kingdome into Italy alſo. Theodemirus. 10 Grecians. In the reſidue of the Dominion of the Empire; for the Empire of ancient Rome being diſſolved, the Kingdome of the Grecians is to bee reckoned among thoſe Kingdoms into which the Dominion of the City reigning, ſometimes farre and near was divided. Marcianus.

Some things by way of explication of the Table are added by Mr. Mede, which I omit, referring the Reader where any doubt ariſeth to the Author himſelf for ſatisfaction.

Now to make our Argument the more firm, let it be obſerved, That we are to place the riſe of the Beaſt before the riſe of the Horns; the Horns therefore having being, ſome ſo early as the years four hundred, four hundred and three, four hundred and ſix, &c. yea being compleat, having their perfect number, Anno Dom. four hundred fifty ſix, the riſe of the Beaſt muſt be placed ſomewhat more early; and therefore it is not amiſſe that I have pitched upon the year three hundred ninety ſix.

Now that the riſe of the Beaſt muſt be before the riſe of the Horns, is evident;

1 Becauſe the ten Horns with Crowns upon them are the Horns of the Antichriſtian Beaſt, and no other. This being ſo, the Antichriſtian Beaſt muſt neceſſarily be before his Horns; for how improper, yea abſurd would it bee to ſay, That Horns ſhould grow before, or without a Beaſt? To ſay, The Horns are the ſame which were grown before, only the Beaſt puts Crowns upon them, which before they had not, helps not the thing, for if the Beaſt crown the Horns, then is he before any of the Horns are crowned; that which is not, cannot adde to another thing.

2 Becauſe the riſe of the Beast is to bee reckoned from that point of time, in which the Civil power of the Roman Empire began to be taken away, as hath been proved already; but now none of the Crowned Horns ariſe till a while after, the Horns getting Crowns, i.e. a Civil power to themſelves, by the devaſtation of the ſeventh Head, i. e. pilling the Empire of its Civil power.

3 Becauſe the words of the Holy Ghoſt, Rev. 17.12. import as much; for ſpeaking of the Beaſt and his Horns, its ſaid, Theſe receive power as Kings one hour, (or in one hour; ſo Pareus in his Comment upon the Revelation reads it) with the Beaſt. Obſerve, not the Beaſt receives power with them, but they with the Beaſt; intimating clearly, that notwithſtanding the Beaſts riſe is not long before the Horns, therefore both riſe as it were in one hour, that is, within a little time of each other, yet the Beaſt hath being firſt, and is inſtrumentally the cauſe of helping the Horns to their Diadems or Kingly power, to whom therefore as ingaged they adhere, giving their power and ſtrength to him again, verſ. 13. i.e. laying it out for him, who was a ſpecial means of helping them to it.

SECT. 2.

Ob! But it may be objected, That Daniel ſaw the riſe of this little Horn (namely Antichriſt) after the riſe of the other Horns, Dan. 7.8. I conſidered the Horns, and behold there came up among them another little Horn, verſ. 24. And the ten Horns out of this Kingdom are ten Kings that ſhall ariſe, and another ſhall ariſe after them.

Anſ. Three opinions there are of this little Horn, which if either of them might be admitted, would eaſily quit our hands of this Objection.

The firſt is that which interprets it of Antiochus Epiphanes; but as touching this I ſhall ſay nothing til I come to my Third part.

Two other opinions there are embraced at this day by men of great light, learning, and worth, whom I would not thwart, were it not but that this Prophecy of Daniels little Horn is ſo materiall, that an error here turns the ſtreams of all Daniels Prophecies out of their proper channel; and becauſe the beſt men, and men of greateſt Light may have their particular miſtakes, I hope it will not be grievous or offenſive to any, if for truths ſake I bring the principles of thoſe, whoſe light in other things I eſteem above my own, as to this particular thing, to the touch-ſtone.

Yet ere I come to examine either opinion, I ſhall in order thereunto premiſe theſe few things.

1 That all Daniels Prophecies, viz. That of the great Image, chap. 2. Of the four Beaſts and little Horn, chap. 7. Of the Ram, Hee-Goat and little Horn, chap. 8. Of the Kings of the North, and Kings of the South, chap. 11. have but one and the ſame end.

2 That the laſt thing in each of theſe is the deſcription of the Fourth or Roman Monarchy.

Theſe two Principles are ſo clear and unqueſtionable upon the grounds, that not my ſelf only, but alſo thoſe good men go, from whom yet (as to their opinions of the little Horn) I vary, yea from the plain ſcope and expreſſions of each Prophecy, that to inſiſt upon particular proof, were but to multiply words.

3 That the Fourth or Roman Monarchy conſiſting of two States; 1 A pure Civil State, 2 A mixt State, partly Civil, partly Eccleſiaſtical; hath therefore in each of Daniels Viſions and Prophecies a two-fold repreſentation ſuitable to its two-fold ſtate. In that of the Great Image, the Roman Monarchy (which is ſignified by the leggs and feet of that Image) is firſt repreſented as a pure Civil State, by the leggs of Iron, breaking in peeces and ſubduing all things, verſ. 40. as a mixt State, by the feet and toes of the Image, which are part of Iron, part of Potters clay, ver. 41.

In the ſecond Viſion of the fourth Beaſt, the Roman Monarchy, ſignified by the fourth Beaſt, is repreſented in two States. 1 As a Civil State, and ſo it is a Beaſt dreadfull, terrible, ſtrong exceedingly, having great Iron teeth, devouring and breaking in peeces, verſ. 7.2. As a mixt State, and ſo a raging blaſphemous little Horn, ver. 8.21.25.

In the third, chap 8. the Roman Monarchy (repreſented by the little Horn, verſ. 9.) hath two States; 1 A Civil State, and ſo it is a little Horn waxing great in a way of conqueſt, ſubduing Nations to it ſelf, verſ. 9. 2 A mixt State, and ſo it is a little Horn, waxing great in a way of oppoſition to the truths, people, and worſhip of God, ver. 10, 11, 12.24, 25.

In the fourth and laſt Prophecy, the Roman Monarchy hath two States; 1 A Civil State, and ſo it is that terrible potent King of the North, chap. 11. verſ. 14. to 21. 2 A mixt State, and ſo it is that vile Perſon, verſ. 21. whoſe deſcription and acts are continued to ver. 40.

This I take to be (and I doubt not but he who thorowly weighs each Prophecy will, yea muſt in this be of my minde) the true ſtate of the Roman Monarchy, as the ſame is ſet forth in all the Prophecies of Daniel.

Hence fourthly, It follows upon the former, That the little Horn, chap 7. ſignifying the mixt State of the Roman Monarchy, and the mixt State of the Roman Monarchy being alſo the thing ſignified chap. 2. by the feet and toes of the great Image, chap. 8. by the little Horn there mentioned in his ſecond waxing great, chap. 11. by the vile Perſon; Hence I ſay, it follows, That the feet and toes of the great Image, chap. 2. the little Horn, ch. 7. the little Horn in its ſecond waxing great. chap. 8. and the vile perſon cha. 11. are all one and the ſame thing. What therefore is affirmed of the little Horn, chap. 7. muſt bee of all the reſt.

This premiſed, I come now to the opinions themſelves.

The firſt opinion is that which interprets this little Horn of Mahomet, at leaſt-wiſe as to the ſpecial accommodation. The rage of this little Horn againſt the Saints to be ſpecially meant of the Turks Tyranny over, and oppreſſion of the Jews.

But this opinion cannot I receive, becauſe it ſeems to me to be inconſiſtent with all the four foregoing Propheſies.

1 for the Propheſie of the great Image, its inconſiſtent with that; for the feet of the great Image (the ſame with the little Horn) are to be underſtood of ſuch a power, as Firſt, is made up of a mixture, and that of things contrary, as iron and clay. Secondly, it is ſuch a power as conſiſts of ten parts, which ten parts are repreſented by the ten Toes, verſ. 42. Now neither of theſe Characters either do, or will agree to the Empire of the Great Turk, but both are punctually fulfilled in the Kingdome of Antichriſt, which firſt is made up of a Civil and Eccleſiaſtical power moulded together; ſecondly, conſiſts of ten Horns i.e. ſo many Kingdomes, Rev. 17.12.16.

2 For the Propheſie Chap. 8. The proud He, there ſpoken of (who is the ſame with this little Horn) is ſaid to caſt down ſome of the hoſt of heaven, and of the ſtars to the ground, and to ſtamp upon them, verſ. 10. to take away the daily ſacrifice, throw down the place of his Sanctuary, caſt down the truth to the ground, verſ. 11.12. Yea, he is alſo ſaid to underſtand dark ſentences, verſ. 23. to be mighty, but not by his own power, to deſtroy wonderfully, to deſtroy the mighty and holy people, verſ. 24.

None of theſe Characters (which are all the Characters of the little Horn) either will, or can agree to any act of the Turk put forth towards the Jews, for,

1 The Jews in the ſtate they are in, and have been in theſe many years, cannot be called The Hoſt of Heaven, i. e. The true worſhippers of God, as the phraſe ſignifies.

Neither ſecondly, can the caſting down and trampling the Jews be called A caſting down of ſtars, and trampling upon them. The Officers of the Chriſtian Churches are called Stars, Rev. 1.20. The ſeven Stars are the Angels of the ſeven Churches; but where in any Propheſie relating to the Church of the New Teſtament, from the day the Jews were broken off, till this day, are the Jewiſh Doctors and Rabbins called Stars?

Neither thirdly, can the Turks ſitting over the material Temple, viz. the place of it at Jeruſalem, be in a true ſenſe called the taking away of the daily ſacrifice, and a throwing down the place of his Sanctuary. If it be ſaid, by ſitting there, he hinders men from embracing the Meſſiah, ſo he doth by ſitting in Conſtantinople, and therefore his ſitting there may as properly in that ſenſe (though Jeruſalem were not under his power) be called a taking away of the dayly ſacrifice, and caſting down the place of Gods Sanctuary.

Neither fourthly, can his oppoſing the Moſaical worſhip be termed a casting down the truth to the ground, ſeeing God hath caſt down that already, and owns it for his truth no longer.

Neither fifthly, will it agree to Mahomet to entitle him a King underſtanding dark ſentences, whoſe birth and education was poor and mean, and ſo far was he from learning and high ſpeculations (which Antichriſt not onely pretends to, but is alſo furniſhed with) as that indeed he had nothing leſſe.

Neither ſixthly, doth it agree to the Turk to term him mighty, but not by his own power; ſeeing his might lies in no other power but his own; but it is an excellent deſcription of the Romiſh Antichriſt, who whilſt he would make the world beleeve that he is Chriſts Vicar, and a ſpiritual creature, doth yet lift up and exerciſe, and becomes mighty thereby, a Civil ſword, which indeed he hath nothing to do with.

Neither ſeventhly, can it be ſaid of the Turk that he hath deſtroyed wonderfully, i.e. more then any before him; and this wonderful deſtruction, to be a deſtruction of the mighty and holy people; ſeeing it is a thing rare with the Turk upon a meer account of Religion (what to increaſe his Empire he hath done, is but what others have done) to deſtroy men. But now what the Romiſh Antichriſt in this kind hath done, is notoriouſly known. If it be ſaid, he hath deſtroyed by the poyſon of his Religion more then ever any before him.

Its anſwered, but not the holy people, the holy people are kept by God, and therefore ſafe from the inchantments of Satan. To underſtand it of the Jews, will neither agree to them, either in the ſtate they were in, when Daniel ſaw this Viſion, nor the ſtate they are in at preſent. Not the former, becauſe then they were not the mighty people; for they were a people in Captivity; not the latter, becauſe now they are not the holy people, being a people as yet rejected of God.

3 For the Propheſie Chap. 11. The vile perſon (the ſame with the little Horn) is ſaid to have indignation againſt the holy Covenant, verſ. 30. to cauſe the underſtanding people, who ſhall inſtruct many, to fall by the ſword, the flame, by captivity and ſpoyl many dayes, verſ. 33. The following Charactors of this King, I ſhall take up, and ſhew whoſe they are, in anſwering the other opinion of this little Horn.

As for theſe two we have named, how will they, or can they agree to the Turk.

1 What holy Covenant is that which he hath indignation againſt? If the Levitical Covenant, God owns not that for the Holy Covenant any longer; but put caſe he did, what particular indignation doth the Turk expreſſe againſt that Covenant, when as a great part of his Religion is founded upon it? If the Goſpel-Covenant, then muſt this indignation of his be not againſt Jews, but Chriſtians; for they are the children of this Covenant; and if ſo, then are we off of our Argument, and we muſt rather of the two conclude the Romiſh Antichriſt to be this vile perſon, then the Turk; for he, and not the Turk, is the great and principal oppreſſor of theſe.

As for the ſecond, what underſtanding people are they who are ſaid to inſtruct many, that through ſword, flame, captivity, and ſpoyl, fall by the hand of the Turk? Can they be the Jews as ſuch? None will ſay ſo. Are they Chriſtians? then are theſe things in a more eſpecial manner to bee applyed to the Romiſh Antichriſt than the Turk; for the underſtanding people who have been the inſtructers of many, have fallen ten to one, I might ſay a hundred to •• e, more by his hand then ever have fallen by the hand of the Turk. Nay when did ever yet the Turk make a war upon, raiſe a perſecution againſt the underſtanding people meerly upon this account becauſe they were ſuch? But this hath been the practice of the Romiſh Antichriſt throughout all ages.

4 For the Propheſie it ſelf, Chap. 7. This interpretation of the little Horn agrees not to it, neither to the Characters of the little Horn mentioned in it, nor to the time of his continuance.

1 Not to the Characters, the little Horn is ſaid, to make war with the Saints of the moſt High, verſ. 21. to wear out the Saints of the moſt High, verſ. 25. How doth he wear them out?

Anſw. Partly by inward grief to hear his blaſphemies, partly by outward ſufferings, perſecutions, martyrdomes.

But now as to the firſt, The Turkiſh oppreſſion of the Jews by detaining their land from them (which he hath done divers hundred years) cannot be called a making war with the Saints of the moſt High; for the Jews from the day he firſt had their land to this, have been a people rejected by God, and therefore cannot in the condition they are in, and have ſtood in a long time, be conſidered as the Saints of the moſt High.

As for the ſecond, The Turk cannot be ſaid in either of the forementioned reſpects, to wear out the Jews; For firſt, They grieve not, nor (as yet) are their ſouls worn out to hear his blaſphemies. Secondly, They have not been by him perſecuted and martyred for Religion ſake meerly, but are owned and countenanced in his Dominions.

2 Not to the expreſſions uſed by the Holy Ghoſt to ſet forth the time of his continuance; For the time of his continuance is expreſſed by a time, times, and dividing of time, verſ. 25. which words being ſpoken in the Gentile Dialect, and ſignifying the very time of the black day of the Gentile Churches, Revel. 12.14. ſeems to me clearly to argue, that this little Horn is ſuch a one as ſhould Tyrannize over the Gentile Churches, not the Jews; and this agrees not to the Turk, but the Roman Antichriſt.

So that we ſee that this interpretation will not agree to any one of all Daniels Propheſies.

Yet here let me ſay, that thus far I go up with the Aſſertors of this opinion, as to beleeve, that the Propheſies of the Old Teſtament, as touching the glorious reſtitution of the Church, do more directly and immediately look towards the Jews; yet with this Proviſo, that this rule is appliable to ſuch Propheſies only as relate to the time of the Jews coming in: But now this Propheſie of Daniels little Horn, and his blaſphemies, his rage againſt the Saints, relate to another time, namely that time in which the Jews are rejected; for the coming in of the Jews is not till the end of the time, times, and a half, which is the time where the little Horns dominion ceaſeth. It therefore follows, that all the time of the little Horns blaſphemy and tyranny, the Jews are a people rejected, and are not received till the day where a period is put to his reign; therefore although Propheſies that relate to the time of their reſtitution have a look firſtly to that people, yet not this Propheſie, which relates to the time of their rejection.

But indeed our Rule in Daniels Propheſies muſt be this, viz. That the ſcope of the Holy Ghoſt in Daniel is to repreſent the ſtate of things in the world from Daniels time to the end, with a ſpecial reference ſtill to Gods Church and people in it. This being ſo, it follows that ſo long as the Jews remained a Church, ſo long did the things foretold primarily reſpect them; when they are broken off, and the Gentiles, Gods choſen people, throughout that period, do the things foretold primarily reſpect the Gentiles; when the Jews are grafted in again, then ſhall the things, as at firſt, ſo now again, be primarily fulfilled to them. So that (I ſay) although Propheſies which relate to the time of the Jews coming in do primarily look to that people, yet is the caſe otherwiſe as to thoſe Propheſies which relate to the times betwixt their breaking off, and their receiving again.

And although the name Antichriſt is appliable all the time of the Jews rejection to none but the Roman Antichriſt, the only Perſecutor of the Gentile Saints; yet this I readily grant, if we ſpeak of the time after the Jews come in, that the name Antichriſt ſhall be as well, and as properly appliable at that time to the Turk, as to the Romiſh Antichriſt (which conſideration affords anſwer as to all thoſe agreements (ſome make) betwixt Pope and Turk) and this ſeems to me to be the great and only thing intended, Dan. 11. verſ. 40. to the end, which place I ſhall a little open, chiefly to let light into that Propheſie, which (in my apprehenſion) is generally miſtaken.

The great knot of that Propheſie, is, Whom we are to underſtand by the King of the North, and who by the King of the South. Now for the untying hereof, we are to conſider, that theſe titles the King of the North, and the King of the South, are not appliable to two parties or people only, but to divers parties and people; For this Chapter carries us through the ſecond, third, and fourth Monarchies, and takes in the beginning of the fifth; ſo that here is very frequently a change of perſons, though the old names are ſtill retained, King of the North, and King of the South.

Now the reaſon of the names, in underſtanding which lyes the chief myſtery, and the very Key of the Propheſie, is taken from the ſituation of parties, that party in every change, conteſt, skirmiſh here mentioned, whoſe ſituation was more Northerly, goes ever under the title of the King of the North; that party whoſe ſituation was more Southerly, under the title of the King of the South.

So in the very firſt conteſt, where theſe names are uſed, which was betwixt Alexanders two chief Captains after his death, and the diviſion of the Grecian Monarchy: the Race of the Lagidae, ſo called from Ptolomeus the ſon of Lagus, the firſt of that Race, is called the King of the South, verſ. 5. becauſe their ſituation was in Egypt and Africa, which lay more towards the South. The Race of the Seleucidae, ſo called from Seleucus Nicanor, the firſt of them, are called the King of the North, verſ. 6, 7. becauſe they were ſituated in Aſſyria, Babylon, and other parts of Aſsa, which did border ſomewhat more upon the North, then the other.

So in the next conteſt which begins with the beginning of the Roman Monarchy, the parts firſt aſſaulted and invaded by the Romans when they were reaching after the Monarchy, as Macedon, Egypt, Judea, &c. are called the King of the South, verſ. 14. becauſe theſe Countries were ſituated Southward from Italy and Rome, and the Romans invading are called King of the North, verſ. 15. becauſe of their Northern ſituation.

And here by the way, give me leave to obſerve what a notable mark the Holy Ghoſt hath left us in this cloſe tranſition from the Grecian Monarchy to the Roman, to give us light where in this Propheſie we are to begin the Roman Monarchy, which otherwiſe, conſidering how things all along hang as it were in a chain, were a thing moſt difficult to find; verſ. 14. And in thoſe dayes many ſhall ſtand up againſt the King of the South, which is a moſt proper deſcription of the Roman Monarchy in its firſt riſe, and ſeems to point them out from all the people in the world; for it is obſervable of them that at the time they were growing into a Monarchy, they were governed by a Senate, conſiſting of many perſons, which many alſo, to ſhew us that they are to be underſtood of ſuch a many as do yet make up but one Repreſentative bony, are therefore in the next Verſe called the King of the North. The words in the cloſe of the fourteenth Verſe, They ſhall fall, which may ſeem to make this Expoſition doubtfull, do not relate to the many ſtanding up againſt the King of the South in the beginning of the Verſe, but to the robbers of thy people in the end, which are not the Romans, but another people oppoſing the Romans in the beginning of their Monarchy, and falling before them.

So likewiſe in the controverſie afterwards betwixt the vile Perſon Antichriſt, and the Turks and Saracens, which began about the year one thouſand ninety ſix, the Turks upon whom the vile perſon makes War, are called the King of the South, verſ. 25. becauſe their ſituation lay Southerly from Rome; and Antichriſt is King of the North, becauſe his Seat was ſituated moſt Northerly.

This Light gained, ſets open a window to that which follows, from verſe forty to the end of the Chapter. For the better underſtanding whereof let it be noted, That theſe ſix laſt verſes do ſet forth the very laſt part of that Tragedy that now for a long time together had been acting upon the Stage of the World; and they are not (as is moſt generally thought) a repetition of things before delivered, but indeed a continuation of the Prophecy, and that from that very point of time where Antichriſts Tyranny, which is the thing deſcribed in the fore-going verſes, ends. The deſcription of Antichriſts rage in the fore-going verſes brings us down to the very end of the forty two moneths, the one thouſand two hundred and ſixty days, now with the end of that time begins this Prophecy, which carries things on, but with a ſpecial reſpect to the Jews untill Chriſts coming.

Hence the time is particularly noted to be the time of the end, verſ. 40. At the time of the end ſhall the King of the South puſh at him; and in this ſence, viz. for the very concluding time, and ſhutting up of the things here fore-told, is this phraſe uſed throughout this Prophecy, verſ. 27. The end ſhall be at the time appointed, verſ. 35. even to the time of the end, becauſe it is yet for a time appointed, ch. 12. v. 4. Seal the Book even to the time of the end, verſ. 6. How long ſhall it be to the end of theſe Wonders? verſ. 8. What ſhall be the end of theſe things? So verſ. 9, 13. all verifying our ſenſe.

Now we are here to remember what I have proved in my Key, That the one thouſand two hundred and ninety days (the time of the Jews firſt ſtirring) concur in their end with the forty two months, the one thouſand two hundred and ſixty days. This noted, things lie thus. The foregoing verſes brings us down to the end of the forty two months, with which time ending, ends likewiſe the one thouſand two hundred and ninety days. Now do the Jews ſtir, and get their own Land, which Land of theirs, becauſe it lies Southward from Rome, the Seat of the Beaſt, and Conſtantinople likewiſe the Seat of the Turk, the new-ſtirring Jews in oppoſition to theſe take this name, King of the South. The Jews, this new King of the South, being gotten into their Land, puſh at the Turk and Pope both; at the one upon a Civil account; at the other upon a Chriſtian, or at leaſtwiſe as favourers of the Gentile Saints. This makes Pope and Turk (though ſometimes before they had been quarrelling with each other, not herein ſerving any deſign of Chriſt ſo much as their own Luſts; for though they quarrelled, yet it is ſaid of them, verſ. 27. That both their hearts were ſet to doe miſchief) now at laſt gaſpe to joyn hands; and as Herod and Pilate, the one a counterfeit Jew, the other a profeſſed Heathen, deadly enemies to each other before, became friends in oppoſing Chriſt; ſo ſhall Antichriſt and the Turk, the one a counterfeit Chriſtian, the other an open Pagan, who till this day lived by one another as enemies, be now reconciled and made friends, yea become one in oppoſing Chriſts Cauſe, in doing which they ſhall fall together. This combination of theſe two grand Enemies as chief, goes under the name of the King of the North, becauſe either of them (as I have ſaid) are Northerly ſituated from Jeruſalem. Theſe combined ſhall come with great fury into the Land of Judea, and the Countries adjacent, as Aegypt and Aethiopia, who ſhall at this day favour the Jews, Iſa. 19.23, 24, 25. Here ſhall begin the Jews black and terrible day of trouble; for this raging King of the North, filled with outrage to ſee a new Enemy riſen up againſt him, and the more becauſe of tidings he hears from the Eaſt and the North, verſ. 44. which tidings in likelihood is news brought to him of thoſe Gentile Saints (who having been inſtruments of ſetting the Jews at firſt in their own Land, and upon that, having done their work, being returned home) now hearing this, march up again from the Northern parts to aſſiſt the Iews, and together therewith alſo tidings of other Iews coming up to their Land from the Eaſtern Countries. This news ſets him in a great rage, and to the end that he may diſpatch one party firſt, before the other can get up, he marcheth with wonderful fury, reſolving to deſtroy all, into Iudea, and up to Ieruſalem, pitching his Tents in the holy Mountain, i. e. laying cloſe ſiege to Ieruſalem, as Ioel 3.1, 2, Zach. 12.2, 3. by which the Iews ſhall be brought into ſuch ſtraits as never was any people in the world. Now in the day of their greateſt ſtraits, when the Enemies rage, and their ſtraits ſhall be at the higheſt, ſhall Michael ſtand up, i. e. Chriſt appear, as Chap. 12.1. Zach. 14.1, 2, 3, 4, 5. who inſtantly upon his appearing pours out the ſeventh Vial upon all theſe his enemies, now gathering and gathered together, by which they ſhall come to their end, and none ſhall help them, verſe laſt.

Thus this laſt verſe brings us to the point of Chriſts Perſonal appearance, which more fully is opened in the following Chapter, ver. 1. all that follows afterwards to the end of the twelfth Chapter, is not of things ſucceeding, but only, firſt a rehearſall of the ſtate of the Jews in the time of their firſt ſtirring, (the handling whereof, that no interruption might be cauſed in the Story, is omitted till the diſcourſe was come to an end) which is ſet forth by a reſurrection, ver. 2, 3. the ſame with Ezekiels reſurrection of the dry bones, Chapter 37. And afterwards a revealing to Daniel the time of theſe things, (viz. their firſt ſtirring, and their compleat deliverance by the appearance of Chriſt;) which is ſet forth by two myſticall numbers, of which I have diſcourſed at large in Generation work, Part 3. Chap. 2. Sect. 5. and in my Key, Theſ. 17. Theſ. 34.

Thus much by way of anſwer to the firſt opinion concerning the little Horn, in anſwering which I have been led into ſome things a little out of the way, but not unprofitable.

SECT. 3.

THere is likewiſe another opinion of this little Horn, viz. That this little Horn ſignifies the late King Charls, as ſome; or the whole Norman race, as others; of theſe two, as touching the firſt, I muſt confeſſe, I have wondered with my ſelf, how any ſhould once imagine that the Holy Ghoſt being now giving Daniel information how things ſhould be agitated in the World from that time untill the time of the end, ſhould at once leap over all the time from the beginning of the Roman Monarchy, which was long before Chriſt, untill the time of King Charls, the whole amounting to well nigh two thouſand years; conſidering too, that the whole Prophecy of the Revelations in a manner conſiſts upon things to be fulfilled within this time; and it is wonderfull that throughout this time, a time ſo remarkable for obſervation as never any before it, the Holy Ghoſt, when too (as I ſay) he was in a way of informing Daniel, ſhould ſhut up all in ſilence, as if nothing from the time the Roman Monarchy began, were tranſacted or done in the world worthy to bee noted, till King Charls aroſe.

And as to the ſecond, Though the leap in regard of time will be too great to leap from the beginning of the Roman Monarchy untill the time of William the Conqueror, as if the Holy Ghoſt ſhould in this Prophecy leap over the wonderfull revolutions attending Antichriſts coming into the World, and all his rage when come in (which are things particularly noted in Daniels other Prophecies) and obſerve nothing till William the Conqueror aroſe; yet is the miſtake greater in limiting the Holy Ghoſt, ſo much as this opinion doth in regard of place; for it tyes up all done within theſe laſt ſix hundred years to England only; ſo that although it allow more time then the other, yet is it as ſtrait it in reſpect of place, both confining Daniels Prophecy of the little Horn, to things done in England only, which no way agrees to the ſcope of the Prophecy, which is to ſet forth the ſtate of the whole Roman Monarchy. And why we ſhould not as well reſtrain the Apocalypticall Viſions, as the Viſions of Daniel, to England only, I ſee no reaſon to the contrary. This I am ſure, If Daniels Prophecies run upon things done only in England, in caſe Johns doe not ſo too, we cannot make the one Expoſitory of the other.

But to paſſe theſe Generals, I ſhall here lay down ſome particular Reaſons to prove that this opinion, take it in either dreſſe, will no way agree to the minde of the Holy Ghoſt in Daniel.

Reaſ. 1. Becauſe this little Horn after his riſe is equivalent to the fourth Beaſt, or Monarchy, ſwaying the ſame Scepter, having the ſame Seat, or Civil Power; (which cannot agree to the late King Charls, or the Norman Race) as is clear.

1 Becauſe for this Reaſon is the Fourth Monarchy it ſelf, called by the name of the little Horn, Dan. 8.9.

2 Becauſe the fatall deſtruction of the fourth Beaſt, or Monarchy, is for the blaſphemies of the little Horn, Dan. 7.11. an Argument the little Horns power did extend it ſelf to the whole Monarchy, having a ſpecial influence upon the whole, both to cauſe it to ſin, and to bring the Wrath of God upon it.

3 Becauſe the feet and toes of the great Image, chap. 2. (the ſame with the little Horn) are not a particular Nation, but the fourth Kingdome or Monarchy, Dan. 2. the forty and forty one verſes compared.

Reaſ. 2 Becauſe the Prophecy of this little Horn being the ſame with the Brophecy of the vile Perſon, chap. 11. Let it be nakedly conſidered, whether the whole ſtory of King Charls his Life, or of the whole Norman Race will, or doth afford matter fit for a Comment upon Chapter 11. ver. 24 to 32.

Reaſ. 3 Becauſe this opinion doth not agree to the Characters of Daniels little Horn, in any of Daniels four Prophecies.

1 For the Prophecy of the Great Image, the feet and toes of that Image (the ſame with the little Horn) denote ſuch a power as conſiſts principally of ten Parts, ſet forth by the ten toes. This cannot be ſaid of the Norman power, take it either as in the laſt King, or any of his Predeceſſors.

2 For the Prophecy, Chap. 8. its ſaid of the Tyrannical King, That his power ſhould be mighty, but this power none of his own; that he ſhould deſtroy wonderfully, i. e. above all that ever were before him, verſ. 24. That he ſhould ſtand up alſo againſt the Prince of Princes, i. e. Chriſt Perſo: nally appearing; That he ſhould be broken without hand, verſ. 25.

Now apply theſe to King Charls that was, or the Norman Race in generall, and ſee how unſuitable they are.

1 What power did he or they (I mean conſider them as they were Kings) exerciſe, and become mighty thereby, which was none of their own?

2 How did he or they, deſtroy wonderfully above all before them? If we take it for a deſtruction of Nations, were not others before, as Nebuchadnezzar, Cyrus, Alexander the Great, the Romans after them, farre greater deſtroyers of Nations than ever any of the Norman Race? but take it for a deſtruction of Saints, becauſe that the following words import, He ſhall deſtroy the mighty and the holy people; and conſider, whether the Pagan Emperours of Rome in the firſt three hundred years, and Antichriſt ſince, who each of them have put Millions of Saints to death, were not greater deſtroyers of Saints, then the Norman Race.

3 Did ever the Norman Race oppoſe Chriſt Perſonally appearing? but ſo ſhall this little Horn in the end; for after all his oppoſition to the holy people, he ſtands up with an alſo againſt the the Prince of Princes.

4 Can it be ſaid of the Norman Race their breaking was without hand, who were plucked up by the roots by a Civil power?

As for the reſt of the Characters, which alſo belong to this little Horn, verſ. 10.11, 12. Let it be conſidered, whether they do in a more eminent manner (for that muſt be ſaid, or nothing) agree to King Charles, or the Norman Race in general, then to any other perſon, ſtate, or power that ever was in the world ſince Daniels time.

3 For the Propheſie Chap. 11. It is ſaid of the vile perſon, verſ. 21. he ſhall come in peaceably, ſo did not William the Conqueror. Obtain the Kingdome by flatteries, ſo did not Charles Stuart, who had it by ſucceſſion.

Verſ. 33. That Saints under him ſhall fall by ſword, by flame, captivity, and ſpoyl many dayes; but in Scripture-phraſe King Charles continuance cannot be called many daies, no nor the continunance of the Norman Race; for 600. years is but a ſhort time, and not many dayes, in the account of Scripture.

Its ſaid of him, v. 36. That he ſhall exalt himſelf and magnifie himſelf above every god, which is the expreſs character of the man of ſin, 2 Theſ. 2.4. Who oppoſeth and exalteth himſelf above all that is called God. That he ſhall proſper till the indignation be accompliſhed, which Chap. 8.19. is called the laſt end of indignation, i.e. he ſhall perſiſt in his pride and blaſphemies till the pouring forth of the laſt Vial, for that is properly the laſt end of indignation, which Antichriſt ſhall do, but the Norman Race is plucked up by the roots already.

Furthermore its ſaid of the vile perſon, verſ. 37. That he ſhall not regard the deſire of women, which agreeth exactly to Antichriſt, who profeſſeth and voweth chaſtity, forbiddeth and vilifieth Mariage. But if things recorded be true, and in this we have little cauſe to be ſuſpicious, this Character will agree to few of the Norman Race.

Again its ſaid of him, that he ſhall honour a God whom his Fathers knew not, verſ. 38. called therefore a ſtrange God, verſ. 39. which moſt punctually is fulfilled in the Grand Popiſh Idol the Maſſe, an Idol never heard of in the world till Antichriſt deviſed it, and ſet it up. But let it be ſhewn what ſtrange God, unknown to his or their Fathers, did King Charles or any of his Predeceſſors ſet up, and worſhip?

4 For the Propheſie it ſelf, Chap. 7. It is ſaid of this little Horn, verſ. 20. That his look was more ſtout then his fellows, i.e. more dreadful, amazing to thoſe that beheld him, then the look of any of the other Horns. But now let it be impartially conſidered, whether the look of King Charles that was, or his Predeceſſors in the Norman Race, were ever more dreadful and terrible to the Saints, or in particular to the Saints under their power, then the look of any of the other Horns! I do beleeve, yea know Hiſtories will make the contrary appear.

To all the reſt I may adde, as none of the leaſt, the Argument urged in my Key, Theſi 39.

The head of all the Arguments brought for this opinion, take it in its firſt or ſecond dreſs, are cut off at one blow, or with ſaying one word, viz. That as what is ſpoken of Tyrants in general, may in moſt things agree to every particular Tyrant; what is ſpoken of the whole body, in many things to every part; ſo what is here by Daniel ſpoken of Antichriſt, the Grand Tyrant, and the whole body, may in many things very fitly agree to the Norman Race in general, or King Charles that was in particular, they being Tyrants, and alſo a part of this body; yet doth it not therefore follow that the one or the other are here ſolely intended.

The Concluſion is, That Daniels little Horn is neither the Norman Race in general, nor King Charles in particular; But is indeed the Romiſh Antichriſt, to whom (had I leaſure, or opportunity here to undertake the work) I doubt not through the Lords aſſiſtance, but to make it appear, that there is not a title in any of the Propheſies of Daniel, but will naturally, without forcing the Text agree, which wil not to any other opinion what ſoever.

SECT. 4.

But it will be ſaid, how will we ſolve the Grand Objection we ſtarted at firſt, viz. That Daniel ſaw the riſe of this little Horn, after the riſe of the other Horns?

Anſ. My anſwer is this, viz. That the ten Horns Daniel ſpeaks of, among which, or after which came up the little Horn, are not the ten Horns of the Beaſt Antichriſt, but of the Beaſt the fourth Monarchy. Now Antichriſts Kingdome, and the fourth Monarchy differ as the part, and the whole; Antichriſts Kingdome being not the fourth Monarchy, but a part or limb thereof only.

That the fourth Beaſt in Daniel, is not Antichriſts Kingdome, but the fourth Monarchy in general, is clear;

1 Becauſe the fourth Beaſt ſucceeds ſtreightway in the room of the other three Beaſts, i.e. takes the place of the three former Monarchies, ſo ſoon as the third Monarchy was diſſolved. But this did not Antichriſts Kingdome, whoſe riſe was not till ſome hundreds of years after the diſſolution of the third Monarchy; yet it excellently agrees to the Roman Monarchy in general.

2 Becauſe Daniels fourth Beaſt is exceeding terrible, breaks in peeces, and ſtamps all the other Beaſts, Dan. 7.7. which thing will not agree to Antichriſts Kingdome, but to the Roman Monarchy in general.

3 Becauſe the fourth Beaſt in Daniel is diverſe from all the Beaſts before it, Dan. 7.3, 7. but now the deſcription of the Beaſt Antichriſt, Rev. 13.2. argues him to be in ſome things like them all; For firſt he is like a Leopard; And the Beaſt which I ſaw was like unto a Leopard, which is the ſimilitude of Daniels third Beaſt, or the Grecian Monarchy, Dan. 7.6. Secondly, He hath feet as the feet of a Bear, And his feet were as the feet of a Bear, which is the ſimilitude of Daniels ſecond Beaſt, or the Perſian Monarchy, verſ. 5. Thirdly, His mouth is as the mouth of a Lyon, which reſembles Daniels firſt Beaſt, or the Babylonian Monarchy; ſo that Antichriſt hath the ſimilitude of all the former Beaſts; but Daniels fourth Beaſt is diverſe from them all.

4 Becauſe there ſhould be no diſtinction betwixt the fourth Beaſt, and the little Horn, in caſe the fourth Beaſt be to be underſtood of Antichriſts Kingdome; for that is the thing ſet forth by the little Horn.

5 Becauſe the riſe of Daniels fourth Beaſt is clearly and plainly noted to be before the riſe of Antichriſts Kingdome; for the riſe of Antichriſts Kingdome begun in the riſe of the little Horn; but the fourth Beaſt with all his Horns, was riſen before that; how elſe is the little Horn ſaid to riſe among, and after the other Horns? I conclude therefore that Daniels fourth Beaſt is the Roman Monarchy in general, as Johns Beaſt, Rev. 13.1, 2. is the ſame only as under Antichriſt.

Now this being ſo, it is to be noted, that the Roman Monarchy from its beginning, take it either as it was in its pure Civil ſtate, or as it now is in its mixt Antichriſtian ſtate, had ever ten Horns. As it was a pure Civil ſtate, ſo was it exactly divided into ten parts in the dayes of Auguſtus Ceſar, as Strabo witneſſeth. And for this reaſon, the Dragon, which repreſents the old Empire, hath as well ten Horns, Rev. 12.3. as the Beaſt, Chap. 13.1. yet with this difference, the ten Horns of the Roman Monarchy in its firſt ſtate had no Crown i.e. the Kingdomes ſubjected to the Roman Empire, whilſt it remained a pure Civil ſtate, had not Legiſlative power within themſelves, but rather were kept in the nature of Provinces, over whom the Roman ſtate did ſet titular Kings (as Herod in Chriſts time was the titular King of Judea, and for this reaſon, becauſe ſo in title, they are called Kings, Dan. 7.24.) but yet did ſtill reſerve to it ſelf the power of making and giving laws; as in Chriſts time, beſides Herod the titular King, there was Pilate the Roman Governour ſet over the Land to execute Laws, which Laws executed were only the Laws of Rome; and hence Chriſt is ſaid to be crucified in Rome, becauſe he ſuffered by the Law and Power of Rome, Rev. 11.8.

And alſo it is for this reaſon, that the Dragon repreſenting the old Empire is ſaid to have his Crowns, not upon his Horns as the Beaſt, Chap. 13.1. but upon his ſeven Heads; that is, the Legiſlative power all the time of the old Empire is continued at Rome, built upon ſeven Mountains, which are theſe ſeven Heads, Rev. 17.9. Yea farther, it is for this reaſon, that John ſpeaking of the ten Kings, as having a being even then when he wrote, ſaith, Chap. 17.12. that as yet they had received no Kingdome, but were afterwards to receive power as Kings, namely with the Beaſt, i.e. though all the ten Horns were then in being, yet were they then onely titular Kings, who had no power of making or giving Laws, this power as yet abiding upon the Heads, i.e. at Rome it ſelf. But now the Horns of the Beaſt Antichriſt, i.e. the Roman Monarchy as under Antichriſt, have Crowns upon them, i.e. that Legiſlative power which was before upon the Heads, is now tranſlated to the Horns; every particular Kingdome, which before were but as Provinces, governed by no other Laws but ſuch as came from Rome, hath now a power within it ſelf to rule, and to make Laws; therefore ſaith John, Rev. 17.12. the ten Horns receive power as Kings with the Beaſt, that is, when the Roman Monarchy which then was in the hands of Emperors, and the whole governed by the Laws of Rome, ſhall fall in the hands of the Beaſt, then ſhall thoſe ſeveral Kings which before were titular, only receive Kingly power, or power as Kings to make and give Laws within their own Dominions, without receiving their Laws from any foreign place or power.

Now conſider the ten Horns in the firſt reſpect as they are the Horns of the Roman Empire in general (which is clearly Daniels ſenſe, the ten Horns he ſpeaks of being the Horns of the fourth Beaſt, i.e. the Empire in general; for ſaith he, verſ. 7. It (that is the fourth Beaſt) had ten Horns) and it is moſt clear the riſe of Antichriſt, the little Horn, was among and after theſe Horns. And therefore obſerve the words narrowly, it is ſaid, that at the time of the little Horns riſe, three of the firſt are plucked up by the roots, verſ. 8. what is the meaning? why this; the Roman Monarchy in either ſtate (as I have ſaid) had ten Horns; now upon the little Horns riſe, three of the firſt, i.e. three of the Horns of the Roman Monarchy as conſidered in its firſt ſtate were plucked up. And hence verſ. 24. The little Horn is ſaid to be diverſe from the firſt, that is, from all the Horns of this Monarchy in its firſt ſtate; For of the Horns of the Monarchy in its ſecond ſtate, how is the little Horn diverſe, when as the ten Horns in this ſtate are but a part of this little Horn, i.e. of the Roman Monarchy as governed by Antichriſt?

And thus to underſtand it, unties that great knot, verſ. 8. of three Horns being plucked up by the roots before the little Horn at the time of this riſe: for taking three to ſignifie not ſtrictly three, but divers or many (three being uſed becauſe a number of perfection) and how clear is it from all Hiſtories that upon the invaſion made by the Goths and Vandals, with which the Beaſt roſe, as before a conſiderable part of thoſe Provinces, which were before ſubjected to the Roman Empire, and ruled by its Laws, were now broken off, and grew up into particular Kingdomes ruled by Laws of their own, and ſo by degrees the whole Legiſlative power crept off from the ſeventh and laſt Head to the Horns?

And thus interpreted, this place in Daniel doth excellently point out the time of the Beaſts riſe; and I take it, that it is left us by the holy Ghoſt as a divine Character to guide us where we ſhould end the firſt ſtate of the Roman Monarchy, and begin its ſecond; where we ſhould put a period to the Roman Monarchy, as a pure Civil ſtate, and begin it as an Antichriſtian; namely with the time when a remarkable breach or rupture ſhould be made among the firſt ten horns, or the ten horns of the Monarchy, as in its firſt ſtate; with this time, and among the horns thus broken ſhould the little Horn creep up, i.e. from thence ſhould the tranſlation of the Monarchy be, or from thence ſhould Antichriſts Kingdom begin; ſo that indeed theſe words are ſo farre from weakning what we have aſſerted, that they are a ſtrong confirmation of our beginning, that wee have ſtated it aright, in ſtating the riſe of the Beaſt, Antichriſt, to be with the time of the invaſion of the Goths and Vandals.

Thus notwithſtanding the Objection, our Argument ſtands firm, viz. That the riſe of the Antichriſtian Beaſt is a little before the riſe of his Horns; and therefore his Horns riſing ſuddenly after the beginning of the one thouſand two hundred and ſixty days, the forty two months, the riſe of the Beaſt himſelf is ſtated rightly with the year three hundred ninety ſix.

SECT. 5.

To the Arguments already laid down, I ſhall adde an Argument or two more.

Arg. 1. The aforeſaid ending of the one thouſand two hundred and ſixty days agrees moſt fitly to the time of killing the Witneſſes; The time of the Witneſſes killing (which is to be reckoned the laſt three days & a half of the one thouſand two hundred and ſixty, as ſee Generation Work, Part 3. Chap. 1. Sect. 4.) falls under the third Vial, and a little before the firſt ſtirring of the Jews (as is alſo there proved, Sect. 5. in the firſt and third concluſions) now as the third Vial is the Vial wee at preſent ſtand under, as my diſcourſe upon that Vial manifeſts; ſo the firſt ſtirring of the Iews fals to be in the year one thouſand ſix hundred fifty ſix, as is proved, Key, Theſi. 20, therefore it agrees well to the one and the other, to end the one thouſand two hundred and ſixty days with the year one thouſand ſix hundred fifty ſix.

Arg. 2. Taken from the viſibility of thoſe very things at this day, which the Scripture hath fore-told us ſhall occur within the laſt three days and a half of the one thouſand two hundred and ſixty.

To give ſome inſtances.

Firſt, The Scripture fore-tels, that within this time the Witneſſes ſhall lie dead; Their death ſhall be civil, and Spiritual; Civil in being ſtripped of Religion, and Liberty; Spiritual, in ſubjecting themſelves (through a ſpirit of cowardize upon them) to this Tyranny of the Beaſt, rather then to run the hazard of life in oppoſing him. The place of their lying dead ſhall be Germany; the one to be their death, the other the place, I have proved, Generation Work, Part 3. Chap. 1. Sect. 7, 8. whether (conſidering the thing, time, and place) have we not more then a little ground to conjecture, that the preſent day is the day of the Witneſſes killing? and if ſo, then conſidering that this time is the laſt three days and a half of the one thouſand two hundred and ſixty, doth it not ſpeak that the year we have ſtated as the end of the one thouſand two hundred and ſixty is the right, viz. Anno Dom. one thouſand ſix hundred fifty ſix.

Secondly, The Scripture fore-tels, That within the laſt three days and a half of the one thouſand two hundred and ſixty, A war ſhall bee attempted; Firſt, by the inviſible Dragon, then by the viſible, (of which read Generation Work, Part 3. Chap. 2. Sect. laſt) againſt a remnant of the Womans Seed, that ſhall ſtand up for Chriſt in the World, within the day that their Brethren the Witneſſes lie dead, which ſhal be known by theſe two Characters; 1. They ſhall walk in Goſpel inſtitutions. 2. Have amongſt them a Spirit of Prophecy. Now whether the beginnings of the firſt War, and probabilities of the ſecond, be not at this day more viſible upon a people, having the aforeſaid Characters then ever heretofore, I propound as a Quaere?

Thirdly, The Scripture fore-tels that there ſhall be within this time a people in the World that ſhall favour the Witneſſes, and withall be ſo potent as to awe the Beaſt (of whom mention is made, Generat. Work, Part 3. Chap. 1. Sect. 9.) Who yet ſetling themſelves upon a worldly intereſt as their higheſt ayme, ſhall neither openly declare for the Witneſſes Cauſe, nor againſt the Beaſt; Theſe are called, They of the People, and Nations, and Kindreds, and Tongues, Revel. 11.9. which cannot be interpreted the Popiſh party, though Rev. 17.15. they are ſo deſcribed, becauſe in this place they are diſtinguiſhed from the Popiſh party, which in the following verſe are ſet forth by another name, viz. The dwellers on the earth. Whether or no ſuch a people be not now to be found, I alſo put the queſtion?

Fourthly, The Scripture fore-tels, That within this time there ſhall be a great League and combination of Nations (the Beaſt now gathering together his Powers to defend himſelf, the time being come that his Dominion is to be taken away; as the Fourth Monarchy afterwards, at the end of the one thouſand three hundred thirty five dayes, (when it is to go to ruine) gathers together all its power to that dreadful Battle of Armageddon to uphold it ſelf.) Whether a Work like this be not now on foot likewiſe, I propound as another Quaere?

Fifthly, The Scripture fore-tels, That within this time there ſhall be in the World a wonderfull triumph over the dead and ſuppreſſed Witneſſes, as ſuppoſing they and their Cauſe likewiſe to be now dead and ſunk for ever, Revel. 11.10. Chap. 18.7. Whether doth the preſent time afford nothing that hath a look like this? If all theſe things bee found true at this day, have they not in them the weight of an Argument to prove, That wee are upon the very ending time of the one thouſand two hundred and ſixty days?

Arg. 3. The forty two months, the one thouſand two hundred and ſixty days may not be begun either higher of lower; therefore they muſt bee begun with the aforeſaid year. That they may not bee begun any time higher, is clear, becauſe from ſuch beginnings the time is expired; but this cannot be, becauſe the Witneſſes to this very day (my opinion is throughout all Europe, but all muſt confeſſe in moſt places, as Germany, France, &c.) do yet wear their Sackcloth; the Woman as to this day abides in the Wilderneſs, the Beaſt as to this day, (I really think in all the ten Horns, but as to the greater part of them it is undeniable) doth yet continue to rage againſt the Saints, by perſecuting them under the Notion of Hereticks, or Schiſmaticks, or Enemies to Civil Government (becauſe they cannot but declare, That the day is come, in which God will deſtroy, as well his Monarchical Power, as his Spiritual, and Eccleſiaſtical) to tread under foot the holy City, by eſtabliſhing Powers not of Chriſt, but his own creating, to bee Lords over Gods heritage; to blaſpheme God, by blaſpheming (as did the wicked Phariſees) thoſe very Works and Truths of God, counting them Erroneous, Diabolical, which yet take him at ſome times, when he is in his beſt mood, hee is convinced in his Conſcience are of God; yea and fears (maugre all his oppoſition) that theſe things will prove his undoing, to tyrannize over the Nations, by continuing thoſe unrighteous Laws, Cuſtoms, &c. which were at firſt impoſed by the Beaſt, that by theſe he might like an imperious Whore ſit domineering upon the waters, Revel. 17.1.15. that is, bee a Tyrant over the People. Now I ſay, conſidering that all theſe things are in being unto this very day (yea and that in all the ten Horns, to him that hath but half an eye to ſee) it cannot be that the forty two months, the one thouſand two hundred and ſixty days, (which are the limited time of the Witneſſes wearing Sackcloth, the Womans being in the Wilderneſs, the Beaſts rage againſt the Saints, treading under foot the Holy City, his blaſpheming God, and his Truth, his Tyranny over the Nations) ſhould be begun higher, then our aforeſaid beginning, for then ſhould we ſee a perfect end of thoſe things (in part, i.e.) in ſome of the ten Horns at leaſt, which yet wee ſee to have being and exiſt, yea to be maintained in every one of them; I therefore conclude, That the forty two months, the one thouſand two hundred and ſixty days, cannot be begun higher then the year I have ſtated.

That they cannot be begun lower, is clear and manifeſt, becauſe it is a monſtrous abſurdity to ſay, That all the Beaſts Horns ſhould ſpring up, before yet the Beaſt was brought forth; but (as I have proved at large in the fore-going diſcourſe) all the Horns were come forth, but a few years lower then the ſtated year; therefore muſt the time of the Beaſts riſe (who naturally hath being before his Horns) be, as I have ſtated it, and cannot without that groſſe abſurdity of placing the Beaſt after his Horns, bee placed lower. Again, All that begin lower, do not begin from the time of Antichriſts Infancy, or from the time of his firſt riſe; (which none can or do deny, but it was as early as we have ſtated it; the teſtimonies of all the Ancients being ſo full, as touching the wonderful defection that was in the Church about that time;) but rather they begin from the time of his growth, either his full growth, his perfect maturity, or his growth in part only; but now this beginning is expreſly againſt the Prophecy of the Beaſt, which points us to the time of the Beaſts firſt riſe, as the time whence we are to reckon his forty two months.

This we may ſee, Revel. 13. in verſ. 5. It is ſaid, Power was given to him to continue forty two months. Whence are we to reckon theſe forty two months? Anſ. From the day he firſt received his power and authority from the Dragon, verſ. 2. The Dragon gave him his Power, and his Seat, and great Anthority. And when was that? Anſ. At the time of his firſt riſe, verſ. 1. I ſaw a Beaſt riſe up out of the Sea, having ſeven Heads, and ten Horns, and the Dragon gave him his power, &c. Farther, Let it be conſidered, that the ſecond Beaſt, or the Eccleſiaſtical ſtate of Antichriſt is ſet forth under a three-fold repreſentation in the Book of the Revelation, ſuitable to his three-fold State, viz. of Infancy, Maturity, Old Age.

1 In his Infant ſtate, He is a poor deſpicable Beaſt, creeping out of the earth, but not able as yet to make the Nations crouch to him, and therefore he borrows the power of the firſt Beaſt, i.e. of the Civil Magiſtrate, thereby to carry on his own deſigns, Rev. 13.11, 12.

2 In his Mature ſtate the Beaſt ſits as a rich proud imperious Whore upon the Nations, Revel. 17.1. compared with 15. and rides upon the back of the firſt Beaſt, or the Magiſtraticall power of Nations, ver. 3. ruling them, and the Nations under them, making them do even what this Beaſt liſts.

3 In his declining ſtate, or Old Age, hee is a falſe Prophet, i.e. hee counterfeits abundance of Holineſs, more then indeed he hath, or ever before profeſſed; the reaſon where of I take to be; the firſt Beaſt through his long riding and galling of him, now begins to kick, and will by no means endure his Rider any longer; the Nations begin to ſee, that this Beaſt is not indeed (as they have been all along held in hand, and made beleeve) the Woman, the true Church, but a very Strumpet, that by Whoring and Juggling hath in all Ages made her ſelf rich, perſecuted the Saints, enſlaved them; this makes the Nations begin to ſpurn likewiſe at this Beaſt. This Beaſt now fearing a downfall, and knowing full well that if there be not ſome way found out to keep up his eſteem with the firſt Beaſt, and the Nations, he is undone; he Proteus-like (for indeed he is a Monſter, never heard of in the world till Antichriſts Kingdom began) changeth ſhapes, and as at firſt of a poor ragged Beaſt became (opportunity ſerving him) a proud Whore; ſo now the Beaſt when he can be a ruling, commanding Whore no longer, transforms himſelf into a falſe Prophet, pretending abundance of Holineſſe, that hereby he may keep up that eſteem ſtill with the firſt Beaſt, and the Nations, which once he had, but hath wel-nigh loſt, through his domineering pride and imperiouſneſs. This is the true ſtate of the ſecond Beaſt (or of Antichriſt, as conſidered in his Eccleſiaſtical ſtate) throughout the Book of the Revelations. And of this I have more fully treated, in my diſcourſe upon the Vials, p. 101. to the 112. Now obſerve thoſe who begin the Kingdom of Antichriſt from the time of Antichriſts growth, or maturity, leave out the firſt ſtate of the ſecond Beaſt, and begin their account with his ſecond; which certainly we muſt not do, but muſt carry our beginning ſo high, as to take in all the three, as the Holy Ghoſt hath laid them down; I therefore conclude, that wee may not begin lower then the aforeſaid year, three hundred ninety ſix.

Seeing therefore that we may not begin either higher or lower, it neceſſarily follows that wee muſt begin with the year we have fixed upon, viz. three hundred ninety ſix; to which number adding one thouſand two hundred and ſixty, the whole makes up one thouſand ſix hundred fifty ſix.

The reſult of my whole diſcourſe in this Second Part is, That the utmost period of the Beaſts continuance, the treading under foot the Holy City, the Womans being in the Wilderneſs, the Witneſſes Prophecying in Sackcloth, all which things are concurrent, will in greateſt probability be, Anno Dom. one thouſand ſix hundred fifty ſix.

Thus Iohns one thouſand two hundred and ſixty days expire in the ſame year with Daniels one thouſand two hundred and ninety. Thus likewiſe in that very year in which from the Creation the Flood came upon the corrupted old World, in that very year from our Redemption, cometh the flood of Gods wrath upon the Idolatrous Antichriſtian world.

The end of the Second Part.
PART. III.

Computing the time of the Fourth Monarchy, and ſhewing where the date of all worldly Kingdomes expires; and when the Fifth Monarchy, or that glorious Kingdome of Chriſt and the Saints, which is to bear rule over all the Earth, ſhall be ſet up.

CHAP. I. Of Daniels two thouſand and three hundred dayes.

THe times that the Prophetical and Apocalyptical Numbers are converſant about, are either the time of the Beaſts Tyranny, or the time of the fourth Monarchy.

The time of the Beaſts Tyranny, we have treated of in our Second Part, and ſhewed where the date of his Commiſſion ends. It now remains that we enquire into the time of the fourth Monarchy, to the end we may know how long that is to continue; and when, or by what time we may expect the total and final diſſolution thereof.

Two myſtical Numbers ending at one and the ſame point, afford us light into this Queſtion; the one is Daniels one thouſand three hundred thirty five dayes, Chap. 12.12. the other his two thouſand three hundred, Chap. 8.14. I ſhall ſay no more as touching the firſt then what I have already written in my Key, judging what I have there laid down; Theſi 20. and Theſi 37. to be ſufficient as to it. My preſent Diſcourſe ſhall therefore proceed upon the latter, viz. of the two thouſand and three hundred dayes.

SECT. 1.

The common-road opinion, is, that the little Horn mentioned in this eight of Daniel is to be underſtood of Antiochus Epiphanes; the two thouſand and three hundred days to be natural dayes, a day conſiſting of four and twenty hours: ſo the whole making up ſix years, three months, and twenty dayes, which the Authors & Favourers of this opinion apply to the time of Antiochus rage againſt the Jews.

Now in order to our anſwer hereunto, let us premiſe, That the Feet and Toes of the Great Image, Chap. 2. The little Horn, Chap. 7. The vile perſon, Chap. 11. who is deſcribed from verſ. 21. to verſ. 40. and the little Horn in his ſecond ſtate, or ſecond waxing great, in this eighth Chapter, are one and the ſame, the very ſame ſtate or perſon (if a particular perſon be here meant) is ſignified by all theſe.

And this needs no proof, becauſe the common opinion hath granted it, by making application of all that the Holy Ghoſt hath ſpoken, as touching either of theſe, to that horrible Monſter Antiochus Epiphanes; thereby plainly confeſſing that one and the ſame thing is ſignified in the aforeſaid parts of each Propheſie.

This premiſed, let us examine what truth there is in this principle ſo much hugged and contended for by many, as the onely door of light into Daniel.

And although more can hardly be ſaid in anſwer hereunto then what hath been already by ſome worthy men of later times, who have oppoſed themſelves to this opinion, as Mr. Archer in his Perſonal Reign, The Author of Clavis Apocalyptica ad incudem revocata, but above all, the learned Parker in his Daniels Viſions and Propheſies expounded; yet becauſe in principles that men are wedded too (as ordinarily they are to all, be they right or wrong, that have but a crowd of learned men to Patronize them) they had rather (to uſe the Popiſh Proverb) beleeve as the Church beleeves, then look out for an Author that is contrary to their mind. I think it worth my pains in oppoſition to this opinion, to preſent here (though I ſhall but multiply whilſt I ſo do things already publiſhed) ſome of thoſe Arguments that are and may be brought againſt it; not doubting but that thoſe who ſincerely love truth, will ſee reaſon enough to be of my mind; as for others, who following the genius of this age, which is to be ſick, ſullen, and humorſome, when any truth croſſeth thoſe principles they have received by tradition from their Fore-fathers, have a principle or a will (I know not which I may call it) that they will not ſee any thing but with the eyes of their Fore-fathers, or the multitude of the learned Doctors of the time, let Scripture or right reaſon ſpeak ever ſo clear or punctual; I leave ſuch to the judgement of being yet farther blinded.

But to come to the opinion it ſelf, the Queſtion is, Whether doth this Propheſie, Chap. 8. run upon Antiochus Epiphanes or no? This reſolved, it will be eaſily determined whether the dayes are Natural or Prophetical.

To this I anſwer, That Antiochus Epiphanes, notwithſtanding Commentators have fearfully and ſhamefully ſtretched the Text, Reaſon, and the very ſinews of the ancient Hiſtories to gather up ſomething that might colourably make the whole to agree to him, cannot be the perſon here meant, unleſſe we look upon him as a common Tyrant and Perſecutor, and ſo I deny not but that many things ſpoken of Antichriſt that Grand Tyrant and Perſecutor of the Saints, may very fitly be applied to him. Yea I think withall that there might be a ſpecial deſign of God in it, that many of the things here mentioned ſhould be fairly appliable to him and others, that ſo thereby doors of miſtake might be left open, and by it the Propheſie kept ſealed (which otherwiſe in an ordinary way could not have been) untill the appointed time. And the ſame deſign ſeems to me to run alſo through the Book of the Revelations, in opening which it is very eaſie to miſtake, if every thing which hath a plauſible look, and fair colour outwardly, may preſently be taken up as an Interpretation.

But to paſſe this, and come to the thing, That this Propheſie (as holds the common opinion) ſhould terminate in Antiochus Epiphanes, and ſo have its fulfilling before the firſt coming of Chriſt, cannot be.

My Reaſon is, Becauſe it will not agree to the mind of the Holy Ghoſt in any one of Daniels four Propheſier before mentioned.

Firſt, To begin with that of the Great Image. Chap. 2. This opinion doth no way correſpond with the truth of that Propheſie.

1 Becauſe that Propheſie runs down into the latter dayes (or the end of dayes, as our new Annotationiſts upon the Bible render it) verſ. 28. But there is a God in Heaven that revealeth ſecrets, and maketh known to the King Nebuchadnezzar what ſhall be in the latter dayes. But this cannot be, ſhould the whole have its accompliſhment two hundred years before Chriſts birth, as this opinion doth, and muſt neceſſarily maintain; for Antiochus Epiphanes whoſe Kingdome they will have to belong to the Feet and Toes (which are the extreme and utmoſt parts of the Image, and therefore the cloſe of the Propheſie) reigned two hundred years before the birth of Chriſt.

2 Becauſe the Iron legs are called the fourth Kingdome or Monarchy, verſ. 40. And the fourth Kingdome ſhall be ſtrong as Iron; but this opinion which applies the legs and feet to the Race of the Seleucidae, and Antiochus Epiphanes one of that Race, makes the Iron legs and feet a part of the third Kingdome or Monarchy; for the houſe of the Seleucidae and Antiochus Epiphanes, are by Chronologers generally reckoned as a part of the third or Grecian Monarchy.

3 Becauſe the fourth Kingdome is that which breaks in peeces all the foregoing Kingdomes and Monarchies, i.e. it ſubdues to it ſelf whatſoever was before ſubject to any of the other Monarchies, verſ. 40. for as much as Iron breaketh in peeces and ſubdueth all things, and as Iron that breaketh all theſe, ſhall it break in peeces and bruiſe.

This alſo appears from verſ. 35. becauſe the ſtone that ſmites, upon its ſmiting, breaks the Braſſe, the Silver, the Gold, as well as the Iron and Clay, though yet it ſmites no other but the feet of Iron and Clay, which ſhews that whatſoever was in the three firſt parts of Gold, Silver, Braſſe, was now by ſucceſſion come to the Iron and Clay, which ſmitten, the whole is broken. But this was never done by the Seleucidae in general, nor Antiochus Epiphanes in ſpecial, therefore cannot relate to him or them, but had a punctual fulfilling in the Roman Monarchy, which ſucceeded the Grecian, and ſwallowed up whatſoever the foregoing Monarchies poſſeſſed.

4 Becauſe in the dayes of theſe Kings the God of Heaven ſets up his own Kingdome, verſ. 44. But this Kingdome (according to the principle of thoſe who are our Opponents, who begin it not till Chriſts Birth) was not ſet up in the dayes of the Seleucidae, nor of Antiochus Epiphanes; for the whole Kingdome of the Seleucidae, yea the whole Greek Empire (lower then which this opinion looks not) was utterly diſſolved many years before Chriſts Birth.

5 Becauſe it is Chriſts Kingdome, repreſented by the Stone, which by ſmiting breaks in peeces that Kingdome, which by the Feet and Toes of the Great Image is ſet forth, verſ. 34. Thou ſawest till that a Stone was cut out without hands, which ſmote the Image upon his feet that were of Iron and Clay, and brake them to peeces; But it was not Chriſts Kingdome, but the Pagan power of the Roman Empire that deſtroyed and brake in peeces the Kingdome of the Seleucidae, of which Antiochus Epiphanes was a limb; therefore cannot the Seleucidae or Antiochus Epiphanes be underſtood by the Feet and Toes of the Great Image.

6 Becauſe the ſtone that ſmiting the Great Image breaks it to peeces, cannot be Chriſts ſpiritual Kingdome, ſet up upon his firſt coming, which this opinion as it doth ſay, ſo muſt it, or ſay nothing.

1 Becauſe this Kingdome take its riſe where the Feet and Toes are ſmitten; but Chriſts ſpiritual Kingdome did not riſe till many years after the Feet and Toes, in the ſenſe of the Patrons of this opinion, were wholly diſſolved, and in being no longer.

2 Becauſe this Kingdome cannot become a mountain filling the whole earth ſo long as the Great Image, i.e. Worldly powers ſtand, which is clear, becauſe upon the totall diſſolution of the Great Image, it becomes a Mountain, and not before, verſ. 34, 35. But now Chriſts ſpiritual Kingdome may be a Mountain filling the earth in a ſpiritual ſenſe, though the Great Image be not broken in peeces, i.e. though worldly powers are ſtanding.

3 Becauſe ſuch a Kingdome is ſignified by the Stone as was repreſented by the Great Image; for the Kingdome of the Stone takes the place of the Great Image upon its diſſolution. But the Kingdome or Kingdomes ſignified by the Great Image were not ſpiritual, but outward; therefore ſuch muſt be the Kingdome of the Stone.

4 Becauſe ſuch a Kingdome is here meant as muſt anſwer to Daniels ſcope in his anſwer to the Kings Dream. But if this Kingdome were ſpiritual only, then Daniel had miſſed the ſoope much; for Nebuchadnezzars thoughts run of his Monarchy, according to which thoughts the Dream was directed, and Daniel interpreting it, undertakes to reſolve him fully: For in a word (as ſaith Mr. Huet whoſe Argument this is) Daniel intends two main points:

1 To comfort the Jews in the loſſe of their Kingdome and Liberty, ſhewing that after many changes it ſhould be reſtored to them again.

2 To convince the King of his Tyranny over them, by which his third Heir ſhould be nothing the warmer; another ſhould take it from him, a third from him, and a fourth from him, which at length (maugre all their deſpight) ſhould be returned to the Jews in greater glory then ever they loſt it. Now whether the Spiritual Kingdome of Chriſt doth anſwer this ſcope or no, I leave (ſaith he) to the judgement of the godly wiſe.

5 Becauſe ſuch a Kingdom is here intended as was to be continued to the Jews (after once they ſhould be poſſeſſed thereof) without alteration. So the Text, It ſhall not be given to another people, i.e. from Daniels people; but when Chriſt came, and brought his Spiritual Kingdom (whiles to be meerly Spiritual) he firſt preached the Goſpel to the loſt ſheep of the houſe of Iſrael, from whom notwithſtanding the Goſpel was taken away and given to the Gentiles.

6 Becauſe the proper work of the Stone, to which it is appointed, is to break in peeces earthly Kingdoms, verſ. 44 but Chriſts Spiritual Kingdom ſet up upon his firſt coming was not appointed to any ſuch end; for then would not Chriſt have commanded a ſubjection of the Subjects thereof to worldly powers.

7 And laſtly, What prerogative and advancement had it been for the Kingdom of Chriſt Spiritual, to have broken down the Seleucidae, and other Horns of the Greek Empire, ſo long as another Kingdom, the Kingdom of the Romans ſucceeded in their place to beat down the Church by the Heathen Emperours, and Antichriſt, for longer ſpace of time, and with greater and more terrible perſecution then ever was before?

This opinion therefore cannot agree to Daniels firſt Viſion, of the Great Image.

Secondly, for Daniels ſecond Viſion of the four Beaſts, Chap. 7. it no way agrees to it; for it cannot be that the fourth Beaſt, having ten Horns, verſ. 7. ſhould be the Houſe of the Seleucidae, or that the little Horn, verſ. 8. ſhould be Antiochus, Epiphanes, as this opinion holds.

I ſhall here oppoſe only the Arguments alledged by Mr. Parker from the learned Graſerus in anſwer to it, as judging them ſufficient, though yet if need be, there is more to be ſpoken.

Arg. 1 The Kingdom of the Seleucidae belongeth to the Third Beaſt, and is one of the four Parts into which the Grecian Kingdom was divided after Alexanders death, expreſly repreſented in his four wings, and four Heads, verſ. 6. the truth of which interpretation will clearly appear by comparing with chap. 8.8.22. chap. 11.4. for the King of Grecia is expreſly diſtinguiſhed from Alexander, as the whole from the part, comprehending both him, and the quadrupartite diviſion among his Succeſſors, chap. 8.21, 22. therefore both he and the Seleucidae, with other his Succeſſors, are included in the third Beaſt, and cannot be extended to the fourth.

2 Becauſe theſe four Beaſts aroſe ſucceſsively to ſubdue the world, verſ. 2, 3. but the Seleucidae, and other Succeſſors of Alexander ſucceeded into it already ſubdued by him.

Thirdly, The Preface prefixed to the fourth Beast, After this I ſaw in the night Viſions, and behold a fourth Beaſt dreadfull, verſ. 7. the propoſing of him without a name, as an unknown Monſter; the ſollicitous and curious enquiry of Daniel concerning him, ver. 19. the beſtowing of a farre larger & more accurate deſcription upon him then upon the former Beaſts, do plainly argue, That the fourth Kingdom here ſignified is farre more great and wonderful then any of the former, and therefore cannot be the Kingdom of the Seleueidae.

Fourthly, The fourth Beaſt is ſaid to be dreadfull, and terrible, and very ſtrong, in compariſon with the Beaſts going before; having Iron teeth, and Brazen nails, devouring and breaking in peeces, and ſtamping the reſidue under feet. But the Kingdom of the Seleucidae was weaker then that of Alexander, as is expreſly ſaid, chap. 8.22. and did not devour and deſtroy ſo as the former Kingdoms, as entring upon a world ſubdued already by Alexander the Great, therefore the fourth Kingdom cannot be the Kingdom of the Seleucidae. Thou wilt ſay, The fourth Kingdom is thus expreſſed, not in relation to the world, or State generall, but to the Jewiſh Church, unto which it was more terrible and ſtronger then the former. But it is manifeſt that the Iron ſtrength is the Character of this Kingdome, diſtinguiſhing it in a generall and unlimited compariſon with the Kingdoms going before. To exert in ſome particular place, ſuch as Judea, more cruelty, by reaſon of the weakneſſe of the people, and not by reaſon of his own abſolute ſtrength, is not a ſufficient reaſon that he ſhould be Characteriſed, and diſtinguiſhed from the others by the character of ſtrength and fearfulneſs, no more verily then the Spaniſh Inquiſition, or Phalaris, or ſome other Tyrant, may be ſuperlatively compared in ſtrength with Cyrus, Alexander, Julius Caeſar, becauſe more cruell and formidable then they, in reſpect of ſome weak and not reſiſting perſons, over whom without exertion of much ſtrength they might eaſily exerciſe their tyranny. Again, their ſtrength was not ſo much terrible to the Jews as Nebuchadnezzars or Hamans was; and the Jews againſt the Seleucidae would have vindicated themſelves into liberty, and had defended themſelves ſufficiently, had not the Romans come upon them, and broken them down at laſt, and the Seleucidae together. Laſtly, it is expreſly ſaid, That the fourth Kingdom is thus ſtrong, irony, and terrible, not only in relation to the Jews, but alſo to the whole earth, verſ. 23. for it devours and treads down the whole earth.

5 Becauſe this Beaſt is ſaid to bee unlike to the Beaſts that were before it; whereas the Kingdom of the Seleucidae was like other Kingdoms. Some ſay, it was unlike in reſpect of the ten Horns; but theſe (as they will have it) are ten ſucceeding Kings, which in kinde and nature is ordinary to all Kingdoms. They ſay it is extraordinary in this reſpect, becauſe ſome of the Aegyptian Kings are mixed in the number. But what ground is there of ſuch a mixture? becauſe (ſay they) they are deſcribed, chap. 11. Anſ. But in Chapter eleven is no mention made of ten Horns, and the number there is not adaequately ten; no reaſon to extrude ſome, to intrude others, but rather contrary to reaſon, as Graſerus ſheweth.

6 Becauſe the fourth Beaſt hath ten Horns, and a little Horn ariſing after them, by whom three of the former were rooted out, verſ. 7, 8. How will this agree to the Kingdom of the Seleucidae? They ſay, they are ten ſucceding Kings, whereof Antiochus Epiphanes is the tenth and laſt, and the ſame the little Horn. Anſ. But if only by ſucceſſion, then really in all particular differences of time it had but one Horn, and ſo the Kingdom might rather be ſaid to have one Horn then ten. 2. Theſe ten Horns here deſcribed, exiſted at the ſame time, not by ſucceſſion, becauſe the little Horn aroſe among them, verſ. 8. and his look was more ſtout then his fellows, verſ. 20.3. How can Antiochus Epiphanes be both the little Horn, and alſo the laſt of the ten, ſeeing the little Horn is ſaid to ariſe beſides, and after them, ver. 8.20, 24. 4. Antiochus cannot be the little Horn, becauſe the little Horn ariſing, groweth greater and greater, and more ſtately then the other Horns, verſ. 2, 20 • whereas Antiochus was not ſo great as his Father Antiochus Magnus. 5. What are the three Horns, and how did they fall before Antiochus? ver. 8. It is ſaid, That they are Prolomeus Philopater King of Aegypt, Seleucus the Brother of Antiochus, and Demetrius. But was Seleucus rooted out becauſe he dyed by ſlow and lingring hatred? and how can Demetrius bee one of the three which was not reckoned by the Authors of this opinion among the ten? verſ. 8. Laſtly, by the fall of the three the little Horn grew greater then the reſt, whereas nothing was added to Antiochus beſides the ancient Kingdom of the Seleucidae. 6. Sixthly, the little Horn rageth againſt the Saints until a time, times, and a half. How will this agree unto Antiochus, becauſe (ſay they) the Temple was prophaned by Antiochus three years and ten days? Anſ. But here it is half a time, or half a year, as alſo appeareth by comparing chap. 12.7. Apoc. 12.14. and ten days makes not half a year. 7. The Beaſt falleth in the deſtruction of the little Horn, verſ. 11. but the Kingdom of the Seleucidae did not fall in Antiochus Epiphanes.

7 Becauſe it is extended untill the coming of Chriſt in the clouds of heaven, verſ. 13, 14. which is his ſecond coming, Apoc. 1.7. Mat. 24.30. & 26.64. for it is not ſaid that hee aſcended in the Clouds, but that he came, ver. 13.

8 It is extended to the time when all the Kingdoms of the earth ſhall be the Lords, and his Chriſts, ver. 14. with Apoc. 11.15. And when the Kingdom ſhall be given to the Saints of the moſt high, all Hoſtile forces utterly ſuppreſſed, ver. 14.26. ch. 2.44. Apoc. 11.17, 18. And how can this bee verified in the Kingdome of the Seleucidae?

Upon theſe grounds it appears, That the aforeſaid opinion will no way agree to Daniels Prophecy of the four Beaſts, and the little Horn.

Thirdly, For Daniels Great Prophecy, ch. 10. chap. 11. chap. 12. this opinion of Antiochus Epiphanes cannot agree to it.

1 Becauſe the feet and toes of the great Image, chap. 2. The little Horn. chap. 7. and the vile Perſon in this Prophecy, chap. 11.21. are (as before I have obſerved) one and the ſame; but the two firſt, as hath been already proved, cannot agree to Antiochus Epiphanes, therefore not this laſt.

2 Becauſe this Prophecy brings us to the time of the end, chap. 11.35. ſome of them of underſtanding ſhall fall to try them, even to the time of the end, verſ. 40. At the time of the end ſhall the King of the South puſh at him, chap. 12.4. Seal the Book even to the time of the end, verſ. 9. yea to the very end of days, when Daniel was to riſe and ſtand in his lot. But go thy way till the end be, for thou ſhalt reſt, and ſtand in thy lot at the end of days. But this cannot agree to Antiochus Epiphanes, whoſe Kingdom expired many years before Chriſts firſt coming; Nor did Daniel ariſe and ſtand in his lot at the end of thoſe days, viz. the days of his Perſecution, which yet is promiſed to Daniel at the end of the days here ſpoken of. Further, this Prophecy is ſaid to be for many days, Chap. 10. ver. 14. I am come to make thee underſtand what ſhall befall thy people in the latter days; for yet the Viſion is for many days. For a long time, chap. 10.1. in the third year of Cyrus a thing was revealed to Daniel, and the thing was true, but the time appointed was long. Now it is not ordinary in Scripture Phraſe (a thouſand years with God being but as a day) to call ſo ſhort a time as was the time betwixt Daniel and Antiochus Epiphanes many days, a long time.

3 Becauſe he who appears to Daniel, Chap. 10.5, 6. Chap. 12.7. being the ſame who appeared to John, Revel. 10.5, 6. and alſo the time, times and a half, Dan. 12.7. being a time peculiar to the Gentile Saints, Revel. 12.14. it thence follows, that this Prophecy is to be brought down into the Apocalypticall times, and therefore could not have its fulfilling in the days of Antiochus Epiphanes.

To theſe let me adde ſome few of the very many Arguments (all which would be tedious here to repeat) that are laid down by Mr. Parker in his Daniels Viſions, and Prophecies expounded, p. 91. to 97. and again, p. 111. to p. 116. in oppoſition to this opinion.

1 How (ſaith hee) was Antiochus Epiphanes a vile Perſon, to whom they gave not the honour of the Kingdom? ſeeing he was the lawfull Son of Antiochus Magnus, who (to uſe the words of Graſerus) was ſo great even from his Infancy, that then in the world known unto us, there was ſcarce another to be compared with him.

2 I require (ſaith he) a ſufficient reaſon, if this be Antiochus Epiphanes, why as many, or rather more words ſhould be ſpent upon him, then were ſpent upon all the Kings of Syria, and Aegypt before him, whereof ſome were farre more notable in exploits then he? If any ſay that it is ſo becauſe he was more notable in afflicting the Saints; I ſtill demand, But why are ſo many words ſpent upon theſe Warlike exploits, that concerned not the Church? Beſides, others before afflicted the Jewiſh Church not alittle, and yet their afflictions are not here mentioned. If his perſecution did exceed, yet why ſhould the deſcription thereof exceed ſo much, being but ſhort in duration, and not to be compared with thoſe of Nebuchadnezzar precedent, or thoſe of the Romans in the time following? But if it bee ſaid, The reaſon is becauſe Antiochus is deſcribed as the type of Antichriſt; I anſwer again; That the Type howſoever muſt be according to truth, and the words of deſcription anſwerable to the things contained therein; the Holy Ghoſt would not repreſent Antichriſt by a type exceſſively, deſcribed above the verity and proportion thereof.

3 He proves at large, that the Warres of this King, and the ſeverall expreſſions the holy Ghoſt uſeth in deſcribing them, verſ. 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29, 30, 31, 32. cannot be applied to Antiochus Epiphanes, p. 93, 94, 95.

4 What ſhould I ſpeak (ſaith he) of the great afflictions of the Church by ſword, flame, captivity, and ſpoyl, and that for many days, ver. 33. at certain guſts ſucceeding after interruptions? The Church now and then riſing, and prevailing, verſ. 32, 33, 34. and then at certain fatall revolutions, ſet by God, expoſed again to fire and ſword, verſ. 35. How can theſe paſſages bee exhauſted in the narrow and ſhort perſecutions of Antiochus?

5 That Phraſe, ver. 36. He ſhall do what hee liſts, is uſually applied to irreſiſtable and uncontroulable Monarchs, verſ. 3.16. Chap. 8.4. and cannot be applied to Antiochus, over whom the Romans were ſo imperious, that at the threatning look and command of the Ambaſſador Popilius, he was forced to retire out of Aegypt, and leave his prey. Adde to this, That he was inwrapped with many difficulties at home.

Laſtly, Our aforeſaid Author proveth largely, p. 112, 113, &c. that thoſe Characters, ver. 37, 38, 39. as, He ſhall not regard the God of his Fathers, neither ſhall he regard the deſire of Women; neither ſhall he regard any God, but ſhall magnifie himſelf above all; He ſhall honour a God whom his Fathers knew not, and a ſtrange God; he ſhall divide the Land for gain; are not any one of them appliable to Antiochus Epiphanes; which things who deſires to ſee I refer him to the Author, as judging what I have already ſaid enough, if it be not of ſome thought more then enough.

From the whole it appears, That the aforeſaid opinion of the little Horn neither doth, nor will agree to Daniels great Prophecy.

Fourthly and laſtly, For the Prophecy it ſelf, Chap. 8. This opinion of Antiochus doth no way agree to it.

Take here likewiſe ſome of Mr. Parkers Arguments in anſwer to it. Daniels Viſions and Prophecies expounded, p. 36, 37.

1 This little Horn riſeth when the tranſgreſſors are come to the full, and in the end of the Graecian Empire, chap. 8.23. whereas Antiochus was in the midſt, and far from the time of the great and full degree of tranſgreſſors.

2 The Horn here ſpoken of is in reſpect of his beginnings called a little Horn, whereas Antiochus was not ſo low at firſt as to be called a little Horn; for Antiochus in reſpect of his Parentage, and condition of Fortune which he had thereby, was ſo great, even from his infancy, that then in the world there was ſcarce another to bee compared with him, being the undoubted Son of Antiochus the Great, and after Seleucus Philopater his elder Brother, right Heir of the Kingdoms of Aſia, Babylon, and Syria.

3 This Horn is ſaid to wax very great in compariſon of the former Horns, verſ. 9. whereas Antiochus although he was great from his beginning, yet did not attain unto a condition greater then his Fathers; Concerning which let the words of Graſerus be obſerved: He (ſaith he) never had full poſſeſſion of the whole Kingdom of his Father Antiochus the Great, which hee poſſeſſed before the Roman War; the ſinews of War alſo failed him not once. And as for that which Junius alledgeth concerning his taking of Aegypt, if that were true, yet would it little help his cauſe, ſeeing it is manifeſt that his Father Antiochus did not leſs exploits againſt AEgypt. Indeed Antiochus Epiphanes did the ſecond time invade Aegypt, but with ſuch a ſucceſſe that he got more diſhonour then honour thereby. Neither in other Wars was he ſo happy and fortunate, that therein he might be ſo farre preferred above his Anceſtors. In ſum, Antiochus Epiphanes had little or nothing more then the meaner ſort of the Kings of Syria.

4 How did Antiochus Epiphanes ſo excellently magnifie himſelf unto the South, and to the Eaſt, and to the pleaſant land? How unto the Eaſt, foraſmuch as he was ignominiouſly put to flight, and expelled out of Perſia in the Eaſt, by the Citizens of Elemais? How againſt the South, ſeeing in both his expeditions againſt Aegypt, he was at laſt ſhamefully repulſed; the firſt time by the Captains of Ptolomeus, the ſecond time by the Ambaſſador Popilius? And how unto the pleaſant Land, foraſmuch as after his inteſtine cruelty on the Jews, his Princes and Armies were in Judea over-thrown, and put to flight by the Jews, and their Captain Judas Maccabaeus.

5 The Acts of this little Horn are extended to the time of the end, verſ. 17. and of the laſt wrath, verſ. 19. whereas Antiochus Epiphanes dyed long before the birth of Chriſt.

6 In the judgement (ſaith he) of a learned Author, the two thouſand three hundred days are unappliable to Antiochus Epiphanes. And Pererius ſheweth (ſaith my Author) out of the firſt Book of Maccabees, that Antiochus his Perſecutions began in the year of the Grecian Kingdom one hundred forty three, and ended in the year one hundred forty eight, which could not be longer then ſix full years; and therefore it cannot fill up exactly the meaſure of two thouſand three hundred days, which ſpace containeth ſix years, three months, and twenty days; for the three months, and twenty days, would over-abound; Pererius to ſalve this difficulty, ſaith, That the two thouſand three hundred years may be extended to the death of Antiochus, which was in the next year following; but according to Daniels words, and the drift of the interpretation of the Authors of this opinion, the aforeſaid two thouſand three hundred years muſt not end in the death of Antiochus (although if they ſhould, yet the difficulty of exact accommodation will ſtill remain) but in the ceſſation of perſecution and calamity of the Church, and in the purgation of the Sanctuary, verſ. 13, 14. which being referred to the Iews in the time of Antiochus, came to paſſe exactly in the year of the Greek Empire one hundred forty eight, as hath been ſaid, and cannot be extended to the year following; therefore are not the two thouſand three hundred days appliable to this time; yet becauſe I finde ſome of our own, who confeſſe Daniels other Prophecies to have a look to the end of the Fourth Monarchy, ſomewhat doubting of this, which therefore according to the common opinion they would make to terminate with Antiochus Epiphanes. Let me therefore adde a reaſon or two farther to thoſe already laid down by Mr. Parker.

7 The time of the end here mentioned, verſ. 17. and the Inſt end of indignation, verſ. 19. are undoubtedly of the ſame interpretation, with the time of the end ſo oft ſpoken of, Chap. 11.35, 40. Chap. 12.4, 9, 13. and the accompliſhment of indignation, Ch. 11.36. which beſides the wonderfull agreements of either King in their deſcription, of which for a taſte compare theſe paſſages.

CHAP. 8. CHAP. 11. Verſ. 12. An Hoſt was given him againſt the daily Saerifice. Verſ. 31. And Armies ſhall stand on his part. Verſ. 11. By him the daily Sacrifice was taken away, and the place of his Sanctuary caſt down. Verſ. 31. And they ſhall pollute the Sanctuary of ſtrength, and ſhall take away the daily Sacrifice. Verſ. 25. Through policy ſhall he cauſe craft to proſper in his hand, and by peace ſhall deſtroy many. Verſ. 23. After the League made with him, he ſhall work deceitfully.   Verſ. 24. He ſhall enter peaceably into the fatteſt places of the Province. Verſ. 12, It caſt down the truth to the ground, and it practiſed and proſpered. Verſ. 36. Hee ſhall ſpeak marvellous things againſt the God of gods, and ſhall proſper. Verſ. 24. Hee ſhall deſtroy the mighty, and the holy people. Verſ. 32, 33. The people that know their God ſhall be ſtrong, and do exploits, yet they ſhall fall by the ſword, and by flame; by captivity, and by ſpoyl many days. Verſ. 25. Hee ſhall magnifie himſelf in his heart. Verſ. 37. Hee ſhall magnify himſelf above all. Verſ. 25. Hee ſhall alſo ſtand up againſt the Prince of Princes, but he ſhall be broken without hand. Verſ. 45. compared with chap. 12.7. He ſhall come to his end and none shall help him; and at that time shall Michael ſtand up.

I ſay beſides all theſe agreements, the inculcating that Phraſe in either Prophecy, as the bounds and limits of the tyranny of either King, at the time appointed shall the end be, chap. 8.19. So ch. 11.27. The end shall be at the time appointed, verſ. 35. The time of the end, becauſe it is yet for a time appointed, is to me a clear Argument, that either Prophecy terminates at one and the ſame point. Now the point of time that Daniels Prophecy in the eleventh and twelfth Chapters terminates at, being not the end of Antiochus rage, but of the Fourth Monarchy; therefore not Antiochus rage, but the end of the Fourth Monarchy is alſo the point of time with which the Prophecy, chap. 8. doth likewiſe terminate.

8 Daniel is commanded to shut up the Viſion, becauſe it was to be for many days, verſ. 26. But as it is not likely, that the Angel would have commanded Daniel to ſhut up the Viſion, but rather have given a contrary command, as to Iohn, Rev. 22.10. Seal not the ſayings of the Prophecy of this Book, for the time is at hand; in caſe the fulfilling of it had been ſo near as the times of Antiochus Epiphanes; ſo cannot two thouſand three hundred Natural days, no nor the whole of the time from the day Daniel had this Viſion, to the utmoſt point of Antiochus rage, be called in the Phraſe of the Holy Ghoſt, who (as I have ſaid before) calls a long time ſhort, many days.

The concluſion from the whole, is, That that opinion which makes application of this Prophecy, chap. 8. to Antiochus Epiphanes, interpreting the two thouſand three hundred years of the time of his rage againſt the Jews, neither doth nor will agree to any one of Daniels four Prophecies.

SECT. 2.

ERe I proceed, I ſhall here by way of digreſſion lay down my own thoughts concerning the little Horn, chap. 8, 9. upon whom the whole ſtreſſe of the Controverſie lies.

All thoſe that I have ſeen, who differ from the common opinion of Antiochus Epiphanes, will have this little Horn to be the very ſame with that Chap. 7. and accordingly ſome apply it to the Romiſh Antichriſt, ſome to Mahomet, ſome to the Norman Race, &c. The two laſt opinions of Mahomet, and the Norman Race, I have diſproved before, and that throughout all the Propheſies of Daniel. The firſt which interprets it of the Romiſh Antichriſt is the moſt colourable, becauſe its clear the little Horn, Chap. 7. is to be underſtood of him, and alſo a large and full deſcription of Antichriſt comes under this little Horn. To this therefore onely I ſhall here oppoſe, and that by laying down my own opinion, which is,

That the little Horn, Chap. 8. is not Antichrists Kingdome only, but the whole body of the fourth, or Roman Monarchy, which is clear,

1 Becauſe in each of Daniels other Propheſies we have the Roman Monarchy ſet forth in its twofold eſtate. 1 In its pure Civil ſtate. 2 In its, mixt Antichristian ſtate, as I have before proved, Part. 2. Chap. 4. Sect. 2. But if the little Horn in this Chapter ſignifie Antichrists Kingdome only, then in this Propheſie we have the Roman Monarchy deſcribed only in its ſecond ſtate, and ſo this Propheſie is made to differ from the other three; Yea by conſequence many hundred years.

2 Becauſe the riſe of this little Horn in the latter time of the Grecian Monarchy ſhould here be leaped over, which is not in any of the other Propheſies, verſ. 23. And in the latter time of their Kingdome, a King of fierce countenance ſhall ſtand up. What Kingdome is this? Anſw. The Kingdome of the Greeks ſpoken of verſ. 22. which after Alexanders death was broken and divided into four Kingdomes. This no wayes agrees to Antichriſt, whoſe riſe was not till many hundred years after the diſſolution of the third or Grecian Monarchy, but it punctually agrees to the Roman Monarchy, which had its riſe (according to the very words) in the latter time of the divided Grecian Monarchy.

3 Becauſe the riſe of this little Horn is out of one of the four Horns of the Grecian Monarchy, verſ. 9. And out of one of them (i. e. of the four Horns, verſ. 8.) came forth a little Horn. This cannot be applied to Antichriſt who roſe out of the Roman Monarchy, not the Grecian. But it agrees well to the Roman Monarchy, which conſider it as it was a Monarchy in the account of the Holy Ghoſt here in Daniel; for by the way obſerve this Rule, That the Holy Ghoſt accounts none of the Kingdomes ſucceeding one another to be Monarchies, till they had ſwallowed up the whole, or ſome conſiderable part of the foregoing Monarchy; therefore though Cyrus before the taking of Babylon had obtained great Conqueſts, yet his Monarchy in Daniels ſenſe begins thence. Alexander likewiſe had done great exploits before he encountred Darius, yet his Monarchy begins from his overthrow of him. In like manner, we are to reckon the beginning of the Roman Monarchy, from that time when it firſt began to bring under the Grecian Monarchy, which was when it did ſubdue to it ſelf the Kingdome of Macedon (one of the four Horns, into which the Grecian Kingdome after Alexanders death was divided) when the Macedonian Kingdome (which formerly had been the Seat of the third Monarchy) was turned into a Roman Province, then began the Roman Monarchy, from which time the ſame did daily increaſe till in the end by degrees one after another, it ſwallowed up the other Horns alſo.

Now obſerve the Roman Monarchy may well be ſaid to riſe out of one of the four Horns of the Grecian Monarchy in regard that that Kingdome, which in the account of the Holy Ghoſt before was no Monarchy by ſwallowing up the kingdome of Macedon (the Seat of the former Monarchy) now takes place of it, and becomes a Monarchy; and therefore many make obſervation of that remarkable Ecclipſe of the Moon, which was total, and happened the night before that fatal overthrow of Perſius by Aemylius the Roman Conſul, through which the Macedonian kingdome was loſt, as a Prognoſtication of this wonderful change.

4 Becauſe this Horn in its firſt riſe was a little Horn, which fitly agrees to the Roman Monarchy, conſider it either, firſt as it became a Monarchy (as I ſaid even now) by ſubduing to it ſelf the Kingdome of Macedon, which (though it had been the ancient Seat of the third Monarchy, yet) comparatively with ſome other of the four Horns in the Greek Empire (viz. the Kingdomes of Egypt and Syria, which were more potent then that of Macedon) it was but a little Horn.

Or ſecondly, if we conſider the manner of the Romans growth as they were a Monarchy, which was different from the growth of all the former Monarchies; For the former Monarchies had their perfection in a manner the firſt day they became Monarchies; but the Roman Monarchy is a Monarchy whilſt yet it is little and more imperfect, and afterwards by a gradual growth through continuance of time it attains perfection. Cyrus ſwallows up the Babylonian Monarchy, Alexander the Medes and Perſians, as it were at a mouthfull, and in ſo doing, theſe Monarchies are at the top, arrive to their perfect ſtature the firſt day of their birth: But the Roman Monarchy otherwiſe, it comes creeping on (as 'twere unſeen) and by little and little encroacheth upon the Grecian Monarchy, till in the end it hath devoured all.

Firſt, it ſwallows up the little Kingdome of Macedon; by this it becomes a Monarchy; then about a hundred yeers after, it ſwallows up the Kingdome of Syria, and makes a Province of that; then ſometime after the Kingdome of Egypt, then Paleſtina, and the Countries adjacent, making them Provinces, and ſo by degrees it ſwallows up the whole Grecian Monarchy; ſo that indeed we may ſay the Roman Monarchy comparatively, with what it grew to through continuance of time, was in its firſt birth but an Infant, and therefore is well called a little Horn.

This gradual growth of the Roman Monarchy (take it in its firſt, or ſecond ſtate, for herein one anſwers to the other, the growth of both is gradual) is livelily ſet forth by the terme Waxing, it waxed great towards the South, &c, and it waxed great, even to the hoſt of Heaven, verſ. 10. which word notes a gradual increaſe, whereas the growth of the other Monarchies was (as I have ſaid) ſudden.

Furthermore, whereas this waxing great of this little Horn in its firſt ſtate is ſaid to be TOWARDS the South, and TOWARDS the Eaſt, and TOWARDS the pleaſant Land, it excellently ſets forth the exploits of the Romans after they had ſubdued the Macedonian Kingdome; For hereupon they aſſault the Kingdomes of Syria and Egypt, whereof one lay towards the Eaſt of Macedon, or if you will rather of Rome or Italy, the other the South; and withall they invade Paleſtina, the Land of Canaan, which is here called the pleaſant Land. So that in a word, a more accurate deſcription of the firſt riſe, and growth of the Roman Monarchy (according to what Hiſtories record hereof) cannot be given, then is here in this Viſion of Daniel laid down in but a Line or two.

5 Becauſe this Horn though little in its firſt riſe, yet doth it in time wax exceeding great, verſ. 9. greater then any of the Kingdomes that had been before it, exceeding them all, which agrees not to Antichriſts Kingdome, but exactly to what we have of the fourth Monarchy, Dan. 2.40. Chap. 7.7.

6 Becauſe the twofold waxing great of this little Horn, excellently ſets forth the twofold ſtate of the Roman Monarchy. 1 As a Civil ſtate onely, in which ſtate it ſubdues Nations to it ſelf, and particularly the Land of Canaan; it waxed exceeding great towards the South, and towards the Eaſt, and towards the pleaſant land. 2 As a Mixt ſtate, or a Civil and Eccleſiaſtical ſtate both, in which period the great thing it doth, is, to make war with the Saints, and tread underfoot the Holy City, verſ. 10. And it waxed great even to the hoſt of Heaven, and it caſt down ſome of the hoſt, and of the ſtars to the ground, and ſtamped upon them. To this twofold waxing great doth moſt excellently agree that double title given afterwards to this fourth King, verſ. 23. 1 A King of fierce countenance, ſuch is the fourth Kingdome, Dan. 2.40. and the fourth Beaſt, Dan. 7.7. 2 Underſtanding dark ſentences, ſuch is the Roman Monarchy, at leaſt pretending to abundance of wiſdome, learning, and high ſpeculations in its ſecond ſtate under Antichriſt.

This twofold waxing great, and this double title, will agree to no opinion (neither to that of Antiochus, nor that of Mahomet, nor that of the Romiſh Antichriſt, nor that of Charles Stuart, or the Norman Race in general) as it doth to this.

I conclude, therefore that the little Horn here mentioned, is the whole body of the fourth Monarchy, and not the ſame in its ſecond ſtate only.

Now the Roman Monarchy is here called the little Horn, the name before given to Antichriſt, Chap. 7. for one, or both theſe Reaſons.

1 Becauſe there is a likelihood in their riſe. The Roman Monarchy (as I have ſaid) when it firſt began to creep up, was but little, and therefore Daniel, Chap. 7.7. beholds the fourth Beaſt creeping up in the night viſions, i.e. this Beaſt was obſcure, and in a manner unſeen at firſt, none dreamed he would grow ſo terrible a Beaſt, ſuch was Antichriſt, and for this reaſon called the little Horn Chap. 7. Or

2 Becauſe Antichriſt in the laſt dayes was to weild the Scepter in this Monarchy, and the ſequel of the Propheſie was to go on chiefly upon him: And hence obſerve, we have in the Viſion and explication both, onely a word (as it were to bring on the other) of the Civil ſtate of the fourth Monarchy, the main of the Propheſie looking to its Antichriſtian ſtate. Now as this is (I ſuppoſe) the very cauſe and ground of their miſtake who interpret all this of Antichriſts Kingdome onely; ſo may it be the reaſon, why the name proper to Antichriſt, ſhould here be given to the whole Monarchy, becauſe his Kingdome being a part of that Monarchy, was the thing chiefly in the following Diſcourſe to be inſiſted on.

What I have ſaid confirms our former opinion, that this Propheſie belongs not to Antiochus Epiphanes, but another thing; and conſequently the two thouſand and three hundred dayes are not to be underſtood of Natural dayes, but Prophetical.

SECT. 3.

Having already proved that the two thouſand three hundred dayes cannot be natural dayes, but muſt be Prophetical; In the next place, a Queſtion will ariſe, whether by the two thouſand three hundred dayes we are to underſtand ſo many dayes or years compleat?

A very worthy and learned Author, reading, according to the Hebrew, two thouſand and three hundred mornings and evenings, which make but half ſo many compleat dayes, will have but half ſo many dayes (at moſt) viz. one thouſand, one hundred and fifty, to he here accounted upon.

But to this opinion I muſt give my diſſent.

1 Becauſe this way of computing by morning and evening a part, is no where elſe found in all the Prophets.

2 Becauſe its the ordinary Scripture-phraſe to put morning and evening for one day, Gen. 1.5. the evening and the morning were the firſt day, verſ. 8. the evening and the morning were the ſecond day, verſ. 13.19.23.31. And therefore its more conſonant to Scripture-phraſe to conceive that the Holy Ghoſt by two thouſand and three hundred mornings and evenings, doth intend ſo many compleat dayes, then that he ſhould mean onely ſo many mornings and evenings, which make but half the number of dayes.

3 Becauſe by this Computation the very Propheſie it ſelf becomes uſeleſs to us, who cannot from it make up any account; For untill ſome Head is found out where we are to begin, there can be no ſupputation of years. Now I ask, (if the two thouſand and three hundred years are to be underſtood of but half ſo many years, viz. one thouſand, one hundred and fifty) Where are we to begin them? If we begin from the time Daniel had his Viſion, how will one thouſand, one hundred and fifty years bring us thence to the time of the end, when as two thouſand and two hundred years and upwards are paſſed already ſince that time, and yet the end is not.

If we ſhall begin lower (as we muſt by above a thouſand years) let the head of our account be ſhewed in the Text. Daniel in all his other myſtical Numbers hath ſtill ſome clear head of account laid down: His ſeventy weeks have for their Head the going forth of the Commandement to reſtore and build Jeruſalem, Dan. 9.25. His one thouſand two hundred and ninety, and his one thouſand three hundred thirty and five, have for their Head the taking away of the daily ſacrifice, and ſetting up of the abomination that maketh deſolate, Dan. 12.11, 12. Now let a Head of account be ſhewed in the Text for this. If it be ſaid, It is implied, though not expreſſed, verſ. 13. to be the taking away of the daily ſacrifice, trampling the Sanctuary, and Hoſt underfoot. Anſ. If this be the Head of account, then muſt the Head of this account, and the Head of the one thouſand three hundred thirty and five dayes, Chap. 12. be one and the ſame; for that is the taking away of the daily ſacrifice. And if ſo, then let a ſufficient reaſon be given to reconcile theſe places, why the account there (which begins with this) ſhould have one hundred eighty and five dayes or years more in it, then this here; for who reckons ſhall find the one thouſand three hundred thirty five to have in it ſo many years more then one thouſand, one hundred and fifty, eſpecially conſidering too that the one thouſand two hundred and thirty dayes, and the one thouſand three hundred thirty five dayes, do both end in the full reſtauration of the Church, and through-cleanſing of the Sanctuary, as is clear from the ſcope of either Propheſie. If it be ſaid, ſome other taking away of the daily ſacrifice is here to be ſought for as Head to this Number, then that which was in Julians dayes. Anſ. Grant it, yet muſt the time when this was done, be ſo ſtated as that the one thouſand one hundred and fifty years may concur in their end with the one thouſand three hundred thirty and five years; For the Propheſie Chap. 8. and that Chap. 12. bring us both to one and the ſame point, viz. the laſt, moſt full, and glorious reſtitution of the Church, where either number muſt expire. This taken into conſideration, I ſay no more; Let the time be ſtated.

4 Becauſe we have a ſpecial mark ſet upon this Number of two thouſand and three hundred dayes (which is not upon any other number in all Daniel, or the Revelations) to give us to underſtand that the time ſhall be long, v. 26. And the Viſion of the evening and morning (i.e. of the two thouſand and three hundred dayes, verſ. 14. ſet forth by ſo many evenings and mornings) which was told, is true; wherefore ſhut thou up the Viſion, for it (i.e. the Viſion of the evening and morning, which as it was the laſt thing in the Viſion, ſo is it here in the Interpretation) ſhall be for many dayes.

Now obſerve, the like is not ſaid of any other myſtical Number, neither of the two and forty months, nor of the one thouſand two hundred and ſixty dayes, nor of the one thouſand two hundred and ninety, the one thouſand three hundred thirty and five, that it ſhould be for many dayes. Indeed Daniels laſt Viſion, which contains in it his one thouſand two hundred and ninety dayes, hath this ſaid of it, It ſhall be for many dayes Chapt. 10.14. but let it be noted, that theſe words have not reference to the one thouſand two hundred and ninety, the one thouſand three hundred thirty and five dayes afterwards ſpoken off, but rather to the time of the Viſion it ſelf, which was in the third year of Cyrus King of Perſia, Chap. 10.1. and this was neer a thouſand years higher then the Head of the one thouſand two hundred and ninety, the one thouſand three hundred thirty and five dayes; and therefore well may the Viſion it ſelf, which contains the one thouſand three hundred thirty and five years, and over and above almoſt a thouſand more, (not full forty wanting of the number) be called a Viſion for many dayes or years. But now let it be ſhewed of any other number (beſides this of the two thouſand and three hundred) where we have any ſuch mark ſet upon the number it ſelf, That it ſhould be for many dayes, as we have expreſly here the mark ſet upon the number it ſelf, The Viſion of the evening and and morning (or the two thouſand and three hundred mornings and evenings) is true; therefore ſhut it up, for it ſhall be for many dayes.

Now certainly we can from hence learn nothing leſſe then that the two thouſand and three hundred is a larger Epock then either the one thouſand two hundred and ſixty, the one thouſand two hundred and ninety, or the one thouſand three hundred thirty and five (which are the largeſt beſides it that we read of) for neither of them doth the Lord himſelf (with whom a thouſand years is as a day) count long, or ſet a mark upon, that we ſhould account them ſo; but this the Holy Ghoſt hath noted down as a long time, and marked it out that we might ſo look upon it; but now according to the foregoing account which reckons onely one thouſand one hundred and fifty years, it ſhould be a hundred and ten yeers ſhorter then the leaſt, and ſhorteſt of theſe; which how it will agree to this note here left us by the Holy Ghoſt, to give us ſpecial light and direction in things, I do not ſee.

Laſtly, I ſhall ſay no more; The Labyrinth, the worthy Author of this opinion ſeems to be in, not knowing whether he may reckon one morning and one evening for a day, and ſo of two thouſand three hundred mornings and evenings, make one thouſand one hundred and fifty dayes or years; or whether he ſhould reckon two evenings and two mornings for one day, ſo numbring the dayes and years (which he alſo doth, making two divers reckonings) according to the fourth part of the two thouſand three hundred evenings and mornings, which makes five hundred ſeventy five dayes or years; appears to me to be confutation ſufficient of that opinion; which ſhould we follow it, yet concludes nothing certain.

The Concluſion then is, That by the two thouſand three hundred dayes, we are to underſtand two thouſand three hundred dayes or years compleat.

SECT. 4.

It being clear that the two thouſand three hundred dayes are Prophetical dayes, and alſo to be underſtood of ſo many Prophetical dayes compleat; Our next Queſtion is, where we are to begin this large Epock?

A late Writer would have the beginning of this number to be fixed with the beginning of the ſeventy years captivity in Babylon.

But this opinion I cannot receive.

1 Becauſe it is contrary to all the Prophetical numbers of Daniel and the Revelations, to go from the time of the Viſion backwards for a beginning.

2 Becauſe this beginning neither doth, nor can make the two thouſand three hundred dayes to concur in their end with the one thouſand three hundred thirty and five, unleſſe ſome other Head be found for that number; which Head muſt be ſuch too, as will bring the one thouſand two hundred and ninety dayes, which ariſeth from the ſame Head with the one thouſand three hundred thirty and five, to concur alſo in their end with the one thouſand two hundred and ſixty, which concurrence of numbers muſt be upon the grounds laid down in my Key, Theſi 17. and Theſi 34.

3 Becauſe this beginning exceeds the bounds of the Propheſie it ſelf.

Queſt. But where then are we to begin?

Anſw. With the beginning of the Perſian Monarchy, viz. in that year the Scripture calls the firſt of Cyrus; and that for theſe two Reaſons;

1 Becauſe the Propheſie it ſelf, which begins with the beginning of the Perſian Monarchy (as compare verſ. 3.4. with verſ. 20.) warrants this before any other.

2 Becauſe this beginning fitly agrees as to the ſcope of the Propheſie, ſo alſo to the time when Daniel ſaw this Viſion.

The time of the Viſion bears date the third year of the Reign of King Belſhazzar, verſ. 1.

This year was the laſt year of the Babylonian Monarchy; and to go ſtrictly to the time of the Viſion, it was in the latter part of the year, after Babylon was taken, Belſhazzar ſlain, and the Babylonian Monarchy tranſlated to the Medes and Perſians; as the learned and judicious Dr. Lightfoot in his Harmony of the Old Teſtament upon Daniel the eighth hath clearly proved; his words are theſe; The firſt and ſecond verſes of this Chapter plainly ſhew that Belſhazzar reigned but three years; for it telleth that in the third of Belſhazzar, Daniel was in Shuſan, the Royal City of Perſia. It cannot be imagined, he was there in Belſhazzars life time, for his preferment and reſidence was in Babylon, till Babylon fell; but his coming thither, was by the tranſporting of him thither by the Perſian Monarch, after he had conquered Babylon, who as it appeareth by verſ. 27. had preferred him there, and intereſſed him in the Kings employment. This (ſaith he) is called the third year of Belſhazzar, purpoſely that we might learn to give the firſt year of Cyrus its proper Date, i. e. reckon the firſt year of Cyrus and Darius, not the year that Babylon fell, but the year after; and partly that we may obſerve how that in the very year the Medes and Perſians deſtroy Babel, the Lord revealeth to Daniel the deſtruction of the Medes and Perſians, and the Monarchies after them. Hitherto Dr. Lightfoot.

Give me leave to adde, as a farther explication, That that Kings buſineſſe, which verſ. 27. Daniel is ſaid to do, is no way likely to be Belſhazzar, who neither knew Daniel, nor had Daniel to do with him, as the words, Chap. 5. verſ. 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16. ſeem to import; but very likely to be Darius, who upon the taking of Babylon ſet Preſidents over the Kingdome, or Empire, of which Daniel was firſt, Chap. 6.1, 2. And by reaſon of the nature of his employment, it was meet his abode ſhould be in the Royal City of the Empire where he might better attend it then he could elſewhere. Now this was not Babylon, but Shuſhan, as appears, Eſther 1.2. where therefore Daniel now was, not Viſionally (as ſay ſome) but really and perſonally, as is clear from verſ. 2. And I ſaw in a Viſion (and it came to paſſe when I ſaw, that I was at Shuſhan in the Palace, which is in the Province of Elam) and I ſaw in a Viſion, and I was by the River of Ulai.

Had Daniel been in the place here mentioned Viſionally only, he would never have ſpoken of two places; for Viſionally how could he ſee himſelf at Shuſhan, in the Palace, and alſo by the River of Ulai at the ſame time, beholding the ſame Viſion; the meaning therefore undoubtedly is, Daniel by vertue of his reſidence at the time he ſaw this Viſion, was at Shuſhan in the Palace; but locally he was either walking abroad to pray, meditate, refreſh himſelf, &c. by the River of Ulai; as when he ſaw his great Viſion, Chap. 10. he was by the River Hiddekel, verſ. 4. and this not Viſionally, but really, for he had company with him, verſ. 7.8. ſo was Daniel at this time really and perſonally by a River called Ulai, neer adjoyning (in all probability) to Shuſhan the Palace, where he ſaw this Viſion. Now what made Daniel there, if at the time of this Viſion Babylon were not taken? It muſt therefore be that Babylon was now taken, and the Monarchy tranſlated, although the Viſion bears date (for the reaſons given by Dr. Lightfoot) the third of Belſhazzar.

Now it being ſo that Belſhazzars third was the laſt yeer of the Babylon an Monarchy, and conſequently Cyrus firſt, the very next year, our beginning of the two thouſand and three hundred dayes, agrees moſt fitly to the time of the Viſion; for obſerve the third of Belſhazzar being the current year, its neceſſary therefore that we do not bring that into our account, but let it fall: The very firſt year therefore that we either may, or can begin our account upon, is Cyrus firſt, which begun with the beginning of the following year; and therefore to begin the two thouſand three hundred dayes, with the firſt of Cyrus, agrees moſt excellently both to the matter, and the time of the Viſion. This therefore I conclude to be the only true beginning.

SECT. 5.

But ere I can proceed farther, one thing there is ſomewhat needful to be enquired into, viz. Whether or no is the ſecond Monarchy to take its beginning (as I have ſaid) from the firſt year of Cyrus the Perſian; or whether had it not its beginning ſome years before under Darius the Mede? The ground of this Queſtion is becauſe Daniel makes mention of one Darius the Median taking the Babylonian Monarchy from Belſhazzer, Dan. 5.30, 31. and alſo ſpeaks of him as a perſon diſtinct from Cyrus, Dan. 6.28.

Some to ſalve this difficulty, will have this Darius the Mede to be King of the Babylonians not by Conqueſt, but by Election: And their conjecture upon this buſineſſe runs thus. That King Belſhazzar was ſlain the night after his great Feaſt, by a conſpiracy of thoſe of his friends that he called to his Banquet; amongſt theſe conſpirators this Darius the Mede was one, who being a man ancient, wiſe, and of great authority among the Babylonians, they (though he were a Mede and a ſtranger, yet) to avoid contentions for the Kingdome (Nebuchadnezzars Line being ended in Belſhazzar) confer it on him. Thoſe of this opinion give to this Darius the Mede, ſome ſeventeen, ſome eighteen yeers.

Now although this opinion (as laid down by the Authors of it) hurt not us greatly, becauſe the time they allow to this Darius the Mede, they give to the Babylonian Monarchy, (reckoning the ſeventeen years of his Reign into the ſeventy of the Captivity) and not to the Perſian, which they with one mouth confeſſe began with the firſt of Cyrus, who (ſay they) took the Babylonian Monarchy not from Belſhazzar, but from this Darius the Mede; yet becauſe if once we grant it, that the Reign of this Darius the Mede was diſtinct in regard of time from the Reign of Cyrus the Perſian, there will be then force enough in Daniel to beat us, yea and all Chronologers off their ground, while they account the firſt year of Cyrus to be the firſt year of the Perſian Monarchy; I ſhall not therefore let the opinion paſſe by without an examination.

And although it were enough to deſtroy the credit of it, to ſay, That the whole of the ſtory this opinion is founded upon, is but pure conjecture, there being not one tittle in the whole Scripture to bring us to the belief of ſuch a thing; yet ſhall I not inſiſt upon that, but rather prove how that this opinion doth not onely want Scripture warrant, but manifeſtly fights with the Scripture. For it is moſt evident from Daniel, that Darius the Mede there mentioned, did Reign in the beginning of the Perſian Monarchy, and not (as ſaith this Opinion) in the end of the Babylonian.

The Reaſons of this are:

1 Becauſe Daniel (as I have proved before) was in that very year which is called Belſhazzars third, in Shuſhan, the Royal City of Perſia: Now what made Daniel there, if in this very year the Monarchy were not tranſlated? if the Monarchy were now tranſlated, where ſhall we find room for the ſeventeen or eighteen yeers of its continuance afterwards?

It may be ſaid Daniel was in Shuſhan by the power and authority of Darius the Mede, who (though he were now elected King of Babylon, yet) had ſtill great power at home, and by vertue of that ſettles and prefers Daniel in Shuſhan.

Anſ. But Shuſhan did not belong to the Territories of the Medes, but of the Perſians; for it was the City Royal of that Country. Now ſay the Authors of this opinion, Cyrus King of Perſia was a profeſſed enemy to this Darius the Mede, and did in the end take the Kingdome of Babylon from him. Upon their principle therefore how can it be imagined that Daniel ſhould reſide in Shuſhan in the time of Darius the Mede, if this Darius the Mede (as they ſay) did belong to the Babylonian Monarchy, and were an enemy to Cyrus? for may it be ſuppoſed that Darius's power could ſettle and prefer Daniel in his enemies country, yea in the City Royal, and that of ſuch an enemy as was more potent then himſelf? it cannot be.

2 Becauſe this Darius the Mede did rule by the Laws of the Medes and Perſians, as is clear, Dan. 6. verſ. 8, 12, 15. he muſt therefore belong to the times of the Perſian Monarchy, and not of the Babylonian; For who can think the Babylonians were ſo ſtupid, ſuch Fools and Mad-men, as to ſuffer a King, a ſtranger, who came in amongſt them not by any Conqueſt, or power that he had to conquer them, but (as ſaith this opinion) by their free choice, which was a matter of curteſie towards him? I ſay, to ſuffer ſuch a one to rule abſolutely by the Laws of his own Country, and not rather by theirs, is a thing that we cannot eaſily imagine that any other, unleſſe very Fools or Mad-men (in ſuch a caſe) would conſent unto.

3 Becauſe it appears from the faith and fervency of Daniel, and his urging preſent deliverance ſo much as he doth in that prayer of his Chap. 9. (which prayer was made in the firſt year of this Darius the Mede as verſ. 1. tells us) that Daniel did now look upon the ſeveny years as run out (which alſo he ſeems to intimate verſ. 2.) at this time of his praying; which conſideration puts life, courage, faith, boldneſſe into him. But now according to this opinion there ſhould be ſeventeen or eighteen years of the ſeventy yet to expire; which ſurely in caſe Daniel had ſo looked upon it, it would have been a great cooling to his ſpirit, a quenching to his faith, ſo as he could never have urged (as he doth, verſ. 16, 17.) a preſent turning away of Gods anger, cauſing his face to ſhine upon them; nor would he ever have pleaded (as he doth, verſ. 19.) defer not for thine own ſake, O my God; For how could he with faith have uttered thoſe words, defer not, if he had looked upon the time of their deliverance to be remote ſeventeen, or eighteen yeers?

4 Becauſe the Scripture is clear and punctual that the Babylonian Monarchy ended in Belſhazzar, therefore may we not look for any Darius to ſucceed him in that Monarchy. This we have, Dan. 5.26. God hath numbred thy Kingdome and finiſhed it. Theſe words are not to be referred to the Kingdome of Belſhazzar in particular, but to the whole Babylonian Monarchy (called Belſhazzars Kingdome, becauſe he now ſwayed the Scepter in it) the continuance whereof was numbred by God, or meaſured out to be ſeventy years, Jer. 25.11, 12. Jer. 29.10. which determined time was now expired or finiſhed, as the Text tells us; Therefore no room is left for a Darius to ſucceed in this Monarchy.

5 Becauſe Belſhazzars Kingdome is divided, when he loſeth it, betwixt the Medes and the Perſians, Dan. 5.28. Thy Kingdome is divided, and given to the Medes and Perſians; but according to this opinion, if Darius the Mede, as a King elected did firſt poſſeſſe the whole, and after him Cyrus the Perſian by Conqueſt gain the whole, what diviſion were there? True, either have what once was Belſhazzars Kingdome; but ſeeing they ſucceed each other in it, and either is a poſſeſſor of the whole, here can be no diviſion; where one hath all, is no diviſion.

6 Becauſe the words of the Holy Ghoſt, Dan. 11.1. import as much as if that this Darius the Mede had been uſed by God in the doing ſome eminent ſervice for him and his people. Alſo v. 3. in the firſt year of Darius the Mede, even I ſtood up to confirm and ſtrengthen him. Gods ſtanding up to confirm and ſtrengthen Darius in the firſt year of his Reign is an Argument of ſome remarkable work that was done for God in this year: Now if we place Darius firſt year with the beginning of the Perſian Monarchy, its evident enough what this work was, namely, the giving way to Iſraels return out of Babylon, the making him willing to that work, which outwardly might ſeem to his loſſe and diſadvantage; but in caſe we place Darius firſt year (as doth this opinion) ſixteen or ſeventeen years before the expiration of the Babylonian Monarchy, let it be ſhewn from Scripture, what that eminent peece of ſervice was, that was done for God in that year.

From the whole I conclude, That Darius the Mede ſpoken of by Daniel, did not reign in the ending time of the Babylonian Monarchy, but in the beginning of the Perſian.

But it may be ſaid, If ſo, then of neceſſity muſt we begin the Perſian Monarchy not with the firſt of Cyrus (as before) but with the firſt year of Darius; and if ſo, then is not the beginning of the two thouſand three hundred dayes which (I have ſaid) begins with the firſt of Cyrus, ſtated aright.

Anſw. It doth not follow, For though it is confeſſed that Darius did reign in the beginning of the Perſian Monarchy, yet doth it not therefore follow that Cyrus did not, unleſſe it could be proved that theſe two did ſucceed each other, which cannot be from Scripture, but rather the contrary is manifeſt, viz. that Cyrus and Darius were contemporaries, and indeed Co-partners in the Kingdome of Babylon after the ſame was taken. For let it be conſidered, that the taking of Babylon was not an act performed by Cyrus alone, nor by Darius alone, but it was their joynt act; they two (one being King of the Perſians, the other of the Medes; and as Hiſtories report, allyed the one to the other) joyn forces, and with their united ſtrength march up againſt Babylon, beſiege it, take it. And this is clearly the mind of the Scripture, and that opinion only which with Scripture approbation will ſtand. For,

1 The Scripture attributes the taking of Babylon to either of them, as being their joynt act. It is attributed to Darius, Dan. 5.31. to Cyrus Iſa. 45.1, 2, 3. which is a clear Propheſie of Cyrus his taking Babylon. To ſay (as ſome) that Cyrus in the taking of Babylon did act as General of the Army under Darius, is not only a thing without Scripture-warrant, but a thing in it ſelf very incredible, viz. that Cyrus who (as all Hiſtories report) had before the taking of Babylon reigned ſome years as King among the Perſians, and was for his warlike exploits and victories the moſt famous man then living, having alſo hitherto in his way met with no check or frown of Providence, ſhould upon the ſudden in the midſt of all his Trophies and Victories, come down from being a King, to be General only under another.

2 The Propheſie we are now upon, Dan. 8. Concerning the beginning of the ſecond Monarchy, doth plainly hold forth this. For obſerve it, as the third Monarchy of the Grecian is in the riſe of it deſcribed by a He-goat having one Horn, verſ. 5. which Horn was Alexander the Great; ſo the riſe of the ſecond Monarchy of the Medes and Perſians is deſcribed by a Ram having two Horns, verſ. 3. which two Horns are interpreted, the Kings of Media and Perſia, verſ. 20. Now as theſe two horns were both upon the Ram together, at the time of his puſhing againſt the Babylonian Monarchy; for otherwiſe, why is he deſcribed as puſhing with two horns? ſo muſt we conceive that Cyrus King of the Perſians, and Darius the Mede with their united ſtrength did puſh againſt the Babylonians, and overthrowing them did accordingly (untill by Darius death, the Monarchy fell to Cyrus alone) Reign together.

3 Its foretold to Belſhazzar, Dan. 5.28. that his Kingdome ſhould be divided betwixt the Medes and the Perſians; But in caſe the ſame had fallen into the hands of Darius the Mede only, then (as I have obſerved before) there had been no diviſion of the Kingdome; for where one hath all, is no dividing. Yea farther, if Cyrus had had nothing to do with the Monarchy till after Darius death, how then had Belſhazzars Kingdome faln to him? it had been Darius his Kingdome, not Belſhazzars.

4 The Prophet Iſaiah foretelling the ruine of Babylon, Chap. 21. makes mention of two Nations as ſpoyling of her, which two Nations are the. Medes and Perſians, verſ. 2. A grievous Viſion is declared unto me, The treacherous dealer dealeth treacherouſly, the ſpoyler ſpoyleth; Go up O Elam, beſiege O Media. Now obſerve, Elam was that Province in which Shuſhan the Royal City of Perſia ſtood, Dan. 8.2. I was at Shuſhan, which is in the Province of Elam; by Elam therefore the Perſians are meant, as by Medea the Medes, both which hand in hand, march up, beſiege, ſpoyl Babylon. And therefore in the following verſes of this Chapter, the marchers up againſt Babylon, are deſcribed by a double Chariot, a Chariot of Aſſes and a Chariot of Camels; noting the Medes and Perſians; which double Chariot by vertue of that union and neer conjunction that was now between them, go both under the name of one, and are called but one Chariot becauſe they march up together ſo unanimouſly againſt babylon, as if they had been but one people, and not two; which one Chariot is led on by a couple of Horſemen, excellently pointing out Cyrus and Darius the two Heads or Leaders of this Army, as verſ. 6. For thus hath the Lord ſaid unto me, Go ſet a Watchman, let him declare what he ſeeth, verſ. 7. And he ſaw a Chariot with a couple of Horſe-men, a Chariot of Aſſes, and a Chariot of Camels, and he hearkned diligently with much heed, verſ. 8. And he cryed, A Lion my Lord. I ſtand continually upon the Watch-tower in the day time, and I am ſet in my ward whole nights, verſ. 9. And behold here cometh a Chariot of men, with a couple of horſemen; and he anſwered and ſaid, Babylon is fallen, is fallen, and all the graven Images of her gods he hath broken unto the ground.

5 The firſt year of Cyrus the Perſian when the Decree went forth for building the Temple, 2 Chron. 36, 22, 23. Ezra 1.1, 2. is the very ſame year with that called the firſt of Darius the Mede, Dan. 9.1. Chap. 11.1. For obſerve, the firſt year of Cyrus the Perſian muſt be that very year, that immediately ſucceeded the ending of the ſeventy years of Captivity; for otherwiſe Iſraels deliverance being not till the firſt of Cyrus, the time of their Captivity ſhould be upwards of ſeventy years, which is expreſly againſt the Propheſie, Jer. 29.10. Thus ſaith the Lord, That after ſeventy years be accompliſhed at Babylon, I will viſit you, and perform my good word towards you, in cauſing you to return to this place. Now the firſt year of Darius the Mede was the ſame year, as is clear; becauſe with the end of Belſhazzars reign, from whom Darius the Mede takes the Kingdome, the time allotted to the Babylonian Monarchy, which was ſeventy years from the time that Iſrael was firſt captivated, was now finiſhed, Dan. 5.26. and alſo, becauſe this ſeems to be the very thing that ſets Daniel upon prayer and faſting, Dan. 9.2, 3. the underſtanding by Books in this firſt year of Darins the Mede, that the ſeventy years were accompliſhed. Nay, let me ſay, it muſt needs be ſo, that the ſeventy years did expire with the firſt year of Darius the Mede, when Babylon was taken, and ſo conſequently Darius firſt year, and Cyrus firſt, but one and the ſame year, becauſe the forequoted Propheſie, Jer. 29. is clear, that after ſeventy years were expired, Iſrael ſhould return from Babylon: And Jer. 25.11, 12. ſpeaks it yet more clearly, that Iſrael ſhould ſerve the King of Babylon but ſeventy years, which ſo ſoon as accompliſhed, God would puniſh the King of Babylon, and deliver them: Whence I conclude, that the ſeventy years are not to be extended any further then the time that Iſrael did ſerve Babylon, and the time that Babylon was puniſhed of God: But Iſrael ſerved Babylon no longer then the firſt year of Darius; for with his taking the Kingdome (as our former Reaſons prove) the Babylonian Monarchy ended, if we ſhould therefore ſuppoſe them in ſervitude afterwards, it muſt be to the Medes, not the Babylontans; and alſo Babylon was ſufficiently puniſhed of God, when the Babylonian Monarchy was tranſlated to another people; both which things having their plenary accompliſhment in the firſt year of Darius the Mede, therefore with that year muſt the ſeventy years of neceſſity expire; and if ſo, then muſt the firſt year of Darius the Mede be alſo the firſt year of Cyrus the Perſian, in which Iſrael was ſet free; for otherwiſe they had remained in Captivity above ſeventy years. If therefore the firſt year of Darius the Mede, and the firſt of Cyrus the Perſian, were one and the ſame year, then of neceſſity muſt their Reign be together; and therefore (I take it) that thoſe words, Dan. 6.28. ſpeak of Darius and Cyrus as Co-reigners, and not as Reigning ſucceſſively one after the other, unleſſe we underſtand it only of the time that Cyrus Reigned alone after Darins death; So this Daniel proſpered in the Reign of Darius, and in the Reign of Cyrus the Perſian.

Now the Reaſons why Daniel ſpeaks chiefly of Darius the Mede, as if the ruling power lay in his hands only, ſeems to me to have been one of theſe two, or both.

1 Becauſe Darius the Mede, being aged, and of the two the greater Polititian, took up his abode (Babylon being taken) in the Royal City of the Empire, managing the affairs of State, whilſt Cyrus (who was the younger and the braver Souldier) was in all likelihood yet in the field, ſubduing, and bringing into ſubjection ſuch Countries, Cities, and Towns, as did yet ſtand in the way of his abſolute Monarchy. Hence Daniel whoſe employment lay in State affairs, having chiefly to do with Darius, makes mention of him as though be alone had been King.

2 Becauſe Darius the Mede being much the elder, and (as ſome think) Uncle to Cyrus, things might go moſtly under his name, by reaſon whereof the name of Cyrus, (whilſt Darius lived) might be ſomewhat obſcured; therefore Daniel mentions him, who of the two was vulgarly looked upon as the leading man in ordering affairs, and doth not take ſo much notice of the other, though yet he were in power equall with him. And ſurely there might be a glorious deſign of Providence in obſcuring the name of Cyrus about the time Babylon was taken, through that of Darius; for the name of Cyrus (by reaſon of Iſaiahs Propheſie) was grown ſo famous amongſt the Jews, that had they but heard the name of Commander inchief before Babylon to be Cyrus, they had not been ſo ſurpriſed with their mercy, as it is ordinary with God to deal by his people in his more glorious appearances to be upon them before they are aware; but whilſt they little think of a Cyrus, and hear a great noiſe of a mighty Darius, Babylon is taken, and inſtantly unlooked for, appears a Cyrus, as a firſt and leading man amongſt the Conquerors; which certainly could not but ſo ſoon as diſcovered (which in all likelihood was preſently as Babylon was taken, when now the Jews within Babylon by converſe with them, come to have a more true underſtanding of the people themſelves, the ſtate and affairs of the Conquerors) wonderouſly affect the hearts of Gods people. And whether or no, as the perceiving on the one hand the ſeventy years to be out, ſo ſome ſuch amazing Providence as this concurring on the other, might not be a whet to Daniels ſpirit the more, to be earneſt in ſtriving with God for his People, City, and Temple, I ſhall not (the Scripture being ſilent therein) take upon me to determine.

And this conſideration of Cyrus being manifeſted and known to Gods people laſt, doth well ſolve thoſe words, Chap. 8.3. The Ram had two Horns, and the two Horns were high, but one was higher then the other, and the higher came up laſt: Which words ſeem to have in them matter of objection againſt the thing we are ſpeaking of, and they ſeem to import, as if that Cyrus (who is the higher Horn of the two) did ſucceed Darius; and if ſo, Then how is it true that hath been ſaid, They did both Reign together? Now from what hath been ſaid, the Anſwer is eaſie, that Daniel ſpeaks not of the being of the two Horns, but of their appearance; the two Horns, were both in being upon the head of the Ram when he puſhed down the Babylonian Monarchy; but now, as to Gods people they did not both appear at once; but Darius the lower Horn appears firſt, and Cyrus the higher Horn after him; ſo did they not to Daniel in the Viſion; firſt Daniel beholds the lower Horn, then the higher. But if this ſuffice not (becauſe there ſeems weight in the Objection) it may be otherwiſe anſwered; that Cyrus's coming up laſt, is not to be underſtood in reſpect of his being a Horn, but in reſpect of his being a Horn greater and higher then the other Horn: A Horn he was of power and authority equal with Darius, whilſt Darius lived; but a Horn of higher and greater authority then ever his fellow Horn had; ſo he was not till after the death of Darius, when the whole Monarchy, which before was ſhared between them, fell to him alone; and in this reſpect Daniel ſees him come up laſt.

If it be asked, how long theſe two, Darius and Cyrus, did reign together.

I anſwer, Two years, at the end of which Darius (who was ſixty two years old when Babylon was taken, Dan. 5.31.) by death (which is moſt probable) or elſe by reſignation, devolves the whole upon Cyrus. Now that they did reign together two years, and no more, is clear, if we compare Dan. 1.21. with Dan. 10.1. Daniel Chap. 1.21. is ſaid to continue till the firſt year of King Cyrus, i.e. ſo long Daniel did ſurvive. In Chap. 10. Daniel ſees a Viſion in the third year of King Cyrus: How may we reconcile theſe places? did Daniel behold this Viſion two years after he was dead? No, we may not think ſo; but that which doth, and onely can reconcile the places, is this, Chap. 1. ſpeaks of Cyrus's ſole reign, i.e. reckons from that time he began to reign alone; but Chapter 10. ſpeaks of the whole of the time that he reigned from the taking of Babylon; now that was three years, until the time Daniel ſaw this Viſion, two of which he reigned together with Darius, and the third (which is called Cyrus's firſt Chap. 1.21.) he reigned alone. Here in our cloſe it may be obſerved,

1 That the firſt year of Cyrus, Dan. 1.21. is not the ſame year with that called the firſt of Cyrus, 2 Chr. 36.22. Ezra 1.1. The one ſignifies the firſt year of his reign after Babylon was taken; the other the firſt of his ſole reign, which was not his firſt year, but his third from the taking of Babylon.

2 That Daniel dyed in the ſelf-ſame year, in which he ſaw his laſt and great Viſion, which was in the third year of the Perſian Monarchy; for he continues but till the firſt of Cyrus, viz. of Cyrus's ſole reign, which (I ſay) is the ſame year with that called the third of Cyrus, in which he ſaw his laſt Viſion; for therefore (as I conceive) doth Daniel, who before had all along dated his Viſions by the reign of Darius, date that laſt by the reign of Cyrus, to ſignifie to us how that in this third year of the Empire, Cyrus did reign alone. Daniel therefore continuing but till the firſt year of Cyrus his ſole Reign, and the year in which Daniel ſaw his laſt and great Viſion being that year; I therefore conclude, that Daniel dyed in that very year in which he had his laſt Viſion; which neer approach of Daniels death ſeems to me to be hinted to him twice in the end of the Viſion, Chap. 12.9. Go thy way Daniel; And again, in the very laſt words of all, But go thou thy way till the end be; for thou ſhalt reſt, and ſtand in thy lot at the end of the dayes.

The ſumme of all our whole diſcourſe in this Section, is, That Darius the Mede did not belong to the Babylonian Monarchy, but the Perſian; and that the firſt year of Darius the Mede, and the firſt of Cyrus the Perſian, are one and the ſame year.

CHAP. II. Wherein in order to a more full clearing up of the foregoing account, viz. of two thouſand and three hundred dayes, Daniels ſeventy weeks are diſcuſſed.
SECT. 1.

HAving in the fore-going Chapter fixed the Head of our Account, viz. with what time we are to begin the two thouſand and three hundred years; I ſhall now through the Lords aſſiſtance go on, and (as that which neceſſarily comes next to be handled in order to the making up our Computation) enter upon Daniels ſeventy weeks, Chap. 9.24, 25, 26, 27.

This ſeventy weeks is a leſſer Epock comprehended within the greater of two thouſand and three hundred years, conſiſting of four hundred and ninety dayes; for ſeventy weeks being reduced into dayes, amount to the aforeſaid number, which according to the Prophetical way of ſpeaking is ſo many years, viz. four hundred and ninety years.

Two great knots we have here to untie:

1 Whether theſe ſeventy weeks relate to Old Teſtament, or New Teſtament times?

2 In caſe they relate to the one, or the other, where are we to begin, and where to end them?

As touching the firſt, it is the opinion of a worthy man, that this Propheſie is not to be underſtood of the times between the Babylonian Captivity and Chriſt, but rather points out the Churches Reſtauration in New Teſtament times from its bondage and ſervitude under Antichriſt.

But this I cannot receive.

1 Becauſe this opinion leaves us wholly deſtitute of Scripture-ground, either for the making up the years of the world, or for a right ſupputation of Daniels two thouſand and three hundred years.

2 Becauſe the determination of the ſeventy weeks is clearly and evidently upon the Jewiſh Church, where as this ſhould be upon the Churches of the Gentiles; This is evident from the words, verſ. 24. Seventy weeks are determined upon thy people, and upon thy holy City. Thy people, and thy holy City, clearly denotes the Jewiſh Church, and the City Jeruſalem, which was Daniels people, and City to be h • re intended. Nay it cannot be otherwiſe; for theſe words coming in as an anſwer to Daniels prayer, moſt ſurely that people, and that City Daniel had been praying for, is here meant. Now this was not the Church and people of the Gentiles, but of the Jews, with the City Jeruſalem, as the very expreſſions of his prayer declare.

Object. But the Prophets whilſt they ſpeak of the reſtauration out of Babylon temporal, do myſtically imply, and under figures deſcribe the reſtauration out of Babylon ſpiritual: Therefore though it is a truth that Daniels praier was directed for reſtauration out of temporal Babylon, yet notwithſtanding was he cloſely under it led by the Spirit to the reſtauration out of Babylon ſpiritual.

Anſw. True, the Prophets whilſt they ſpeak of the reſtauration out of Babylon temporal, do indeed myſtically imply, and under figures deſcribe the reſtauration out of Babylon ſpiritual; this in the general is a truth; but whilſt there is an application made of this general Rule to this particular Propheſie, it fails; for our Author himſelf confeſſeth that Daniel in his prayer did caſt in his thoughts the reſtauration out of Babylon temporal; and therefore the ſeventy weeks from his own principle, muſt have ſome relation to that, at leaſt-wiſe as a type of the other. But a typical relation it could not be; for the Text having expreſly ſaid, that ſeventie weeks ſhould ſeal up the Viſion and Propheſie, we are here by out off from looking after any Antitype, or any other fulfilling of theſe words then what was betwixt the coming out of Babylon literal, and the death of Chriſt; therefore the relation they have to that time muſt neceſſarily be the whole intendment of the Propheſie.

3 Becauſe the Phraſes verſ. 24. to finiſh tranſgreſſion, to make an end of ſins, to make reconciliation for iniquity, to bring in everlaſting Righteouſneſſe, cannot without a manifeſt forcing be applid to any other time, then that wherein Chriſt ſuffered.

4 The Meſſiah the Prince, verſ. 25, 26. being called the moſt Holy, verſ. 24. (which is the Attribute of God alone) it is not ſufferable that the ſame ſhould be applied (as doth this opinion) to the Waldenſian Princes, Ziſca the Bohemian, or any other creature. To interpret the anointing the moſt Holy to be ſpoken not of any perſon but of things, viz. the bringing in of Chriſts pure worſhip into his Church (which is the ſenſe of the Author of this opinion) cannot be thought; ſeeing the only anointed One ſpoken of in all this Propheſie is the Meſſiah the Prince, who being a perſon, the anointing the moſt Holy muſt be of ſome perſon, not of things. Nay it ſeems ſtrange to me, that the word Meſſiah ſignifying the anointed One, and this whole Propheſie pointingat the Meſſiah, it ſhould once be thought that the anointing the moſt Holy can be meant of any other ſave the Meſſiah, our Lord Jeſus Chriſt himſelfe. And therefore learned Mede upon the words well ſaith, There is (ſaith he) no interpretation of any paſſage in this Propheſie could ſeem ſo harſh, but I would be content to admit it, rather then yeeld that by Meſſiah, the Prince here named, ſhould be meant any other then Chriſt our Lord and Redeemer. For (ſaith he) I am perſwaded that the Church of Iſrael in the Goſpel, and from them the Apoſtles took it, had no other place of Scripture, whence they did, or could aſcribe the Name of Chriſt or Meſſiah unto him they looked for, but only from this of Daniel. Theſe are Mr. Medes words, which carry a convincing demonſtration along with them, that the Meſſiah here ſpoken of muſt be Chriſt perſonally; but this opinion we oppoſe, neither doth, nor can ſo hold.

5 The Meſſiah the Prince, or the anointed Governor (to uſe our Authors term) is not to be anointed until the ſeventieth week. verſ. 24. Seventy weeks are determined to anoint the moſt Holy. But according to the expreſſe and declared mind of the opinion we oppoſe, the Meſſiah is to be anointed after ſeven weeks of the ſeventy, i.e. nine and forty years are expired. And indeed ſo conſiderable is this one Stone, that if removed, the very foundation, yea the whole fabrick of this opinion goes to decay; for neither will there be room found for the Waldenſian Princes, nor Ziſca, at the end of the ſeven weeks, or nine and forty years, in caſe the Meſſiah, the Prince, be not anointed till the ſeventieth or laſt week; and this Stone needs not a hand to be put to it; for the Text it ſelf hath removed it in telling us, that not ſeven, but ſeventy weeks are determined to anoint the moſt Holy.

6 The Meſſiah, the Prince, is ſaid to be cut off, but not for himſelf. verſ. 26. what could more fitly have been ſpoken to ſignifie Chriſts dying for the ſins of his people?

7 And laſt, To ſay no more, The perplexedneſſe of this opinion, which knows not certainly where to begin the ſeventy weeks, whether with the Waldenſes, A.D. 1160. or afterwards in the time of Wickliffe, 1370. argues the ſame to be no ſure interpretation of this Propheſie.

Object. 1. This Propheſie ſeemeth not to relate to Old Teaſtment times, becauſe in no place of the New Teſtament do we find it uſed againſt the Jews, to prove the Meſſiah already come.

Anſ. 1. No more do we any where find throughout the New Teſtament that ever Chriſt or his Apoſtles did make improvement of the departure of the Scepter from Judah to convict thereby the obſtinate Jews; Is it meet that we ſay therefore, there was nothing in that fore-ſhewing the time of Chriſts paſſion? the reaſon is as good for the one, as the other.

2 All Daniels Propheſies were by ſtrict command given forth to Daniel again and again, to be ſealed till the time of the end. That therefore this Propheſie of Daniel (which had Chriſt or the Apoſtles unſealed in part, would have ſet open a door of light to the whole) might remain ſealed till the time of the end ſhould draw on; therefore neither Chriſt nor his Apoſtles do urge this particular Propheſie to any ſuch end, which indeed they could not have done without unſealing it, by determining the drift of the Propheſie, and alſo ſhewing the time to which it did relate; and in determining this, a fair way had been made for the ſupputation of the two thouſand three hundred years, Chap. 8. and thereby light alſo let into that Propheſie.

Object. 2. All Daniels other Propheſies bring us to New Teſtament times, therefore this alſo.

Anſ. The ſubject of all Daniels other Propheſies is the four Monarchies, but not ſo this: the conſequence therefore is not good.

As for all the other Arguments laid down by the Author (which are not a few) ſome to prove the Negative part of the Queſtion, ſome the Affirmative, the bottome of them all is one of theſe two things, either,

1 Falſe principles ariſing from, firſt, a miſ-interpretation of ſome phraſes and paſſages in this Propheſie: Or ſecondly, From too great a reſtraining of ſome things in Daniels other Propheſies (which our Author would have interpretative of this) to ſuch and ſuch particular Events: Or thirdly, from a leaning too much to the bare reports of Hiſtory.

2 An interpretation of the phraſes here, which ſet forth Chriſt his acts and ſufferings by ſimilar phraſes in Daniel elſewhere, which point at Antichriſt his acts, and the Churches ſufferings under him; whence the concluſion is, That this Propheſie muſt relate to the times of Antichriſt, and the captivity of the Church of the New Teſtament under him. But let it be conſidered, as Arguments of this nature, when they are not ſeconded by ſome others more ſolid, do moſtly make up but a doubtful concluſion; ſo in the preſent caſe more eſpecially the concluſion is ſuch, yea the way of demonſtration very unſafe. For Antichriſt being Chriſts Ape, acting over thoſe things that Chriſt himſelf did, onely with this difference, the acts as performed by Chriſt were holy and good, as done by Antichriſt wicked and abominable. Hence it follows, that the acts of both are ſet forth by ſimilar phraſes and expreſſions. Chriſt by his death and ſufferings cauſed virtually the Jewiſh ſacrifice and oblation to ceaſe (this being the time of its abrogation) v. 27. and afterwards by a totall ruining through Thunder, Lightning, and Earthquake, the very place of that ſacrifice, he actually deſtroyed it in Julians time. Antichriſt likewiſe (but in an evill ſenſe) is ſaid to take away the daily ſacrifice, Dan. 8.11. Chap. 11.31. becauſe he labours to deſtroy, and by his power ſuppreſeth Chriſts true worſhip to ſet up his own. As Chriſt to ſet up Chriſtian worſhip, deſtroyed the Jewiſh; ſo he to ſet up his Antichriſtian worſhip, would deſtroy the Chriſtian; therefore are the one and the other ſaid to take away the daily ſacrifice. Again, Chriſt is ſaid for the over-ſpreading of abominations to make it deſolate, i.e. make deſolate the Jewiſh worſhip, their City, Sanctuary, which thing as it was cauſed by rejecting him, ſo after his death, was performed in part by Titus, and compleatly in the time of Julian. Antichriſt likewiſe to place the abomination making deſolate, Chap. 11.31. i.e. to deſolate the Chriſtian worſhip, with-drawing people from it, by ſetting up his own abominable Idolatry, by which the whole world are bewitched, and led aſide. Thus other ſimilar phraſes, by conſidering the thing as done by Chriſt, and done by Antichriſt; or as relating to the Jewiſh Church and worſhip, and the Chriſtian, will be clear. And indeed this notion both lets a light into Daniel to reconcile ſeeming contrary places, and alſo (if duly weighed) turns up by the roots a great part of our Authors Arguments.

Adde hereto, (which takes in thoſe that remain) that there is in many things an Analogy betwixt Chriſts ſufferings who is Head, and the Chruches who are his body, and alſo betwixt the effects that follow upon either. Now one or other of theſe conſiderations will enervate the force of all the Authors Arguments, which (becauſe many, and an anſwer to each, will take up much room, and alſo anticipate ſome things in my following Diſcourſe) I forbear to give particular Anſwers unto, leaving the drawing them forth from theſe more general conſiderations to the meditations of the underſtanding judicious Reader.

The Author of this opinion (if any ſhould blame me, or think I may injure truth whilſt I conceal his name, and therewith his Arguments) is the godly and learned Mr. Parker in his Daniels Viſions and Propheſies expounded upon Chap. 9.

The Concluſion is, That the ſeventy weeks are not appliable to New Testament times, but belong to the times of the Old Teſtament.

SECT. 2.

Having in the fore-going Section proved that the Seventy weeks relate to the times of the Old Teſtament, The next Enquiry is, Where we are to begin this Epock of Seventy weeks, i.e. four hundred and ninety years, and where to end them? In both theſe it is moſt neceſſary that our way be very clear, or otherwiſe we ſhall never carry a ſtreight line downwards; and the way being once cleared, here the difficulty will not be great to find out, where Daniels two thouſand three hundred yeers expire, as we have already found where they are to begin. And indeed there is not an Epock of years in all Daniel, and the Revelations, that there is more need of being upon ſure grounds for the beginning and ending, then this of the Seventy weeks; for a falling here makes a general failing, becauſe no account, whoſe Head is in the Old Teſtament, can be brought downwards to the New, but muſt deſcend through theſe ſeventy weeks; if therefore we miſ-place them, we turn every account out of its proper Chanel, cutting the way either ſhorter, or by wheeling about making it longer, then indeed it is; ſo that an error here is a fundamental error in Chronologie. We ſhal therefore deſire in this to go the more warily, taking up nothing upon truſt, but bringing even the moſt common received principles to the Touchſtone of Scripture, and right Reaſon.

Now as for the firſt, viz. The beginning of the ſeventy weeks, the Text is clear, verſ. 25. That we are to begin them from the going forth of ſome Commandement, and this Commandement ſuch too, as was not as yet gone forth when Daniel had the Viſion, but to go forth afterwards.

Now we read in the Books of Ezra and Nehemiah of four Commandements going forth after this time.

1 A Decree, or Commandement of Cyrus, Ezra 1.1, 2, 3. which is more fully repeated, Chap. 6.3, 4, 5.

2 Of Darius, Ezra 6.6 to 12.

3 Of Artaxerxes to Ezra, Ezra 7.11 to the end.

4 Of Artaxerxes to Nehemiah, Neh. 2.7, 8, 9. Upon ſome one of theſe four muſt the Head of our account be fixed.

The moſt general opinion is, that we are to fix on the firſt, viz. The Edict of Cyrus in the firſt year of his reign.

But with this cannot I accord. My Reaſons are,

1 Becauſe this beginining can never bring the two thouſand and three hundred daies, to concur in their end with the one thouſand three hundred thirty five, unleſſe we find a Head higher for the one, or lower for the other; and in caſe either of theſe be found, yet muſt the Head be ſuch, as ſhall alſo produce a concurrency in their ends betwixt the one thouſand two hundred and ſixty, and the one thouſand two hundred and ninety daies, upon the grounds we have more then once referred to already.

2 Becauſe the Angels pointing out to Daniel a certain Head for the beginning of this account, viz. the going forth of the Commandement to reſtore, and to build Jeruſalem, verſ. 25. is to me an Argument that the ſeventy weeks were not to be begun from the time of the Viſion, (which in caſe we begin from the firſt of Cyrus was, Daniel having this Viſion in the firſt year of Darius the Mede, which year was the ſame (as I have made appear) with the firſt of Cyrus the Perſian) for the Prophetical manner is, when an account is to be begun ſome or many years after the time of the Viſion, to fix upon ſome certain Head for the beginning of it, as Chap. 12.11. but now when the account is to take its beginning ſtreight-way from the time of the Viſion to fix upon none, for which reaſon the two thouſand and three hundred years, which begin from the time of the Viſion, have no particular Head aſſigned in the Text.

3 Becauſe the determination of the ſeventy weeks is expreſly upon Daniels Holy City, i.e. the City Jeruſalem. Seventy weeks are determined upon thy Holy City. But Jeruſalem was not the Holy City, nor could it properly be ſo called until many years after the firſt of Cyrus (as ſhall appear in our next Section) therefore are we not from thence, but from another time to begin the Seventy weeks.

4 Becauſe the Head of account laid down in the Text will not allow this beginning; for obſerve, the Text in plain words hath laid down the Head of our account to be this, the reſtoring and building Jeruſalem, verſ. 25. Know therefore and underſtand that from the going forth of the Command to reſtore and to build Jeruſalem. But now there was not the leaſt word in all Cyrus Decree that did concern Jeruſalem, but the whole ran upon the building of the Temple, as is clear, Ezra 1.2, 3, 4. where we have the ſubſtance of his Decree in theſe words, Thus ſaith Cyrus King of Perſia, the Lord God of Heaven hath given me all the Kingdomes of the Earth, and he hath charged me to build him a houſe at Jeruſalem which is in Judah. Who is there among you of all his people? his God be with him, and let him go up to Jeruſalem which is in Judah, and build the houſe of the Lord God of Iſrael (he is the God) which is in Jeruſalem. And whoſoever remaineth in any place where he ſojourneth, let the men of his place help him with ſilver 〈◊〉 and with gold, and with goods, and with Beaſts, beſides the free-will offering for the houſe of God that is in Jeruſalem. Here is not one word in the whole that doth authoriſe the Jews to any farther work then what concerned the Temple; but now the building of Jeruſalem (which is the Head laid down in the Text) was another, and a farther work.

Object. But though the building Jeruſalem be not expreſſed in Cyrus Decree, yet it is clear ſuch a thing was intended, and the Jews by him authoriſed to ſuch a work, as appears Iſaiah 44.28. That ſaith of Cyrus, He is my Sepherd, and ſhall perform all my pleaſure, even ſaying to Jeruſalem, thou ſhalt be built. And Chap. 45.13. I have raiſed him up (viz. Cyrus mentioned verſ. 1.) in righteouſneſſe, and I will direct all his wayes; he ſhall build my City, and he ſhall let go my Captives, not for price, nor reward, ſaith the Lord of Hoſts: Yea alſo from the very deportment of the Jews themſelves in this buſineſſe, who upon this Decree of Cyrus, before yet any other Decree was given forth, did aſſay the building of the City, which ſurely they would not do without a Commiſſion, Ezra. 4.12, 13. Be it known unto the King, that the Jews which came up from thee to us, are come unto Jeruſalem, building the rebellious and the bad City, and have ſet up the walls thereof, and joyned the foundations. Yea from the very news brought to Nehemiah by Hanani, Neh. 1.2, 3. that the wall of Jeruſalem was broken down, the gates burnt with fire, which therefore ſurely had been built betwixt their coming out of Babylon, and Nehemiahs dayes; for it could have been no news to Nehemiah to have reported to him of the breaking down of the walls of Jeruſalem, and burning the Gates by Nebuchadnezzar.

Anſ. I muſt confeſſe the Objection ſeems to have great ſtrength in it, and (for truths ſake) I have brought it forth in its full and utmoſt ſtrength. But to come to an anſwer. In doing whereof, I ſhall, Firſt, give ſome particular Anſwers to the Texts themſelves. Secondly, Lay down ſome Scripture-conſiderations, which may be an anſwer to the whole Objection.

Firſt, for the Texts themſelves; And firſt, that of Iſaiah Chap. 44.28. That ſaith of Cyrus, he is my Shepherd, and ſhall perform all my pleaſure; even ſaying to Jeruſalem, thou ſhalt be built. I take it, the latter words (in which lyes the force of the Objection) even ſaying to Jeruſalem, thou ſhalt be built, may be very fitly, according to the ſcope of the place, interpreted to be the words of the Lord himſelf, not of Cyrus; for obſerve, in the foregoing verſes, we have God brought in by the Prophet, aſſuring his people upon his word of many great things he will do for them, verſ. 24. Thus ſaith the Lord thy Redeemer, and he that formed thee from the womb, I am the Lord that maketh all things, that ſtretcheth forth the Heavens alone, that ſpreadeth abroad the Earth by my ſelf. verſ. 25. That fruſtrateth the tokens of the Liars, and maketh Diviners mad, that turneth wiſe men backward, and maketh their knowledge fooliſh. verſ. 26. That confirmeth the word of his Servant, and performeth the counſel of his Meſſengers, That ſaith to Jeruſalem, Thou ſhalt be inhabited, and to the Cities of Judah, Ye ſhall be built, and I will ra • ſe up the decayed places thereof, verſ. 27. That ſaith to the deeps be dry, and, I will dry up thy Rivers. verſ. 28. That ſaith of Cyrus, He is my Shepherd, and ſhall perform all my pleaſure. Hitherto it is moſt evident, that the words have relation to God, as ſpeaking: Now obſerve, God having aſſured his people of many great things already, he ſhuts up all with this, as the crowning mercy to all the reſt, Even ſaying to Jeruſalem, Thou ſhalt be built, and to the Temple, thy foundation ſhall be laid. As to ſay, Over and above all I have promiſed already, I do alſo give particular aſſurance, That Jeruſalem ſhall be built, and the foundations of my Temple there ſhall be laid. And to this our laſt Engliſh Annotations agree, interpreting them to be the words of God himſelf, by rendring the words, Even ſaying to Jeruſalem, thou ſhalt be built, thus, and ſaying to Jeruſalem, thou ſhalt be built; ſo by the copulation and put for even, making in effect the words to have relation, not to Cyrus, but to God himſelf, who had ſaid thus and thus before, and now over and above ſaith, Jeruſalem ſhall be built, and the foundation of the Temple there ſhall be laid.

Now looking upon the words thus, it doth not neceſſarily follow, becauſe Cyrus gave Decree for the one, the building of the Temple, that therefore he did for the other alſo, viz. the building Jeruſalem, but it proves that God would do both, and as he afterwards raiſed up Cyrus to do the one, ſo would he alſo raiſe up Cyrus, or ſome other, to do the other, when the time for doing it ſhould be come.

Object. If it be ſaid, But the building of Jeruſalem cannot but be included in that of Jeruſalems being inhabited, verſ. 26. therefore if theſe be the words of the Lord alſo, there ſeems to be a Tautologie, he ſhould ſpeak the ſame things twice.

Anſ. Not ſo; for ſeeing to inhabit is one thing, and to build a place in order to its being inhabited, is another, the things though ſpoken apart, may both very well be ſpoken by the Lord himſelf, and that without any Tautologie; and by how much the Jews had their eye chiefly upon this, the building their City Jeruſalem, by ſo much doth the Lord give them greater aſſurance of it, by doubling the thing in a manner, yet without Tautologie, becauſe ſet forth in ſeveral and divers expreſſions.

Object. But Cyrus is ſaid to perform all Gods pleaſure, verſ. 28. and this he could not do, if he did not as well give command for the building Jeruſalem, as the Temple.

Anſ. The Phraſe of performing all Gods pleaſure, neither can nor muſt be ſtretched farther then this, viz. That whatſoever God hath determined to be done by Cyrus, that he ſhould freely and cheerfully do, and accordingly ſo he did; Firſt, He deſtroyed the Babylonian Monarchy, which were the oppreſſors of Gods people. Secondly, He freely without price or reward gave full liberty to the Jews, who before were captives, to return to their own land. Thirdly, He made a Decree that they, come thither, ſhould ſet upon the work of building the Temple. Fourthly, He laid a happy foundation (as I am now coming to ſhew) for the perfecting the whole work of God, both concerning the Temple, and Jeruſalem alſo. More then this (I mean in reference to Gods cauſe and people) cannot be proved that ever God determined Cyrus ſhould do, and all this he did; and accordingly performed all Gods pleaſure.

2 Granting theſe words, Even ſaying to Jeruſalem, thou ſhalt be built, to have relation to Cyrus; yet may the meaning of them be onely this, That God would make Cyrus the principal inſtrument, as of laying the foundation of the Temple, which was actually done by his decree, ſo alſo of building Jeruſalem; but how?

Anſ. By removing the great impediment, namely the Babylonian Monarchy (which had ruined Jeruſalem, and was a profeſſed enemy to it) out of the way, and ſetting the Jews (who whilſt Captives could never do it) free from their Captivity, which accordingly was done by Cyrus, God making him inſtrumental to ruine Babylon, by which, as the Jews are thereupon by him ſet free to build the Temple for preſent; ſo alſo the ſupreme power came now to be in the hands of a Nation, who were more friendly to the Jews, and inclining to hear their complaints, and redreſſe their grievances for future. And in this ſenſe it may well be ſaid of Cyrus that he ſhould ſay to Jeruſalem, thou ſhalt be built, i.e. ſet open a door, which before was ſhut, for the building of it afterwards. And to this well agrees that other Text, Chap. 45.13. I have raiſed him up in righteouſneſſe, and will direct all his wayes; he ſhall build my City, and ſhall let go my Captives, not for price, nor reward. The building Gods City, the Objectors themſelves will never ſay was done actually by Cyrus Decree; The meaning therefore can be no other then this, That Cyrus ſhould ſet open a door for the doing of it, by deſtroying the Babylonian Monarchy that had deſolated Gods City, ſetting the captived Jews at liberty, and laying a foundation for ſuch a work afterwards, by putting forth a Decree to build the Temple, which might be, and was an inducement (as appears from Ezra 6.1, 2, 3. compared with verſes 6, 7, 8.) to his Succeſſors after him to follow their noble Leader in kindneſſe and reſpect to this Nation. And indeed it is a thing obſervable, that (for the general) of all the four Monarchies, the Perſians were ever the moſt friendly to the Jews, and moſt ready to do them right and favour, following doubtleſſe herein the example of their famous Founder Cyrus, to whom therefore, as being the leading man, whoſe example became a provocation to his Succeſſors, the whole work, in Scripture, and that not amiſſe, is attributed.

As for the other place in Ezra, Chap. 4.12, 13. it being onely the allegation of Judahs Adverſaries, and written to Artaxerxes for this end, to put a ſtop to the work of God, I rather conceive them to be words of meer accuſation, then of truth, by which thoſe crafty enemies endeavour to make the caſe of the Jews as foul as may be; and to beget in the King the greater diſlike of their proceedings, they ſuggeſt ſuch things to him on purpoſe which might breed jealouſie, and cauſe a diſcountenancing of the work; and therefore they ſet before him how potent a City, bearing rule over Kings, in former times Jeruſalem had been, and how that now the Jews were re-edifying of it, had ſet up the walls, and joyned the foundations. And ſome colour there was for this; for the Jews had now laid the foundation of the Temple, as appears, Chap. 3.11. and the malicious ſubtill enemies ſeeing a work on foot, and being willing to miſtake, ſo they might incenſe the King, and hinder the work, call this the building of the walls of Jeruſalem.

Now the Reaſons perſwading me that this was onely the enemies falſe accuſation, and that indeed there was no ſuch thing in reality, are,

1 Becauſe in Chap. 3. verſ. 8. to the end, where mention is made of the Jews building, and the progreſſe made in the work, there is not one word ſpoken of building any thing, but the Temple only.

2 Becauſe the Adverſaries of Judah, when firſt the report of the Jews building was brought to them, had no report of the building Jeruſalem, but of the Temple only, Ezra 4.1.

3 Becauſe it was in building the Temple the Adverſaries at firſt offered to joyn and build with the Jews, which Zerubbabel, Jeſhua, and the reſt would not give way unto, whereupon the Adverſaries openly oppoſe; all which is clear, Ezra 4.2, 3, 4, 5. A clear Argument, the work the Jews were about, and that the Adverſaries knew well enough, though they will not know it, was not building Jeruſalem, but the Temple.

4 Becauſe the work that the Adverſaries upon receit of Artaxerxes Letters (in anſwer to theirs) do cauſe to ceaſe, is, not the building of Jeruſalem, but the building of the Temple, Ezra 4. verſ. 23, 24. Now when the copy of King Artaxerxes Letter was read before Rehum and Shimſhac the Scribe, and their companions, they went up in haſte to Jeruſalem unto the Jews, and made them to ceaſe by force and power. Then ceaſed the work of the houſe of God, which is at Jeruſalem, ſo it ceaſed unto the ſecond year of the reign of Darius, King of Perſia. Now obſerve, the work the Jews were about, was the work cauſed to ceaſe, for ſo ran the Kings Commiſſion, verſ. 21, 22. the work cauſed to ceaſe, was not building Jeruſalem, but the Temple, the Temple-building therefore, and not the building Jeruſalem was the work the Jews were now about. Now though we ſuppoſe Ezra to be chiefly intent to ſet forth the Temple-work, yet doubtleſſe, having ſo frequent occaſion to mention the building, a hint would have been given by him, as well as the Adverſaries, of building Jeruſalem, had ſuch a work been in hand.

5 (Which makes it apparent that the thing was a meer fiction) becauſe, the Adverſaries in their Letters to Darius, after Zerubbabel and his party were fallen anew to that very work, which before they were conſtrained to let fall, have not ſo much as one word of this, Chap. 5. verſ. 6, 7, 8, &c. But now they can tell the King plainly what the Jews were about, viz. building the Temple, and not go in the dark, calling a Temple a City; and all they now propoſe to him is, only that ſearch may be made whether Cyrus made a Decree for ſuch a thing, or no. A clear Argument their former juglings were by this time diſcovered at Court; though having juggled, what by their own power, the prevalency of friends above, and that colour they had for an excuſe, it was but a miſtake, they ſaw foundations laid, and walls built, they thought it had been for a City, though upon better information they hear it was only a Temple; and they could do no other, but out of that due reſpect they bare to their Prince, his honour, and welfare, adviſe him of it; and however though a City it were not, yet the one, if ſuffered to go on, would make way for the other; By ſuch Arguments (I ſay) having by juggling at firſt put a ſtop to the work, they make a ſhift to keep their own all the dayes of Artaxerxes; but now when Darius comes to the Crown, knowing themſelves to be tardy in their laſt Letters, and that they of the Court had found out their faultring, they will have no more of it, but rather ſeem to make a ſober Propoſition that it might be looked into whether the Jews had any Law (as they pleaded to have) to bear them out in what at preſent they were about: Whereas, had there been but the leaſt ſhadow of truth in their former accuſation, they would undoubtedly have pleaded that again, as a thing more likely by far to gain the Kings ear to them, and to alienate the King from the Jews, and altogether fruſtrate their deſign. Nay theſe imbittered enemies, whoſe language was ſo high againſt the Jews in their firſt Addreſſe (Rebels, Rebels) it is likely would never have been ſo ſober in their expreſſions, as this their ſecond ſhews them to be, had they not exceeded their bounds, and come off with diſgrace, and ſome private check for it before.

6 Not to ſay much more, that which ſtrongly perſwades me yet further to be of this mind, is this, There are evidently crafty deſigns and jugglings in thoſe very Letters which carry the charge;

For firſt, obſerve, They ſpeak not one word of building the Temple, but only of building Jeruſalem, the Rebellious City, yet were not they ignorant in that reſpect what the Jews were about, for they offer to joyn with them in that very work, Chap. 4.2.

Secondly, They ſpeak not a word neither, in theſe their firſt Letters, of Cyrus Decree, which yet they could not be ignorant of, for the Jews had informed them of it, Chap. 4.3. yea the very Adverſaries had hired Counſellors againſt the Jews to fruſtrate their deſign, as Chap. 4.5. What need of hiring Counſellors againſt a buſineſſe that hath no colour of Law for it?

Queſt. What may be the reaſon they are ſilent in theſe things?

Anſ. Becauſe the diſcovery of either of theſe might have brought their juggling to light. Had they hinted a word of buiding the Temple, they above would have enquired, What, are they building a Temple, and building a City too? which would either have driven them to confeſſe the truth, 'Tis a Temple only, but what it may grow to in time we know not; Or elſe by averring both, they had cut themſelves off their fair excuſe for time to come in caſe of diſcovery, viz. That it was but their miſtake, they thought it, by the greatneſſe of preparations, and magnificence of foundations, to be a City, but it proved but a Temple. Again, Had they but hinted the Decree of Cyrus, enquiry then would have been made for the Decree, to ſee what that allowed the Jews to do, and whether they exceeded the bounds of it, before paſſing any definitive ſentence. And this Decree brought forth, would diſcover what the Jews had authority to do, more then which the Adverſaries knew well enough, they could not juſtly, in caſe ſtrict enquiry ſhould be made into the buſineſſe charge them with, and therefore they hold it policy to conceal altogether that Decree alſo. Which Decree, yet afterwards (ſee the wretchedneſſe of men) when their juggling is come to light, in their next addreſſe to Darius, Chap. 5. they make a great noiſe of, as willing thereby to hide their former malice, by making thoſe above to think that in their former addreſſe they were not ſo much enemies to the Jews, as loath to ſee and countenance any irregular proceedings, and that now having had ſatisfaction from the Jews that they had a Decree of Cyrus for what they did, they only think good to intimate, that the thing may be looked into, whether ſuch a Decree there were, or no; not without hopes undoubtedly, that through continuance of time, and mutation of affairs, the ſame might be loſt, which in caſe it were, they not only ſhould wipe off the aſperſion of malice, which now lying upon them made all charges ineffectual, but alſo find a fair opportunity to draw up a new charge. But God who knows the rage of his enemies, and takes care of his people, had provided otherwiſe, and turns this their crafty rage againſt the work, even to a promoting of it, as appears from the iſſue, Chap. 6.

As for the third foot of the Objection taken from Hananies report, My Anſwer is, That the breaking down of the wall of Jeruſalem, and burning the Gates, relates to the ruines of Jeruſalem in the dayes of Nebuchadnezzar.

My Reaſons are,

1 Becauſe no Scripture mentions any building of the walls of Jeruſalem betwixt the time of Cyrus and Nehemiah (the forementioned Texts, I have proved too weak) therefore we have no ground, for faith, that ever ſuch a thing was.

2 Becauſe its likely, if the walls had been rebuilt by the Jews that came up in the dayes of Cyrus, and afterwards broken down again by enemies, and gates burnt, they would alſo as well have broken down the Temple and burnt that, for their malice was as great againſt the one, as the other; yea if more againſt any, it was the Temple, which, being the place of the Jews worſhip, was moſt abhorred by the Adverſaries, who hated them only for Religion ſake; but this was not done, for Nehemiah coming to Jeruſalem found a Temple there, Neh. 6.10.

3 Becauſe ſhould I grant (which yet I cannot, there being not one tittle of Scripture for it) that City and Wall was built before, yet muſt we confeſſe withall, that this work was an obſcure thing, and no way to be compared with the after famous building of Nehemiah, memorized by a whole Book, written particularly upon that ſubject, and therefore not fit in compariſon of the other, to be made head of Daniels Seventy weeks.

As for the ground of this part of the Objection, That it could have been no news to Nehemiah to have heard of the ancient ruines by Nebuchadnezzar.

Anſ. Neither indeed was it, nor is the buſineſſe between Nehemiah and Hanani a hearing and telling of news (as we commonly underſtand the word) they were more ſpiritual, and better employed then ſo. Hanani was a faithful man, one that feared God above many, Neh. 7.2. This holy man coming to Nehemiah, another choice Spirit; two choice ſpirited men being now met together, having both of them great hearts for the cauſe of God, they (as 'tis comely for Saints at all times when they have the like opportunity, to do) preſently fall into diſcourſe about things that concern the people of God, and Gods cauſe, at that day, and all the news that paſſeth between, is indeed matter of ſo ſpiritual a concernment that it is too low a term to call it news. Saith Nehemiah to Hanani, brother Hanani how fares it with our brethren at Jeruſalem? O ſaith Hanani their condition is ſad, they are ſtill in the old poſture, a reproach to the Heathen, and the wall of Jeruſalem lyes broken down, the gates burnt with fire. This thing this good man reports, not ſo much as a matter of news (though in part of it news there was) as indeed a thing which was the preſent burden, grief and affliction of his own ſoul, and the ſouls of the remnant at Jeruſalem; how that Jeruſalem (the building of which they had long expected) continued ſtill a heap; and withall how that now (as it is Gods ordinary way to affect the hearts of his people, and heighten his enemies againſt a work, when the time thereof is come) the thing lay more heavy upon the ſpirits of all the remnant then ever, and alſo the enemies did more reproach them with their unbuilt City then ever; In this laſt lay all the news (if we may ſo call it) Nehemiah, upon hearing this, and through that heart-warming diſcourſe that had paſſed between them, goes home from this meeting, wondrouſly affected with the condition of Gods people, and cauſe, and betakes himſelf to his Cloſet, and there ſpreads the whole before the Lord; the iſſue whereof is favour, in the ſight of the King, and authority from him to go to Jeruſalem and build it.

Thus much by way of anſwer to the Texts in which the force of the Objection lyes.

Secondly, I now come to adde two or three Conſiderations from Scripture, which may be an anſwer to the whole of the Objection.

1 Conſideration, Whether it be not a very ſtrange thing to ſuppoſe, that the Jews having been charged with ſuch a thing as building Jeruſalem, and the work they were about ſtopped upon it, that yet afterwards the original Copy of Cyrus Decree being found out among the Court-Rolls, in the ſecond yer of Darius, and tranſcribed by Ezra, Chap. 6.1, 2, 3, 4, 5. not one word ſhould be mentioned of that about which had been ſo much noiſe and ſtir by the enemy; but as the Command, Chap. 1. So here the Decree ſhould run altogether upon building the Temple, and not a tittle in it of Jeruſalem; which, who can think otherwiſe? but that had there been but the leaſt clauſe in Cyrus Decree, empowring the Jews to the building Jeruſalem, upon which the Jews had undertook it, Ezra, though it were to vindicate the actings of his Nation (and to ſhew that what they did, which was ſo ctyed out againſt, and they ſuffered ſo much, though unjuſtly, through forged accuſations, for, was not without Law and Authority) would not doubtleſſe, had the Jews been really guilty of the act, or the Decree allowed them any ſuch thing, in tranſcribing the Decree, have left it out.

2 Conſideration, Whether the very words and manner of expreſſion uſed by the Angel, do not import an Effective command, ſuch a command as upon the going of it forth did cauſe a reſtoring and building Joruſalem? verſ. 25. Know therefore, and underſtand, that from the going forth of the Commandement to reſtore and to build Jeruſalem. Obſerve, the Command is a Command expreſly to reſtore and to build, which it is not proper to call that Command, which by vertue of it ſelf alone doth never produce any ſuch effect; conſidering too, that Gods Commands (as we are to look upon this, though he uſe man as an inſtrument) are every of them alwayes effective. Now let it be conſidered, whether the naked Decree of Cyrus ever had any ſuch effect? nay, is not the contrary evident, viz. That for many years after the going forth of that Decree, even untill the twentieth of Artaxerxes, Jeruſalem lay waſte as a ruined heap, Neh. 1.3. and when the time of building it came, the work had for its baſis, not that Decree, but a new one of Artaxerxes, by which only Nehemiah acts, and not at all by the Decree of Cyras, as is manifeſt from the whole of his Book.

3 Conſideration. Whether the Angels giving Daniel ſo many ſerious hints to pry well into this thing, and to take heed of a too haſty concluding any thing, leſt he ſhould miſtake, verſ. 25. Know therefore, and underſtand. verſ. 23. underſtand the matter, and conſider the Viſion. verſ. 22. I am now come forth to give thee skill and underſtanding: I ſay, whether it ſeem not to import, that it would be a very hard thing to make a right concluſion here, and that Daniel himſelf, and others, would be exceeding apt to miſtake this commandement, upon the going forth of which the ſeventy weeks were to be begun, and therefore the Angel bids him be very cautious, and mark well every word and tittle that he was to ſpeak, that ſo he might not through affection, or otherwiſe, be drawn to make a concluſion too ſuddenly. Now let it be ſeriouſly conſidered, whether or no could there be any ſuch difficulty in the thing it ſelf, or ſuch aptneſſe in Daniel and others to miſtake about it, in caſe the Decree of Cyrus were the thing here aimed at. For conſider, Cyrus himſelf being ſo expreſly notified by name, by the Prophet I ſaiah, many years before, (which Propheſie Daniel undoubtedly was not unacquainted with) and alſo this Decree being the firſt, and ſo the moſt famous, and alſo brought forth in ſuch a wonderful remarkable manner by Gods ſtirring up the heart of Cyrus, a Heathen, Ezra 1.1. and alſo coming forth immediately upon the prayer of Daniel, for Daniel prayes in the firſt of Darius, verſ. 1. and the Decree comes forth in the firſt of Cyrus, Ezra 1.1. both which (I have before ſhewed) were one and the ſame year, it cannot be thought that were this the Decree we are to look at, that either Daniel himſelf, or any other would have been ready to miſtake here, but would ſoon ſay, our concluſion muſt be ſo, here muſt we begin, and no where elſe; And therefore (I conceive) that Daniel whoſe thoughts now run upon the ending of the ſeventy years Captivity, and had been praying for that, and the Decree of releaſe being juſt now ready to come forth, that by all theſe things meeting together, neither he, nor we, might be ſo overſet with affection, as inſtantly, without any further ſearch, to pitch down our ſtandard here, therefore doth the Angel give ſo many ſerious hints to Daniel to look upon this thing as a matter of great weight, a thing very hard to hit the right nail, in making concluſions, and a hundred to one, if he did not conclude ſalfe; and whith all ſtrongly to give a check to his thoughts, which now were all occupied about the ending of the Captivity, and therefore would be ready to catch up any thing to begin from thence, he points him to another beginning, viz. When a Command ſhould go forth for reſtoring and building Jeruſalem, that ſo Daniel upon the going forth of that famous Decree of Cyrus, which was to be preſently, might not (having the foregoing hints, and this word, laid in before as a Caveat) be deceived, and begin the account of his ſeventy weeks from thence, but ſtill look up, and wait upon God for another time.

Yea undoubtedly the Angel being ſo carefull in this to make us know and underſtand, would, had the Decree of building the Temple been that here mentioned, have given it that name, and not another, of reſtoring and building Jeruſalem (betwixt which two were many years) hereby opening a wide door of miſtake to after-times who ſhould live to ſee this Decree, as well as the other, and yet muſt account from the other.

4 Conſideration, Which I take from the mouth of the Prophet Zechary, who began to Prophefie in the ſecond year of that Darius who advanced the work of the Temple, as Zech. 1.1.7. Ezra. 4.24. compared with Chap. 5.1. which was many years after the firſt of Cyrus. Now obſerve, in his time Gods meaſuring Line for the building of Jeruſalem had not as yet paſſed upon it, as is clear from Chap. 1.16. and Chap. 2.1, 2.3, 4. In Chap. 1. verſ. 16. Zechary hath this by way of promiſe, Auline ſhall be ſtretched forth upon Jeruſalem. In Chap. 2. Zechary Viſionally ſees the thing done, having withall a promiſe addud to it, that Jeruſalem again ſhould be inhabited, verſ. 1. I lifted up mine eyes again, and looked, and behold a man with a meaſuring line in his hand. verſ. 2. Then ſaid I, Whither goeſt thou? and he ſaid unto me, To meaſure Jeruſalem, to ſee what is the breadth thereof, and what the length thereof. verſ. 3. And behold the Angel that talked with me went forth, and another Angel went out to meet him. verſ. 4. And ſaid unto him, Run, ſpeak to the young man, ſaying, Jeruſalem ſhall be inhabited: us Towns without walls, for the multitude of men, and cattle therein. Now mind it, Zechary's ſeeing the thing Viſionally, with a promiſe it ſhould be done is a clear Argument that the real paſſing the meaſuring line upon Jeruſalem, for the building thereof, was a thing not yet done, but to be ſome time after. Now conſider, can we imagine that God ſhould cauſe a Decree to come forth by Cyrus for the building of Jeruſalem, before yet himſelf had paſſed his meaſuring line upon it? or that the Jews, having ſuch choice guides with them as Zerubbabel and Jeſhua, ſhould attempt to lay the foundations, and build up the walls of Jeruſalem, and that in a way of fore-ſtalling Providence, laying their meaſuring lines before yet God had laid his? ſurely it cannot be.

My Concluſion therefore from the whole is, That that famous Decree of Cyrus, ſo generally harped upon, cannot be the Commandement here ſpoken of, from the going forth of which we are to begin our Epock of four hundred and ninety years.

SECT. 3.

Beſides the Decree of Cyrus, which Decree was the firſt, we read in Ezra of a ſecond Decree that concerned the Jews, and their welfare, which forth came from Darius, whereof mention is made Chap. 6. verſ. 6, 7, 8, &c.

But this cannot be the Commandement here ſpoken of, which by the Angel is made Head of our account, for the ſame reaſon diſproving the former, becauſe this Decree concerned the Temple only, not Jeruſalem, whereof we have not one tittle in the whole Decree; and alſo it concerned not ſo much the building of the Temple, as the removal of that which was an impediment in the way to the going on of the work, which work had ſtill for its baſis the old Decree of Cyrus, only the impediment is removed by vertue of a new; but now the Decree which is to be Head of our account is a Decree expreſly to build, therefore cannot be this Decree.

Yet the learned Mede in his Treatiſe upon Daniels Weeks (whom I am neceſſitated here to mention by name, becauſe I can neither ſtate his opinion, nor anſwer it, without referring oftentimes to the Author) is of the mind our fixation muſt be here.

That by which he would evade the reaſon of the words, viz. That we are to begin from the building of Jeruſalem, is, He would diſtinguiſh the beginning of the Holy City, from the beginning of Jeruſalem; For (ſaith he) the Holy City is ſo called of the Temple the principal part, and therefore the time of the reſtitution thereof is to be reckoned from the time that the Temple was builded; but by Jeruſalem is underſtood the external buildings and walls of the City, which were not reſtored till ſome time after the Temple & Sanctuary was finiſhed, Daniels Weeks p. 3. (as the Treatiſe is printed by it ſelf, as it is printed with his whole Works, the Page is different.

To ſpeak more plainly to the Readers capacity, Mr. Medes opinion is this; That the ſeventy weeks are one Epock, and the ſixty two weeks another, being a leſſer period of time comprehended within the Seventy, whoſe beginning (as he ſaith page 10.) was to be after the Seventy were begun, and the end before they ſhould be ended.

And as he makes the Seventy weeks to begin from the perfecting the work of the Temple in the ſixth year of Darius Nothus, as is his opinion, and to end with the deſtruction of Jeruſalem; ſo doth he the ſixty two weeks to begin from the ſeventh year of Artaxerxes, when Ezra had Commiſſion to cauſe to return, and carry with him as many of the Jews as he would to Jeruſalem, Ezra 7.7.13. and alſo from the twentieth year of the ſame Artaxerxes, when Nehemiah obtained leave to build Jeruſalem, Nehem. 2. and to end with the death of Chriſt. Onely he makes a difference betwixt Solar years, and Lunar, reckoning ſixty two Solar years from the time of Ezraes going up, to the Death of Chriſt, but ſixty two Lunar from Nehemiah's: ſixty two weeks, or four hundred thirty four Lunar years, being (as he ſaith) ſo many leſſe, then ſo many Solar, as there are years betwixt the ſeventh and twentieth of Artaxerxes, p. 21. and to this latter beginning he makes the Command to build Jeruſalem to refer, and not to the former.

This is the full of Mr. Medes opinion, which with what clearneſſe I am able, I have ſet forth; and now muſt ſay, though I highly honour the Author, and his indgement in many things, yet in this particular cannot I cloſe with him.

My Reaſons are,

1 Becauſe the concurrence of the two thouſand three hundred dayes in their end, with the one thouſand three hundred thirty five, the one thouſand two hundred and ſixty dayes, with the one thouſand two hundred and ninety (both which ſtand upon firm Scripture-ground) is abſolutely deſtroyed by this opinion of the Seventy weeks.

2 Becauſe Mr. Medes great and only Reaſon inducing him to this Computation, is weak, uncertain, without Scripture-ground, yea deſtructive to Scripture-principles.

His Reaſon is, to reconcile humane Hiſtories, and Daniels Seventy weeks. Now ſuppoſing it to be done, yet in matters of faith the reaſon is weak, and as good as nothing, becauſe the foundation is humane Hiſtory, which is no ground of my faith.

2 It is uncertain, becauſe humane Computations are different, and in things different a choice cannot be made, without ſome other rule to guide the choice.

3 It is without Scripture-ground, becauſe Firſt, Scripture hath no where told us that we ſhould make bare humane reports the ground of our faith, but manifeſtly the contrary. Secondly, No other groſſe ſumme in the whole Scripture doth inforce the beginning and ending of the Seventy weeks to be as Mr. Mede hath ſtated it, which could that be made out, it muſt then be granted that Mr. Mede hath reaſon ſufficient to adhere to the reports of thoſe he follows, rather then of others, who in computing the ſame time differ in their accounts, and conſequently he ſhould have, though not a particular, yet a general Scripture-ground; but his opinion having neither the one, nor the other, hath no Scripture-ground at all.

4 It is deſtructive to other Scripture-principlos, viz. thoſe principles which are the foundation of our firſt Reaſon.

3 Becauſe Mr. Medes Diſtinction (which is the foundation of his whole Opinion) is unſound; yea, if the ground of it be throughly weighed, there is enough in the thing it ſelf, to overthrow the whole building. For whereas Mr. Mede would put a difference betwixt the Holy City and Jeruſalem, making the beginning of the Holy City to be from the time the Temple was finiſhed, but the beginning of Jeruſalem not to be till afterwards; Let it (in anſwer thereunto) be conſidered, That although the Temple, when ſpoken of alone, is called the Holy place, yet is it never called the Holy City, but with a reference ſtill to Jeruſalem. As the City Jeruſalem is no otherwiſe ſaid to be Holy, but as it hath reference to the Temple, the onely place of Gods worſhip being there fixed; ſo cannot the Temple, the place of Gods Holineſſe, be called a Holy City, any otherwiſe then as it hath reference to the City Jeruſalem joyned to it; Both compacted together make up the Holy City, either claiming a ſhare in the name. That it is Holy, is from the Temple; that a City, from Jeruſalem; that a Holy City, from both. And therefore it is obſervable, as Jeruſalem is never in any other Scripture called (unleſſe in a Prophetical way of what ſhould be for future) the Holy City, but ſtill with reference to the Temple fixed in it, ſo do we not find in all Ezra (which Book relates to the time we are upon) ſo much as once mention made of the Holy City, till afterwards in the dayes of Nehemiah, Chap. 11.1.18. which was after Jeruſalem was built, and City, and Temple, now again ſtanding together. Yea whereas the Angel ſaith to Daniel, Seventy weeks are determined upon thy Holy City, what City doth he mean, but that City Daniel had been praying for, which was not the Temple onely, but Jeruſalem with its Temple both together? Now ſeeing that Seventy weeks are determined upon the Holy City, and the Holy City cannot be ſo called from the Temple onely, but Temple and City together, it therefore follows that there can be no other beginning of the Seventy weeks, but what is fetched from the time when Temple and City were again joyned together, ſo making up the Holy City, Daniels Holy City; nor can the duration of the Seventy weeks be any longer then Jeruſalem ſtands with its Temple in it, owned by God for the place of his worſhip; which as it cuts off both Mr. Medes beginning and ending of his Seventy weeks, who begins before the City was built, and ends many years after God had rejected the Temple as the place of his worſhip; So is it a ſtrong Argument againſt any beginning whatſoever that ſhall begin the Seventy weeks any time before City and Temple ſtood together, or ending, that ſhall end them any time after God had rejected the Temple as the place of his worſhip.

4 Becauſe Mr. Medes beginning of the Seventy weeks (take the ſame nakedly in it ſelf, and out foregoing Arguments ſet aſide) appears improbable; For he begins with the ſixth of Darius Nothus, the King under whom (as he ſuppoſeth) the Temple-work was advanced in his ſecond year, and finiſhed in his ſixth. But how improbable is this that Darius Nothus ſhould be the Darius here meant, even from Mr. Medes own Conceſſion, who upon the matter grants us one hundred and thirteen years betwixt the firſt of Cyrus, and the ſixth of Darius Nothus; for, ſaith he, p. 9. the ſixth year of Darius Nothus is concurrent with the three hundred and thirtieth Nabonaſſarean year; but now the firſt year of Cyrus was An. Nabon. two hundred and ſeventeen, as affirms Helvicus (Sir Walter Rauleigh and ſome others go ſeven or eight years higher) which is one hundred and thirteen years, walking by Mr. Medes own rule, and keeping to the loweſt reckoning. Now though the Temple-work was after Cyrus firſt at a ſtand for divers years, yet not for one hundred and thirteen; for conſider, Zerubbabel, who leading Iſrael out of Babylon in the firſt of Cyrus did lay the foundation ſtone, hath a promiſe made to him that he ſhould lay the Top-ſtone, Zech. 4.7, 8, 9. Nay not Zerubbabel onely, but alſo ſome who were ſo antient at the coming out of Babylon, that they had ſeen, and could remember the ſtatelineſſe of the firſt Temple, which was deſtroyed fifty years before Cyrus firſt, by Nebuchadnezzar, were alive in Darius's ſecond year, as is clear, Hag. 2.2, 3. now allowing for the time (which we muſt) of their age when the firſt Temple was deſtroyed (for were they not then of ſome age and judgement too, they could not ſo remember as to judge betwixt the one and the other, viz. the firſt Temple and Second) and adding hereto, the fifty years betwixt the deſtruction of that Temple, and Cyrus firſt, and one hundred and nine, betwixt Cyrus firſt, and Darius Nothus his ſecond year, and the whole upon account cannot amount to leſſe then one hundred and ſeventy years, which age is very improbable.

5 Becauſe Mr. Medes ending of the Seventy weeks not till the time of Jeruſalems deſtruction, is expreſly againſt the ſeveral Characters of the Text, verſ. 24. (which point us to the time where the Seventy weeks are to end, as the words, verſ. 25. point us to the time where they are to begin) as ſhall be made appear in due place. Now beginning and ending both being miſ-placed, the whole muſt needs be weak, yea, altogether falſe.

6 And laſtly, Becauſe Mr. Mede, to confirm and make good this opinion, is conſtrained to lay down (and that in his very foundation) two ſtrange Aſſertions, for either of which the Text it ſelf affords no ſolid bottome, nor any other Scripture ſufficient warrant; and they are,

1 Mr. Mede interprets the Angels words, verſ. 25. Know therefore, and underſtand, that from the going forth of the Command to reſtore and to build Jeruſalem, to have relation not to the beginning of the Seventy weeks, but of the ſixty two weeks, whereas it is moſt evident that the period or time the Angel had ſpoken of in the foregoing verſe (with a determination there of the end) the beginning of which Daniel now ſeeks after, and the Angel declares to him, was the Seventy weeks, not the Sixty two weeks, which is not ſpoken of till afterwards; and therefore its more agreeable to the ſcope of the words, to make the going forth of the Commandement to reſtore and to build Jeruſalem the beginning of the Seventy weeks, then of the Sixty two weeks; to which if they are to be referred, the Angel ſhould point out a period for beginning, before he had told Daniel any thing of the time. Nay, if this Command to build Jeruſalem be not the beginning of the Seventy weeks, then is there not in all the words any expreſſe Head of account for them, for there is no other Head, but this onely, in the words, unleſſe we ſay the Seventy are to be begun from the time of the Viſion, which is as wide from, and as inconſiſtent with Mr. Medes whole Diſcourſe, as any thing can be ſaid. Yea farther obſerve, the Angel layes down this Head of account with great care, that Daniel might not miſtake, Know therefore, and underſtand. Now it is not a thing likely that the Angel ſhould take ſo much care to make us underſtand aright the beginning of the leſſer Period (as Mr. Mede calls it) of the ſixty two weeks, and take no care to point us a beginning for the greater Period of the Seventy weeks, which (as Mr. Mede alſo ſaith) comprehends the other; and therefore by conſequence, if we know not where to begin and end that, the bare knowledge of the other will adde but little to us.

2 Mr. Mede is driven to aſſert the ſeven weeks and the ſixty two weeks, verſ. 25. to be one and the ſame, he reading the words thus, There ſhall be ſevens of weeks, and threeſcore and two weeks; that is (ſaith he) many ſevens of weeks, ſo many as amount to ſixty two weeks of years, there being in ſixty two week, nine times ſeven wanting one, which little want (ſaith he) makes no matter, there being eight whole Sevens beſides in the number, p. 12. So he makes the ſixty two weeks explicatory of the ſeven weeks, and the fame number to be in both, only ſet forth under diverſe expreſſions. But this as it ſeems to be overcurious; ſo Mr. Mede himſelf ſaw ſo many intricacies in aſſerting it, that he confeſſeth p. 14. that could the ſeven weeks be well beſtowed the chiefeſt difficulty were taken off this Propheſie. Nay let me ſay, this cannot be, but only with that ſuppoſition that the ſeventy weeks are one period, and the ſixty two another, which hath been diſproved already. To all the reſt I might adde, that Mr. Medes diſtinction betwixt Solar and Lunar years, which muſt come in to help, or elſe all ſaid will not do, is over-curious, yea groundleſſe, having no firm footing, to warrant ſuch a way of computing either in the Text, or any other Scripture.

The Concluſion is, That Mr. Medes opinion, which begins the ſeventy weeks with the ſixth year of Darius Nothus, is not that which we are to imbrace and cleave to as truth, and the mind of God in this place.

SECT. 4.

A third Decree, or Commandement, we have in Ezra Chap. 7. viz. of Artaxerxes in the ſeventh year of his Reign; But this cannot be the Commandement we are to look at; For neither did it concern the building of the Temple, which work, as to the building, was finiſhed before in the ſixth year of Darius, Ezra. 6.15. nor the building Jeruſalem, whereof not one word is ſpoken. But it was only a Licence given to Ezra, and ſome Jews with him, to go up to Jeruſalem to offer ſacrifice, and if need were to repair the Temple, in caſe of any decay there might be ſince the time the building-work was finiſhed, or otherwiſe to adde ſomething to the work by way of beauty or ornament, which ſeems to be intimated, Ezra 7.27. with a Command moreover to the Treaſurers beyond the River, to furniſh Ezra with monies and other neceſſaries for the expediting hereof; which looks in nothing like the Commandement we are now enquiring after. I might adde, that ſeveral of the Reaſons we have before laid down to diſprove the former opinions, fall with equal force upon this, as might be ſhewed; but I forbear, becauſe the reaſon of the Text lies ſo directly againſt this, that there needs no more to be rehearſed.

There is but one Decree more that any can imagine, and that is of Artaxerxes, in the twentieth year of his Reign, and given forth to Nehemiah; of which we may read Nehem. 2.

Now this (as I conceive) is the Commandement, from the going forth of which, we are to begin this Epock of four hundred and ninety years.

My reaſons are,

1 Becauſe this Commandement came forth in as ſolemn a manner as any of the other. The firſt Decree of Cyrus came forth preſently upon Daniels praying and mourning, ſo doth this upon Nehemiahs, Chap. 1.4, 5. The one hath as ſolemn a riſe, as the other.

2 Reaſon, Becauſe the work that this Decree concerned, was a work in its ſelf as famous every whit as the work of the Temple, as appears, Firſt, By the large deſcription we have left us of the thing, by the Lord himſelf; a whole Book (viz. Nehemiahs) being written in a manner upon this ſubject, in which we have the work, in the parts and circumſtances of it, more exactly laid down then is the work of the Temple in the foregoing Book of Ezra. Secondly, The great oppoſition it met with by enemies, declaring it to be a work wherein Gods cauſe and glory was greatly concerned. Thirdly, The calling of this work, Gods work, Neh. 3.5. and a work in which God did ſo eminently appear in carrying it on, and defending the workmen, that the very enemies themſelves confeſſe the work to be wrought of God, Nehem. 6.16. which conſiderations are ſufficient to ſilence ſome exceptions I have met with, undervaluing this work of Nehemiah, as a private buſineſſe, and a thing too mean to be made the Head of this famous Epock. And indeed I have ſometimes thought, that one reaſon why ſo large a ſtory is left us of this work, might be, becauſe without a knowledge hereof, we could never have found the certain time with which we are to begin Daniels ſeventy weeks, which is a thing of ſo great concernment, as the Head of no one number in Scripture like it.

3 Becauſe this Decree agrees much better to the Angels words, then either the Decree of Cyrus, or any of the other two: For obſerve, the Commandement ſpoken of by the Angel, is a Commandement to reſtore and build Jeruſalem, Know therefore and underſtand, that from the going forth of the Decree to reſtore, and to build Jeruſalem. Yea ſuch a building as ſhould rear up again the ſtreet and walls of Jeruſalem, as the following words ſhew. Now neither of the former Decrees did this, for when Nehemiah firſt thought upon the work, the walls of Jeruſalem were broken down, the Gates burnt with fire, Nehem. 1.3, 4. after the work of building the walls was finiſhed, yet the houſes were not builded, Nehem. 7.1, 4.—the City was large and great, but the people were few therein, and the houſes were not builded. The meaning ſurely is, That notwithſtanding there might be here and there particular houſes in which the people did reſide, yet Jeruſalem as a City with houſes compacted making a ſtreet, was not yet built (which is the thing the Angel mentions to Daniel, to the end we might not look upon the building of ſome particular houſes, to be, in the intent of the Holy Ghoſt, the building of Jeruſalem, but rather reckon it from the time when walls and ſtreet began to be built.) But now in Nehemiahs time both theſe were done, he built the walls of Jeruſalem, and that in ſo ſhort a time as was even a miracle, Nehem. 6.15. and he built the houſes alſo, and Artaxerxes Decree did authorize him to do both theſe, Chap. 2.5, 8. And this was a larger power then ever was given before by any of the precedent Decrees.

4 Becauſe this beginning ſtands reconciled (as our computation of the two thouſand three hundred dayes by virtue of it will make appear) with thoſe Scripture-principles, which require a concurrence in their ends betwixt the two thouſand three hundred dayes, and the one thouſand three hundred thirty five, and alſo the one thouſand two hundred and ſixty dayes, and the one thouſand two hundred and ninety; which all the other beginnings are at variance, and open war with.

What ſhall I ſay more? to make the whole of this long Diſcourſe clear and undoubted, in one word, Conſider, That the Jews had a twofold Reſtoration, and a double building-work; Firſt, A ſpiritual Reſtoration, or a Reſtoration as they were a Church, and a building-work attending that, viz. Of the Temple; Secondly, A Civil Reſtoration, or a Reſtoration as they were a Commonwealth, and a building-work attending that, viz. Of the City Jeruſalem. Both theſe Daniel in his prayer had been pleading for, viz. The Reſtoration of City and Sanctuary. Accordingly, in the anſwer given to him by the Angel, we have a double Command; Firſt, A Command which concerned the firſt only, viz. The Temple-work, which was the Command of Cyrus, and is that Commandement which is ſaid to come forth at the beginning of Daniels ſupplication, verſ. 23. i.e. whilſt Daniel is praying Cyrus enacts this Law, and ſo part of Daniels prayer had a preſent anſwer; Secondly, A Command reſpecting the ſecond, viz. The work of the City and Commonwealth, which is the Commandement to reſtore, and to build Jeruſalem, verſ. 25.—The coming forth of this was to be for future; and (I take it) this latter Commandement hath therefore this particular notation, Of building Jeruſalem, that Daniel, nor we, might not miſtake, and account it the ſame with the other, verſ. 23. Now obſerve, the Angel fixing the Head of the ſeventy weeks upon the Command for building Jeruſalem, it is a clear Argument that we are to begin the ſeventy weeks with the Jews Civil Reſtoration, not their Spiritual.

The Concluſion therefore is, That the Commandement from the going forth, of which we are to begin our four hundred and ninety years, is the Commandement of Artaxerxes to Nehemiah, in the twentieth year of his Reign.

Thus much as touching our beginning of this famous Epock of Daniels ſeventy weeks, or four hunddred and ninety years.

SECT. 5.

Having found out the beginning of Daniels ſeventy weeks; our next Enquiry muſt be where we ſhall end them.

Worthy Mr. Mede (with whom we have been contending already about the beginning) is of opinion that we are to end the ſeventy weeks with the deſtruction of Jeruſalem; But having before proved his Beginning to be falſe, his End muſt neceſſarily be ſo too. And indeed, the moſt of our Reaſons, but the three firſt eſpecially, laid down to diſprove his beginning, do lye as ſtrongly againſt this end, take the ſame, as it is aſſerted by him, or any other.

But that which here I ſhall farther adde, is, That this ending of the ſeventy weeks is altogether repugnant to the Text, which points us to another ending point, viz. the death of the Meſsiah; as the evident Characters in the Text declare.

1 CHARACTER. The ſeventy weeks are determined upon Daniels Holy City. Seventy weeks are determined upon thy Holy City; therefore to be extended no farther then the time that Jeruſalem remained the Holy City. But now Jeruſalem (as I have obſerved before) remained the Holy City no longer then God did own the Temple in it as the only place of his worſhip; and this was onely till the Death of Chriſt, the Meſſiah; after which the veil of the Temple is rent in twain, the Jewiſh Sacrifice and Oblation ceaſeth, Neither in this Mountain, nor in Jeruſalem ſhall men now any longer (i. e. excluding other places, as it was all the time of the Law) worſhip the Father.

2 CHARACTER. The ſeventy weeks are there to end where the Jews tranſgreſſions are finiſhed, or come to the full. Seventy weeks are determined upon thy people, and upon thy Holy City, to finiſh the tranſgreſſion. But this was done in the crucifying the Lord of life, for then did the Jews fill up the meaſure of their Fathers, as is evident from that Parable Matth. 21.33. to the end; firſt the ſervants of the Lord of the Vineyard are killed, verſ. 35.36. Thus were the Prophets one after another by their Fore-fathers. But laſt of all (ſaith Chriſt) The Lord of the Vineyard ſends his Son, ſaying, They will reverence my Son, verſ. 37. But theſe wicked Husbandmen kill him likewiſe, verſ. 38. hereupon tranſgreſſions are come to the full, the Lord of the Vineyard miſerably deſtroyes theſe wicked men, and lets out his Vineyard to other Husbandmen, verſ. 40.41. And what can better evidence tranſgreſſions being now come to the full, then this? the chief Heads of the Jews, and the popularity, with one mouth crying out, when the ſentence of condemnation was paſſing upon Chriſt, His blood be upon us, and our children, invoking hereby Heaven for judgement and deſtruction upon themſelves and their poſterity; yea it is yet more evident that tranſgreſſions at this day were come to the full, becauſe, though ſome particular perſons, upon the wonderfull miracles of Chriſts Reſurrection, ſending down the Spirit, and the preaching of the word of the Goſpel hereupon ſent forth among them, did afterwards come in and imbrace this Chriſt; yet never had the body of the Nation, nor their Rulers from that day forwards hearts ſo much as to acknowledge their moſt wicked fact, much leſſe repent them of it.

A third, fourth, and fifth CHARACTERS. The ſeventy weeks are then to expire when an end was made of ſin, reconciliation made for iniquity, everlaſting righteouſneſſe brought in.

Seventy weeks are determined to make an end of ſins, and to make reconciliation for iniquity, and to bring in everlaſting Righteouſneſſe: But all this was eminently done in the day of Chriſts ſufferings when he gave up the Ghoſt, ſaying, It is finiſhed.

The Concluſion is, That we are to end Daniels ſeventy weeks with the Paſſion of Chriſt.

SECT. 6.

Unto the fore-going Opinion, which ends the ſeventy weeks with the Paſſion of Chriſt, doth excellently accord the ſeven weeks, and the ſixty two weeks in the following verſe (which Mr. Mede confeſſeth to be the greateſt knot in this Propheſie) the difficulty hereby being wholly taken off, and thereby our opinion as touching the ending of the ſeventy weeks confirmed.

But ere this can be made appear, it will be neceſſary that the knot concerning the ſeven weeks be untied.

Four opinions (beſides that of Mr. Medes, whereof mention was made before) there are of theſe ſeven weeks, neither of which can I receive.

1 The firſt is, that which would have the ſeven weeks to be weeks of dayes, and the ſixty two weeks, weeks of yeers; the meaning of the opinion is, That the dayes of the ſeven weeks ſhould be underſtood of Natural dayes, a day conſiſting of four and twenty hours, but in the ſixty two, of Prophetical dayes, a day for a year, and accordingly it would have theſe ſeven weeks to bee meant of the two and fifty dayes, wherein the Wall of Jeruſalem was finiſhed, Neh. 6.15. which (ſaith the Author) though they are indeed ſomewhat more then ſeven weeks, yet ſhort of ſeven and a half, and ſo not to be regarded in account of weeks.

But this cannot be,

1 Becauſe It is againſt all Scripture accounts, yea reaſon it ſelf, to conceive that in one and the ſame Epock of ſeventy weeks, we ſhould (without any compelling reaſon from the Text ſo to do) interpret ſome of the weeks of dayes Natural, ſome of dayes Prophetical.

2 Becauſe The Angel aſſigns no proper work to the ſeven weeks, as diſtinct from the ſixty two, no reaſon therefore wee ſhould. Nay, in caſe we ſo do, its more conſonant to the Angels words to attribute the building of Jeruſalem, with its Wall, to the ſixty two weeks, then to the ſeven weeks; For ſaith the Angel, Sixty two weeks the ſtreet ſhall be built again, and the wall, even in trouble ſome times.

2 A ſecond opinion (and the moſt common) is, That which makes the ſeven weeks the Period of time the ſecond Temple was building, and the ſixty two weeks the time thence to Chriſt, in which time Jeruſalem was again built, and inhabited.

Anſ. This cannot I ſubſcribe,

1 Becauſe it ſuppoſeth ſeven weeks of the ſeventy to be expired before Jeruſalem began to be built, whereas I have already proved at large the ſeventy weeks are to take beginning thence. The very foundation therefore of this opinion is a miſtake as to the beginning of the ſeventy weeks.

2 Becauſe it is a thing that cannot be proved from the teſtimony of any clear undeniable Scripture, that the ſecond Temple was in building ſeven weeks, i.e. nine and forty years. As for that, John 2.20. Forty and ſix years was this Temple in building, which place ſome make interpretative of Daniels ſeven weeks, ſuppoſing the Temple to be perfected in the ſeventh week, towards the end, or about the middle of it, which will agree well to ſix and forty yeers; Not to ſay, In caſe the thing were ſo, that the words can have no relation to Daniels ſeventy weeks, the ſeventy weeks not beginning (as I have proved) till after the Temple-work was finiſhed;

My Anſwer is, That it is a thing doubted among good men, whether theſe words have any relation at all to Zerubbabels Temple, or not; for ſome conceive they relate to Solomons Temple, which computing from the time David made preparation for the building thereof, till the ſame by Solomon was finiſhed, amounts to about ſix and forty years; But others, with more reaſon, and likelihood of truth, refer them to the Temple Herod built, who (to ingratiate himſelf with the Jews) pulled down the former Temple Zerubbabel had built, building, inſtead thereof, another more large, rich and ſumptuous Temple (as is teſtified by Joſephus, Antiq. lib. 15. Cap. 14.) which Temple was the Temple then ſtanding; And this work (as Dr. Lightfoot in his Harmony of the four Evangeliſts upon the Text, proveth) had been in hand exactly ſix and forty years before the time Chriſt and the Jews had this Diſcourſe, the probability of which opinion (conſidering the Jews ſpake of a Temple that was, not that had been) weighs down, in my opinion, all others. But if yet any do adhere to the opinion of Zerubbabels Temple, and accordingly ſet this Scripture againſt my Argument, let them (which they muſt) produce ſome Scripture ſpeaking the thing that Zerubbabels Temple is here meant; till that is done, we are in uncertainties, and an uncertain ground is too weak to prove a thing, or diſprove the contrary.

And indeed learned men generally ſeem not in the preſent caſe to lay much weight upon this Text; for thoſe, on the one hand, who conceive the ſecond Temple was finiſhed in the ſixth year of Darius Hyſtaſpes, reckon not half ſix and forty years, betwixt Cyrus his firſt, and Hyſtaſpes ſixth year: And thoſe, on the other, who judge the work was not finiſhed untill the ſixth of Darius Nothus, reckon between the firſt of Cyrus, and the ſixth of Nothus, above twice ſix and forty years: Yet is not this Text judged by either to have that weight in it, as to make them alter their opinions.

Alſted (in Chronologia Monarchiae Perſarum) would find out a way to uphold this opinion, viz. That Zerubbabels Temple was ſix and forty years in building, and yet will not have the compleat finiſhing of the work to be till the ſixth year of Darius Nothus, which (according to his account) reckoning from the ſecond year of Cyrus, when the foundation was laid, was one hundred and eleven years. But to do this he reckons only the time they were building, leaving out the time the work was at a ſtay. But as it is a moſt unlikely thing, that the Jews, being ſo conſiderable a company, as was that company that came up from Babylon, and attending wholly to this work, ſhould ſpend ſix and forty years inthe meer building-work, who afterwards in Nehemiahs time did in two and fifty dayes build the whole walls of Jeruſalem, Neh. 6.15. So is it as unlikely (which yet Alſted to make good his opinion ſuppoſeth) that thoſe enemies of Judah ſhould ſit ſtill, and ſuffer the work quietly to go on, without intermedling in the leaſt to their prejudice, ſix and thirty years together, viz. all the time of Darius Hyſtaſpes, who at other times were ready and active, whenſoever they ſaw the work on foot, to hinder it.

To ſay no more, the whole of the opinion is made up of meer ſuppoſitions; As firſt, That the Darius, Ezra 4.5. is Hyſtaſpes. Secondly, That the Jews did build all the time of his Reign. Thirdly, That Ahaſuerus, Ezra 4.6. and Artaxerxes, verſ. 7. were two divers perſons. Fourthly That Ahaſuerus was Xerxes the Great. Fifthly, That in the beginning of his Reign the Templework was ſtopped, which yet went on again in the ſix laſt years of his Reign. Sixthly, That the Artaxerxes, Ezra 4.7. was Longimanus, who throughout his Reign, forty years together, hindered the work. Seventhly, That Darius, who in his ſecond year ſet the work on foot, bringing it to perfection in his ſixth, was Darius Nothus; never an one of all which can be proved by any clear Scripture, yet not one of them but is and muſt be ſuppoſed, to make good this opinion.

Let the Reader therefore judge what probability is in it; And alſo by the way take notice, to learn hence never to take up things upon truſt; what a do is made, by not a ſew, to prove a thing that is not, or at leaſt that cannot be made appear to be? to prove Zerubbabels Temple was ſix and forty years in building, becauſe it is ſaid, Six and forty years was this Temple in building; whereas indeed, if we follow the opinion to the heels, it cannot be proved that Zerubbabels Temple is there ſpoken of. Could any demonſtrative Text be brought to prove that, it would then be worth while to look after the ſix and forty years, but to ſpend time about it, while the main Queſtion is begged, is but loſt labour.

3 A third opinion there is of theſe ſeven weeks, which makes them to be the term of time Jeruſalems Wall and City was building, which was nine and forty years (ſaith the Author of it) reckoning from the firſt of Cyrus to the two and thirtieth of Artaxerxes, when Nehemiah having finiſhed the whole work returneth again to the King, Neh. 13.6.

But this cannot be,

1 Becauſe what I have already ſaid in my ſecond Reaſon, in anſwer to the firſt opinion, lies with the ſame weight againſt this.

2 Becauſe the building of Jeruſalem was no part of Cyrus Decree (as formerly I have proved) which yet this opinion ſuppoſeth; yea the whole ſtreſſe of it lyes upon the neck of this ſuppoſition.

3 Becauſe in beginning the ſeven ſo high, it doth alſo begin the ſeventy weeks as high as Cyrus, which is an error.

4 Becauſe the Author fails greatly in point of Chronologie, whilſt he accounts but nine and forty years betwixt Cyrus firſt, and Nehemiah's Artaxerxes two and thirtieth year, which upon a due examination (when we ſhall come to it) will appear to be many more.

4 There is yet another opinion alſo of theſe ſeven weeks (not much differing from that I named laſt) viz. That theſe ſeven weeks are the time Jeruſalem, with the reſt of the Cities of Judah were building and repairing.

But this cannot ſtand, becauſe of our ſecond Reaſon, laid down in anſwer to the firſt opinion, which batters this alſo; and alſo becauſe, the very foundation of it is neither Scripture, nor Story, but pure and meer conjecture, as Maſter Mede proveth, who oppoſeth himſelf to this opinion. Daniels Weeks, page 15.

What hath been hitherto ſaid by way of Anſwer to each, is ſufficient to ſhew the inconſiſtency of all thoſe opinions, with the words, which make the ſeven weeks one time, the ſixty two another, aſſigning ſeveral works to the ſeveral times.

Seeing therefore none of theſe can ſtand, nor the fore-mentioned conjecture of Mr. Mede, I ſhall now lay down what I conceive of the Text, reading the word thus, with an alteration of the ſtops onely, Know therefore, and underſtand, that from the going forth of the Commandement to reſtore, and to build Jeruſalem, unto the Meſſiah the Prince, ſhall be ſeven weeks, and ſixty two weeks, the ſtreet ſhall be built again, and the wall, even in troublous times. The meaning is, That from the time the command to build Jeruſalem ſhould go forth, untill the appearance of the Meſſiah, ſhould be ſixty nine weeks; all which time, notwithſtanding the great troubles and overturnings that within it ſhould be in the world, through the tranſlation of the Monarchy from the Medes and Perſians to the Grecians, and from them to the Romans (all which fell out within this time) and the diſtractions of particular Kingdomes, and the great oppoſition that ſhould be made againſt the Jews; yet ſuch ſhould Gods care of, and his providence over his people be, in this ſo mighty a hurly burly, and commotion of Nations, and particular oppoſitions made againſt them, as that in deſpight of all, Jeruſalem throughout this troublous time ſhould continue building and built. And ſo obſerve, the words, as they ſet forth the length of the time from the day Jeruſalem ſhould begin to be built, untill the Meſſiahs appearance, ſo do they include within them a ſweet and gracious promiſe of the care God would have of his people, through and amiuſt all theſe toſſings, untill the Meſſiah ſhould appear, they ſhould ſtill be preſerved one way or other, who ever went to wrack; and this notably anſwers to Daniels prayer, being a bleſſed quieting of his ſpirit, and to the event alſo. And indeed, one principal thing that makes this place ſo knotty, is in a manner but a trifle, viz. making a half point betwixt the ſeven weeks, and the ſixty two weeks, where none ſhould be made, and neglecting a Coma at the end of the ſixty two weeks, where for the more eaſie underſtanding of the words its requiſite one ſhould be.

Now, as for the Reaſon why the ſeventy weeks, which firſt are mentioned whole, verſ. 24. are afterwards broken into parts, I conceive it to be this onely, That hereby the myſtery of this Propheſie might be the greater, and the time the harder to compute, which otherwiſe (the Head of the ſeventy once found) would have had no difficulty in it; therefore, that the myſtery might be ſo much the greater, we have the ſeventy weeks, which are firſt mentioned whole, broken into three parts, two ſmaller, and one greater, which are expreſſed ſeverally; firſt, ſeven weeks, then ſixty two weeks, then one week, verſ. 27. and that too in ſuch a manner, as if the ſeven weeks had relation to one thing, the ſixty two to another, the one, to another; whereas it is not ſo, but all put together make up but that ſeventy we had before, and ſerve to point us to the time of our Saviours Paſſion, which is ſaid, verſ. 26. to be after ſixty two weeks, that is, ſixty two added to the other ſeven, making ſixty nine; then, viz. at the end of ſixty nine weeks, in the beginning of the ſeventieth, is our Redeemer anointed to his work: Hence that Character of the ſeventy weeks, verſ. 24. Seventy weeks are determined to anoint the moſt Holy. This day of his anointing, is the day of his appearance to Iſrael; being anointed, he goes forth the reſt of that ſeventieth week, till the time of his Death, preaching the Goſpel, doing good, healing thoſe that were ſick, caſting out Devils, &c. And this I conceive to be the thing meant by his confirming the Covenant with many for one week, verſ. 27. And indeed this agrees excellently well to that of Paul, Rom. 15.8. Now I ſay, that Jeſus Chriſt was a Miniſter of the Circumciſion for the truth of God, to confirm the promiſes made unto the Fathers. Chriſt himſelf by his own preaching muſt confirm the Covenant made with the Fathers, which (ſaith the Apoſtle) is the reaſon why he was made a Miniſter of the Circumciſion, i.e. a Miniſter under the Law. Now this he did in the beginning of the ſeventieth week, going about preaching the ſpace of three years, and but three, as is clear, Luke 13.32, 33. And this was till towards the middle of the week (i.e. till four years before the four hundred and ninety were fully expired) at which time he was cut off, which I take to be the meaning of thoſe words, In the midſt of one week ſhall he cauſe the ſacrifice and the oblation to ceaſe, verſ. 27. i.e. Chriſts Death which fell out, not in the end, but in the middle of the laſt and ſeventieth week, did put an end to all the Jewiſh Sacrifices and Worſhip; the Great Paſſcover being ſlain, all other Sacrifices terminate in him.

And indeed that Chriſts Paſſion muſt neceſſarily fall out about the middle of the ſeventieth week, is clear, becauſe the Text ſpeaks poſitively that it ſhould be but ſeven weeks, and ſixty two weeks, i.e. ſixty nine weeks, untill the Meſſiah ſhall appear; So ſoon therefore as ever the ſixty nine weeks were at an end, and the ſeventieth but begun, we muſt of neceſſity conclude the Meſſiah did appear, for otherwiſe it ſhould be upwards of ſixty nine weeks to his appearance. Now the thing which will make all clear is, what we are to underſtand by his Appearance. We may not underſtand his Birth; for if ſo, then he not being put to death till he was four and thirty years old, which ſpace of time contains almoſt five of Daniels weeks, it ſhould be ſeventy three, or ſeventy four weeks to the cutting off of the Meſſiah, whereas the Text tells us he is cut off after ſixty nine weeks, or after ſeven weeks, and ſixty two weeks, which make ſixty nine.

I have in my Key, Theſ. 57. pitched upon the time of his Baptiſme, but not ſo conſiderately, for though his Appearance then was to John Baptiſt, and ſome few Diſciples whom he choſe, yet did he not till afterwards appear publickly.

This Appearance of his, I do therefore conceive (following herein the learned Mede) is to be reckoned from that time in which he begun to preach publickly to the Nation of the Jews, declaring himſelf to be the Meſſiah, which was (as Mr. Mede hath well noted) after his Harbinger John had now finiſhed his meſſage, and was caſt into priſon, which circumſtance of time is preciſely noted in the Evangelical ſtory, and the place alſo where he began his preaching, Mark. 1.14. After John was put in priſon Jeſus came into Galilee, preaching the Goſpel of the Kingdome of God, and ſaying, The time is fulfilled, i.e. (ſaith Mr. Mede) the laſt week of the ſixty two weeks is now come, Matth. 4.12. compared with 17. This is the very time and place whence Peter reckoned the beginning of Chriſt's Prophecie in his Sermon to Cornelius, Act. 10.37. That word which was publiſhed throughout all Judaea, and began from Galilee, after the Baptiſm which John preached. And which is an evidence that this was the time of his anointing by his Father, Luke tells us Chap. 4.18, 19, 20, 21. That when he firſt opened the Book to teach the people in Nazareth of Galilee, he opened upon that place, The Spirit of the Lord is upon me, becauſe he hath anointed me to preach the Goſpel to the poor; Upon which Text our Saviour himſelf Comments, verſ. 21. This day is this Scripture fulfilled in your ears; as if hee ſhould ſay, This day is Daniels ſeventieth week begun, now is the Meſſiah anointed; from this time (which according to Mr. Mede was a full year after Chriſts Baptiſm) we are to reckon thoſe three dayes or years, Luke 13.32, 33. To this opinion the ſeveral Paſſeovers betwixt Chriſts Baptiſm and Death, do beſt accord, which in caſe the Principle were as demonſtrable, as it is received and owned by good men, that of the Paſſeovers alone doth neceſſarily infer that four years muſt paſſe betwixt his Baptiſm and Death.

This opinion, though it differs from what I have laid down in my Key, yet is it ſo far from deſtroying my Harmony, that it ſuits it better then that doth; for by the addition of this year, the two thouſand three hundred dayes, and the one thouſand three hundred thirty five, do both fall at the end of the year one thouſand ſeven hundred and one; but according to the Computation there laid down, one falls at the beginning of the aforeſaid year, the other at the end. This being ſo, let it be conſidered how long it was betwixt Chriſts beginning to preach, and his Paſſion, none will ſay it was ſeven years, the forequoted Text, Luke 13. ſhews it to be but three. And this no way repugns to Daniels half week; for the Scripture is not ſo curious in dividing as to go to the exactneſſe of a half week, it is ſufficient that there is the half of the years contained in the week, though ſome few months be wanting: And therefore well and conſiderately did, our Tranſlators render the half of the week, by the midſt of the week, which phraſe mollifie the rigor of Diviſion, and helps to remove the ſcruple that might otherwiſe ariſe through the want that there is, in this diviſion, of ſome few months. Now I ſay, Chriſt from the day of his anointing, which was at the very end of the ſixty ninth week, and in the beginning of the ſeventieth, preaching but three years, and then being crucified, it neceſſarily follows, that his Paſſion muſt bee, not at the end, but in the midſt of the week, which week too can be no other then the ſeventieth and laſt. And therefore (as I have obſerved in my Key) it is ſaid, verſ. 26. after threeſcore and two weeks (i.e. ſixty two added to the ſeventy, making ſixty nine) ſhall the Meſſiah be cut off, and not after ſeventy weeks, becauſe Chriſts ſufferings came upon him before the ſeventieth week was fully and compleatly expired.

And upon theſe reaſons I have concluded in my Key, Theſ. 57. that we are not to account upon ſo many years fully as there are dayes in ſeventy weeks, but to deduct four out of the ſeventieth and laſt week, becauſe Chriſts ſufferings (which are the point where the ſeventy weeks expire) fell out to be in the very cloſe of the third day or year of the ſeventieth and laſt week.

And indeed it is an Argument of Gods ſpecial care, that he ſhould leave in this Propheſie, ſuch clear hints, to prove that we are to cut off four years of the 70th week, without which wee ſhould have run on to the end of it, and ſo computed four years more then we ought; which, beſides the breach that hereby would be made in Chronology, would have made this Prophecie irreconcileable with the reports of the ſeveral Evangeliſts as touching the time that paſſed betwixt Chriſts Anointing and Paſſion.

Object. But it is ſaid, verſ. 27. He ſhall confirm the Covenant with many for one Week; Which one week can bee no other but the ſeventieth and laſt; for it is ſpoken of as a week diſtinct from the ſeven weeks, and the ſixty two weeks; If therefore after ſixty nine weeks are paſſed, one week is ſpent in confirming the Covenant, then muſt we needs place the Death of Chriſt, which was his laſt and ſealing act, not in the midſt, but in the end of the ſeventieth week.

Anſw. Not ſo, for under the Phraſe, One week, is not comprehended the whole week, but the half onely; and this is clear from the next words, in the midſt of the week ſhall he cauſe the Sacrifice, and Oblation to ceaſe. In the midſt of what week? Anſ. Of the one week, therefore Chriſt's Death muſt fall in the midſt or half (though not the exact half) of the one week; and if ſo, muſt not be brought down to the end of that week. If it be ſaid, The half week is to be underſtood of the latter half, and that it is the error of the Tranſlators, which renders the half of the week, by the middeſt of the week, for it may as well bee taken for the latter half, as the former. To that I anſwer; If ſo, then doubtleſſe the Angel would have ſaid in the end of the week, and not in the half of the week; for the one is a proper phraſe, the other improper; the one leaves the thing without ſcruple, the other leaves a knot where none would look for any; for who would ever imagine, that the Angel, whilſt hee ſpeaks of a half of the week, ſhould mean the end. Nay, it cannot be otherwiſe, but that that which is here called one week, muſt bee the former half only, and no more, for this reaſon, becauſe the work to bee done in the one week, is confirming the Covenant.

Now this confirming the Covenant, being the higheſt act of Chriſt, as hee was a Miniſter of the Circumciſion, it neceſſarily follows, that Chriſt could do this no longer then within that time that he was laying out himſelf in his Miniſterial Function.

This confirming the Covenant cannot therefore be a work of ſeven years durance (which muſt bee, if wee take the one week for a full week) but of three only, which agrees well to half of a week, and (for what I have ſaid before) the former half.

If any be curious to know the reaſon why it ſhould bee called, One week, and yet but half a week only meant thereby?

Anſw. It is with reſpect to the ſeventy weeks, ſixty nine of which hee had already reckoned in two parts, firſt ſeven weeks, then ſixty two; now becauſe the ſeventieth week, which in the groſſe ſumme was reckoned, had not yet in the parts been mentioned, hee therefore now brings that in, calling it one week, yet with laying down ſuch Cautions and Conſiderations, as that wee may well perceive, this one week, though called a week (with a reſpect to the other weeks of the ſeventy, that it is in the groſſe ſum conjoyned with) is not indeed to bee underſtood of a whole week, but the firſt half only.

Object. But if the cutting off of the Meſſiah bee in the middle of the week, how then are there ſeventy weeks determined on the Holy City?

For anſwer. Mr. Mede hath a Notion concerning this, worthy to be written in Letters of gold; Onely he applies it to his opinion, viz. That the ſeventy weeks are to end with the deſtruction of Jeruſalem. So much as concerns that I ſhall alter in reciting it. The Notion ſpeaks thus; It ſhould be obſerved (though it uſeth not ſo to be) that the Angel reckons not by ſingle years, but by weeks; If he had ſaid there ſhould be four hundred and ninety years to the Paſſion of Chriſt, then indeed to make good the prediction, Chriſt muſt have ſuffered in the laſt year: But when he ſayes it ſhall bee ſeventy weeks, it is enough if ſo be Chriſt ſuffer in the ſeventieth week. For if thoſe who reckon by years, if the year deſigned anſwers the event, will not ſtand upon the compleatneſſe of months and dayes; nor thoſe who reckon by dayes, upon the compleatneſſe of hours and minutes; no more in the Angels reckoning here by weeks, if ſo be the number of the weeks be compleat, are the parts of a week to be exacted. Seeing therefore the Text is clear, that the Meſſiah is to bee cut off in the ſeventieth week, it matters not as to the making up of ſeventy weeks, though the thing were done in the middle of the week; for ſufficient it is, that the ſame is done in the ſeventieth week.

Thus the ſundry great knots, as touching the ſeven weeks, the ſixty two weeks, the one week, and the half week, are all untied by this opinion, which ends the ſeventy weeks with the Paſſion of Chriſt, which no other opinion in a way agreeable to the Text, other Scriptures, yea reaſon it ſelf, either hath done, or can do.

By this therefore we are yet farther confirmed in our foregoing Poſition, viz. That we are, with the Paſſion of our dear Lord and Saviour, to end Daniels Seventy Weeks.

SECT. 7.

Object. But againſt this our ending of the ſeventy weeks, it may be objected, viz. That the ſeventy weeks cannot end with the Paſſion of Chriſt, becauſe it is manifeſt from ſundry expreſſions in the Text, that the very Propheſie looks farther, and treats of things that relate to another time; For verſ. 26. mention is made of the deſtruction of Jeruſalem, both City and Sanctuary, which was performed many years after Chriſts death by Titus Veſpaſian, The people of the Prince that ſhall come ſhall deſtroy the City and Sanctuary, and the end thereof ſhall bee with a Flood. Yea the following words in the very ſame verſe, Unto the end of the War deſolations are determined, relate to a time much lower, according to the Expoſition I my ſelf have given of them, Key, Theſ. 17. Yea likewiſe thoſe words verſe 27. For the overſpreading of abominations bee ſhall make it deſolate, even untill the conſummation, and that determined ſhall bee powred upon the deſolate, muſt needs relate to the very laſt times, in which the Jews, who for crucifying and rejecting the Lord of Glory, were given up of God to remain a deſolate, forſaken people, untill the Conſummation, or the time of the end, ſhall bee again received into favour, and reſtored under Chriſt to greater Liberty and Glory then ever. Therefore muſt not the ſeventy weeks end as before, but bee extended to ſome farther time.

Anſw. The foregoing Expreſſions, though they come within the compaſſe of the Viſion, yet not within the compaſſe of the ſeventy weeks; or thus, Though they are a part of the words of the Prophecie, yet are they no part of the ſeventy weeks; that is, They do not relate to things done within this time, but things to bee done afterwards, when the ſeventy weeks ſhould bee expired. For obſerve, The Angel having informed Daniel, that after ſeven weeks, and ſixty two weeks (i. e. ſixty nine) to bee reckoned from the going forth of the Command to reſtore and to build Jeruſalem, the Meſſiah ſhould appear, who having confirmed the Covenant part of the ſeventieth week, ſhould in the middeſt of that week bee cut off, by which Death of his, hee ſhould put an end to the Moſaical worſhip, &c. Hee now goes on relating farther, what ſhould befall the Jewes hereupon, even untill their laſt Reſtoration, not any longer ſpeaking of things as referring to the ſeventy weeks (to the end of which hee was come already) but as ſuiting the former Diſcourſe, and alſo anſwering Daniels deſire, which was, to know the final iſſue of things concerning his own people; and therefore the Angel tells him, that the Meſſiah being cut off, the Jews City and Sanctuary ſhould thereupon be deſtroyed, the body of their Nation bee made deſolate, in which deſolate, forlorn, unchurched condition, they ſhould remain even unto the time of the end, when Chriſt notwithſtanding all their unkindneſſe to him, would yet make himſelf known unto them, taking that poor deſolate people into his arms and favour again; and this laſt of their Reſtoration ſeems to mee to bee the thing hinted in the very laſt words of the Prophecie, and that determined ſhall bee poured upon the deſolate, i.e. (as I conceive, otherwiſe nothing at all is here ſpoken of their Reſtoration) That determined One, viz. the Chriſt, the Meſiah, the determined time of whoſe firſt coming was ſeventy weeks, and who accordingly at the end of that time did come, was cut off by the Jews, Jeruſälem for this deſtroyed, they made deſolate, unchurched, untill the conſummation, ſhall in the conſummation, or in the time of the end, bee poured upon the deſolate, that is, reveal himſelf unto, pour out his Spirit upon, this deſolate Nation, who now ſhall ſee and confeſſe, that that act of their Fore-fathers in crucifying Chriſt, was indeed the cutting off of their Meſſiah, or that determined One promiſed to them at the end of ſeventy weeks.

Thus though the Propheſie it ſelf brings us as low as Chriſts ſecond coming, yet are not the ſeventy weeks to be brought down thither; but we are to end them, as before, with the Paſſion of Chriſt; and whatſoever expreſſions have a farther look, we are to interpret them not as having a reſpect to the ſeventy weeks (which are compleat without them) but as ſpoken to this end, to give Daniel information how the caſe ſhould ſtand with his people, between the time of their rejection for the cutting off of the Meſſiah (where ends the ſeventy weeks) and their Reſtoration.

Thus much as touching Daniels Seventy Weeks.
CHAP. III. Wherein Inquiry is made into the number of the Years that paſſed betwixt the firſt of Cyrus, and the twentieth of Artaxerxes, when Nehemiah received his Commiſſion to build Jeruſalem.
SECT. 1.

HAving in the fore-going Chapter found out the true beginning and ending of Daniels ſeventy weeks, it now remains, That we enquire into the number of the years that paſſed from Cyrus firſt, unto the twentieth of that Artaxerxes when Nehemiah went up to Jeruſalem with Commiſſion to build it.

And the more is this peece of our way to be heeded, becauſe Chronologers themſelves differ no leſſe then above a hundred years, ſome from others, in computing this time; and a hundred years loſt or gained is no little matter.

I ſhall therefore, as hitherto I have done, ſo in this alſo, make Scripture-Text compared and laid together my chief rule; ſhewing what probabilities I have from the Scripture it ſelf for the thing which I aſſert; and by thoſe examining others opinions, chuſing or refuſing upon no other account.

To come therefore to the Queſtion.

Queſt. What number of years are we to account upon betwixt the firſt of Cyrus, and the twentieth of Artaxerxes?

Anſ. It is the opinion of Dr. Lightfoot in his Harmony of the Old Teſtament (whom I am neceſſitated for truths ſake here to mention by name (as Mr. Mede before) becauſe I can neither bring forth his ſtrength, nor my own, without references to the Author) that we are to reckon upon ſeven and thirty years onely, which by him are laid down thus, viz. Cyrus three, Artaxerxes Ahaſuerus fourteen, Artaxerxes Darius twenty, the whole is ſeven and thirty.

But though I much value the learning and judgement of the Author; yet cannot I conclude with him in this.

1 Becauſe the allowance of ſo few years to this Period, can never (unleſſe new Heads, agreeable to Scripture and Reaſon, be found out for each ſeveral number) cauſe a concurrence in ends betwixt the two thouſand three hundred dayes, and the one thouſand three hundred thirty five; the one thouſand two hundred and ſixty dayes, and the one thouſand two hundred and ninety, which upon the account of the Reaſons laid down in my Key, Theſ. 17. and Theſ. 34. muſt be.

2 Becauſe the ſeveral ſuppoſitions upon which this opinion is built, are not onely in themſelves uncertain, but even inconſiſtent with other parts of the Scripture Hiſtory, and Right-reaſon. And therefore of neceſſity the foundation being ſandy, muſt the opinion fall.

Now the things by Dr. Lightfoot ſuppoſed, which are bottome for this opinion, are theſe.

1 That Artaxerxes Ahaſuerus, mentioned Ezra 4.6, 7. was Son and next Succeſſor in the Perſian Monarchy to Cyrus. Aſſerted in his Chronicle upon the Book of Heſther.

2 That this Artaxerxes Ahaſuerus reigned but fourteen yeers in all. Aſſerted upon Heſther 10.

3 That Darius, in the ſixth of whoſe Reign the Temple-work was finiſhed Ezra 6.15. and Artaxerxes, in the ſeventh of whoſe Reign Ezra went up to Jeruſalem, Ezra 7.1, 7. and Nehemiah afterwards in the twentieth, Nehem. 2. was one and the ſame perſon under two names. In the Chronicle upon Ezra, Chap. 6. Chap. 7. Chap. 9, 10.

4 That it was the compleat number of ſeventy years from the time that Nebuch •• nezzar deſtroyed the firſt Temple, untill Darius ſecond year, in which the building of the ſecond was advanced. In the Chronicle upon Heſther. 10.

5 That Ezra was Son to that Serajah the High Prieſt, whom Nebuchadnezzar ſlew at the time the firſt Temple was deſtroyed, 2 King. 25.18, 22. and therefore muſt neceſſarily be born before the deſtruction of Solomons Temple; which being fifty years before Cyrus firſt, and Ezra being ſo active now in the dayes of Artaxerxes, it cannot agree to his age and activity, that the time betwixt Cyrus firſt, and Artaxerxes twenty, ſhould be long. Upon Ezra 7.

6 That the deſign of the Holy Ghoſt in the Books of Ezra and Nehemiah is to give us a Chronicle of the Porſian Kings. Upon Nohemiah p. 204.

Theſe Six Particulars, which I finde here and there ſcattered in Doctor Light-foot, and have for the better diſcuſſing of the thing put them into this order, will upon a due examination be all of them found too light.

1 Particular, That Artaxerxes Ahaſuerus was next ſucceſſor to Cyrus.

Anſ. This is a thing very unlikely; 1. Becauſe Cyrus Son being ſo deadly an enemy to the Iews, as that he by his power did put a ſtop to the work of the Temple, his Father yet living (as is by Doctor Light-foot himſelf, p. 190. and others aſſirmed) we cannot conceive the Iews would attempt to build whilſt he was alive; or put caſe they ſhould, there would be no need of writing Letters to this wicked wretch, and in them coyning falſe accuſations to cauſe the work to ceaſe, (as the Adverſaries do to Artaxerxes) for he of himſelf was, and would have been ready enough to hinder the work.

2 The very Circumſtances of the Text argue this Artaxerxes to have been at a further diſtance from Cyrus then his immediate Succeſſor; for, 1. He ſeems to have been a very ſtranger to the ſtate of the Iewiſh affairs, and therefore receiving Letters about them, cauſeth the Chronicles to be ſearched, Ezra 4.19. to finde what manner of people the Iews had been: now it is not likely that Cyrus Son ſhould be ſuch a ſtranger to this People, their State, and Affairs, whom his Father knew ſo well, and he ſucceeding his Father (according to Doctor Light-foot) after his Father had reigned three years. 2. He ſeems likewiſe to have been altogether unacquainted with Cyrus decree, which Cyrus Son was not; for how could he, and yet hinder it whilſt his Father was alive? But this Artaxerxes was, which the Adverſaries knew well enough, or undoubtedly durſt not otherwiſe have charged the Iews with building a City, when themſelves knew it was but a Temple, leſt hereby they ſhould give the King occaſion to reply, What now, are they building a City? I am ſure my Father Cyrus never decreed that; and ſo by this, their craft and malice ſhould come out.

All the colour that I finde in Doctor Light-foot for this opinion, is, That Cyrus Son was a hinderer, and ſo was this Artaxerxes, p. 190. But doth it therefore follow he muſt needs be Cyrus Son? might not Cyrus Son be one hinderer, and this Artaxerxes another after him? which is the more likely opinion for the Reaſons before given.

Now in caſe this Link prove weak, the Chain is eaſily broken: for if between Cyrus and Artaxerxes did reign any other King, then will the years betwixt Cyrus firſt, and the twentieth of the other Artaxerxes be more then thirty ſeven.

2 Particular, That Artaxerxes Ahaſuerus reigned but fourteen years in all.

Anſ. It is the grant of Doctor Light-foot, that Artaxerxes Ahaſuerus, Ezra 4. is the ſame with that Ahaſuerus we read of in Eſther, upon which grant (as ſufficient for us) we ſhall at preſent go, leaving the proof of the thing to another place; now let us by this rule examine the Poſition. We read in Eſther that full thirteen years of Ahaſuerus reign were run out in that very Month wherein the Iews cut off their enemies in Shuſhan, and elſewhere, as is evident. Compare Chap. 3.7. with Chap. 9.1. He hath then from this day (according to Doctor Light-foots account) but one year more to reign.

Now let it bee obſerved what after this was done, and ſee whether or no the thing were likely to be compaſſed in a year.

Firſt, Mordecai ſends Letters to all the Iews that were in all the Provinces of King Ahaſuerus, farre and near to eſtabliſh the fourteenth, and fifteenth days of the Month Adar, as days of Thankſgiving to be kept perpetually every year, Chap. 9.20, 21.

Secondly, The Iews of the ſeverall Provinces receive theſe Letters, and upon receipt aſſemble together, Ordain, and Inſtitute for themſelves and poſterity, that theſe days ſhould be obſerved as Mordecai had written, ver. 23.26, 27, 28.

Thirdly, The report of this is carried back again to Shuſhan from all quarters, and thereupon Eſther the Queen, and Mordecai the Iew, write Letters the ſecond time, and ſend to all the Iews, in the one hundred and twenty ſeven Provinces, to confirm what upon receipt of Mordecai's firſt Letters they had decreed for themſelves and their • eed, ver. 29, 30, 31.

Now obſerve, the Dominions of Ahaſuerus, over which the Iews were ſcattered, were ſo vaſt and large, that when upon Eſthers Petition a Counter-decree was to be ſent forth to put ſtop to the Decree of Haman, although the ſending of it fotth was ſeven or eight Months before the time Hamans Decree was to have been put in execution, as will appear by comparing Chap. 8.9. with Chap. 9.1. yet leſt through the length of the way it ſhould come too late, Mordecai ſends Poſts on Horſ-back every way, and that upon ſwift Beaſts, Chap. 8.10. and withall they go forth haſtned and preſſed on, verſ. 14. Now if in ſeven Months time by ſwift running Poſts there could hardly be a conveyance of a Meſſage into all parts of Ahaſuerus Dominions, how can we imagine that afterwards, when Letters were ſent forth not thus haſtned, but more leaſurely, they ſhould be conveyed all over Ahaſuerus Kingdom, and the Iews thereupon from ſeveral parts meet together, hold a Council, inſtitute a Day to be kept by themſelves and poſterity, and the report of this when done returned again to the Court from all parts, and upon this, new Letters by way of ratification of their proceedings ſent again from the Court to the Iews thorow-out all the one hundred twenty ſeven Provinces, and all this within the ſpace of one year.

Adde hereto, That the greatneſs of Mordecai under this Ahaſuerus, Chap. 10. his being accepted of the multitude of his Brethren, his ſeeking and endeavouring, as before their deliverance, ſo now the wealth of his People, his ſpeaking peace to all his Seed, ſeems clearly to argue that theſe things were not of one years continuance, but of a longer time. Such choyce mercies given of God to his people, eſpecially after ſuch bitter ſtorms, are not uſually ſo ſhort lived.

This ſtone removed, the building goes to decay, for in caſe Artaxerxes Ahaſuerus reigned but one year more then fourteen, then will there bee found upwards of thirty ſeven years betwixt the firſt of Cyrus, and the twentieth of Artaxerxes.

3 Particular, That Darius, Ezra 6. and Artaxerxes, Chap. 7. are one and the ſame, only a change of the name, and ſo conſequently the ſeventh of Artaxerxes when Ezra went up to Ieruſalem, Ezra 7.7. was the year following that in which the Temple was finiſhed, which is called the ſixth of Darius, chap. 6.15.

Anſw. This I can by no means give aſſent to.

1 Becauſe I finde Artaxerxes mentioned as a perſon diſtinct from Darius, Chap. 6.14. And the Elders of the Iews builded — and finiſhed it, according to the Commandement of the God of Iſrael, and according to the commandement of Cyrus and Darius, and Artaxerxes King of Perſia: now by the ſame reaſon that Cyrus is a diſtinct Perſon from Darius, by the ſame muſt Artaxerxes likewiſe. Now the Artaxerxes here named cannot be that Artaxerxes we read of, Chapter four, 1. Becauſe he was before Darius time, but this ſeems by the order of placing to have been afterwards. 2. He was a hinderer of Gods Work among the Iews, yea put ſuch a ſtop thereto, that upon the very ſtop hee put, it is ſaid, Ezra 4.24. The work ceaſed until the ſecond year of Darius; but this Artaxerxes is a furtherer, and ſuch a one as did further Gods work effectually, as did Cyrus and Darius; he muſt therefore be that Artaxerxes Ezra ſpeaks of afterwards.

Obj. If it be ſaid, But how did he give command for building the Temple, which work the text ſaith expreſly was finiſhed in the ſixth of Darius, which was before his time?

I anſwer; 1. We may very well underſtand theſe words of ſomething done by Artaxerxes, with the vaſt ſums of Money he gave himſelf, and commanded his Treaſurers, Chap. 7.15, 16, 20, 21, 22. to give forth to Ezra, either by way of reparation of the Temple, which through many years time ſince the ſame was built was gone to decay; or elſe by way of Ornament, adding to the beauty of the building, which is manifeſtly hinted, verſ. 27. Bleſſed be the Lord God of our Fathers, which hath put ſuch a thing as this in the Kings heart, to beautifie the Houſe of the Lord which is in Jeruſalem; and alſo the very words of the Decree, verſ. 20.23. import as much as one of theſe: Or,

2. I may anſwer, That thoſe words, The Elders of the Jews builded and finiſhed it according to the Commandement of Cyrus—are not to be underſtood in ſo ſtrict a ſenſe as to limit each command to the Temple-work only; but in a more large ſenſe, as having reference to thoſe ſeverall Commands given forth by the Perſian Kings, which concerned the Jews welfare, and the carrying on Gods Work among them, whereof one was given forth by Cyrus in the firſt of his reign, another afterwards by Darius, and two more after that by Artaxerxes; and becauſe Artaxerxes had in a more eſpecial manner been Benefactor to Ezra, and the Jews in his time, therefore Ezra, upon occaſion of relating the ſtory of the finiſhing of the Houſe, having made mention of the other two, Cyrus and Darius, will not paſſe over Artaxerxes, but by anticipation names him before, though his Story come not in till afterward; not ſo much minding the curioſity of that particular Queſtion, whether all three had been forwarders of that particular work of building Gods Houſe, as being intent to expreſſe the truth of the matter in generall, viz. That all three, Cyrus, Darius, and Artaxerxes had been friends to the Jews, and furtherers of Gods work among them.

2 Becauſe Ezra, coming up to Jeruſalem in the 7th of Artaxerxes, findes a High Prieſt, who was Grand-child to him that was High Prieſt in the 6th of Darius, when the Temple-work was finiſhed; Jeſhua being then High Prieſt, but one Eliaſhib is now High Prieſt; compare Ezra 10.6. with Neh. 3.20, 21 True, Ezra cals not Eliaſhib High Prieſt at this time, as doth Nehemiah afterwards; yet no other High Prieſt being mentioned, and withall Eliaſhib being ſo aged that he had then a Son, a Prieſt, viz. Johanan, Ezra. 10.6. it is very probable he was at this time High Prieſt. Now obſerve, this Eliaſhib was Grand-childe to Jeſhua who acted with Zerubbabel, as Nehem. 12.10. And Jeſhua begat Jojakim, Jojakim alſo begat Eliaſhib — All laid together, can we imagine that in the ſpace of one year (for by Doctor Light-foots reckoning it is no more) the Grand-father ſhould be dead, and the Father after him, and the Grand-childe High Prieſt in the room of Grand-father and Father? or ſuppoſe he were not High Prieſt till afterwards, yet ſo aged as to have a Son grown up to be a Prieſt, who can beleeve it?

3 Becauſe Nehemiah, Chap. 5.15. makes mention of Governours to have been in Jeruſalem before his time, that had oppreſſed the people, and that did not fear God; for in this he oppoſeth himſelf to them, he feared God, therefore did not ſo as thoſe former Governours. Now amongſt theſe we may not reckon Zerubbabel, who was a righteous Prince, one that feared God, and alſo Governour from the firſt coming out of Babylon untill the ſecond Temple was finiſhed; nor may we take in any Governours who did bear rule afterwards from the time that Ezra went up to Jeruſalem untill the days of Nehemiah, becauſe in all this time Ezra was authorized by King Artaxerxes to ſet Governours and Magiſtrates over the people, Chap. 7.25. And thou Ezra, after the wiſdom of thy God that is in thy hand, ſet Magiſtrates and Iudges—; now it is not likely that Ezra, a man inſpired by God, would ſet up ſuch Governours, or if through miſtake he ſhould the firſt time ſo do, yet having ſeen the evil of it, he would be more wary in his next choyce. Theſe unjuſt oppreſſing Governours muſt therefore be ſuppoſed to bear rule betwixt Zerubbabels time and Ezraes; and if ſo, then cannot we think with Doctor Light-foot the time ſhould be ſo little as one year; if more, then of neceſſity muſt Darius and Artaxerxes be two diſtinct perſons

Now this which is the main Foundationſtone not being firm, the building muſt needs be weak: for if Darius were one perſon, and Artaxerxes another, then put caſe Darius dyed that very year the Temple was finiſhed, which is a thing very unlikely, conſidering he craved the prayers of Gods people, unto whom he had been ſuch a friend, that he might live long, Ezra 6.11. And alſo ſuppoſe Artaxerxes his next Succeſſor, yet becauſe Ezraes going up is not till Artaxerxes ſeventh year, there will be upon the reſult ſix years more then Doctor Light-foot hath accounted for, which makes ſuch a breach in his building as cannot be made up again.

4 Particular, That it was ſeventy years compleat, and no more, from the time the firſt Temple was deſtroyed, untill the ſecond of Darius, when the building of the ſecond was advanced.

Anſ. This opinion ſtanding upon the two firſt Suppoſitions, viz. 1. That Artaxerxes Ahaſuerus was Cyrus next Succeſſor. 2. That this Artaxerxes Ahaſuerus reigned but fourteen years in all, both which we have before diſproved, it falls of it ſelf; for in caſe we conceive any other King to have reigned betwixt Cyrus and Artaxerxes Ahaſuerus, or conceive Artaxerxes Ahaſuerus to have reigned more years then fourteen, the number of years amounts to above ſeventy, and if ſo, then Doctor Light-foots computation muſt needs be amiſſe.

5 Particular, That Ezra was Son to that Serajah the High Prieſt, whom Nebuchadnezzar ſlew at the time the firſt Temple was deſtroyed, which Doctor Light-foot proves from Ezraes Genealogie, Chap. 7.1.

Anſ. This I muſt confeſſe, look upon it one way, it ſeems to have in it much ſtrength, yet look upon it another, and it ſeems altogether improbable; for, according to this reckoning, ſuppoſe Ezra to be born but the year before Jeruſalems deſtruction, when his Father was ſlain, yet muſt we (as ſaith Doctor Light-foot himſelf) ſuppoſe him fifty years old at leaſt in that very year which the Scripture calls Cyrus firſt; Now laying hereunto Doctor Light-foots own words upon Nehem. 13. which are theſe, Ezra (ſaith he) lived near the times of Jaddua, who met Alexander the Great coming to Jeruſalem, for he wrote the Book of Chronicles in the time of Iohanan Iadduaes Father, Nehem. 12.23. and ſo he lived well towards the expiration of the Perſian Monarchy. Now let us lay all together and weigh the whole; Ezra was fifty years old in Cyrus firſt year, after that he muſt out-live four generations, and in the fifth generation write the Book of the Chronicles; that four generations (though Doctor Light-foot doth not obſerve it) did paſſe betwixt the firſt of Cyrus and the days of Iohanan Iadduaes father, is evident, Nehem. 12.10, 11. And Jeſhua begat Jojakim, Jojakim alſo begat Eliaſhib, and Eliaſhib begat Jojada, and Jojada begat Jonathan, and Jonathan begat Jaddua Now obſerve, Ieſhua was High Prieſt in the firſt year of Cyrus, at the comming out of Babylon, Ezra 3.2. Ezra out-lives him, there is one generation; Jojakim ſucceeded him, there is a ſecond; Eliaſhib him, there was a third; Jojada him, there was a fourth. All theſe Ezra out-lived, and in the fifth generation, namely of Johanan or Jonathan Jadduaes Father, hee wrote the Book of the Chronicles; he muſt therefore certainly be very aged, that after fifty years of age ſhould out-live four generations, and live to ſee the fifth; yet this did Ezra in caſe hee were Son to that Serajah.

It is therefore (Iconceive) much better to ſay, that that Serajah, the Son of Azariah, the Son of Hilkiah — mentioned Ezra 7.1. was not immediate Father to Ezra, but rather Grand-father, or Great Grand-father; now Ezra coming out of his Loyns is called his Son, though he were not the immediate Son, or next Iſſue, for one of theſe Reaſons.

Either firſt, becauſe that Serajah was more famouſſy known, being High Prieſt, and killed at the ſacking of Ieruſalem, then poſſibly Ezraes next Father was, and therefore Ezra paſſeth over him in ſilence, and begins his Deſcent from the other, who was more famouſly known.

Or ſecondly, becauſe that Serajah was the firſt in the Line of Ezra upwards that was High Prieſt: for though others did come betwixt Ezra and him, yet were none of them High Prieſts; for the Prieſt-hood from Serajah went on in another Line, not that of Ezraes Father, but that of Iehoſadaz (or Ioſedech) father of Ieſhua, 1 Chron. 6.14, 15. Ezraes Father therefore, though he came of the Houſe of Aaron, yet becauſe he was not of Aarons Line he paſſeth him over, beginning his Genealogie from the firſt of his Anceſtors that was of that Line, namely Serajah.

Or Thirdly (which I rather incline to) becauſe it is very probable Ezraes immediate Father was alſo named Serajah, and becauſe the name of Father, and Grand-father, or Great Grand-father was the ſame, he therefore in counting his Pedigree paſſeth over his Father, and ſuch other (if any did come between) as paſſed betwixt him and Serajah, and begins (as I have ſaid) from him. Now a like example to this we have in the very text, Ezra 7. if we compare it with 1 Chron. 6.4. to 15. for in the Genealogie, as we have it in Ezra, we finde betwixt Shallum and Merarioth but four generations, viz. of Zadok, of Ahitub, of Amariah, of Azariah; but in the very ſame Genealogie as it is laid down in the Chronicles, we have betwixt theſe two no leſſe then ten Generations; And what is the reaſon hereof? Why this; we have in the Chronicles between Shallum and Merarioth two Zadoks, two Ahitubs, two Amariahs, two Azariahs; now Ezra in his Genealogie to ſhun repetitions, contents himſelf with naming each one, and then leaps over the reſt of the ſame name. Now as I ſaid, Ezraes Father being in all likelihood named Serajah, that Ezra might not come over with the ſame name twice, he therefore omits him, and begins with that Serajah, who yet was more remote, carrying on his Pedigree from him. And that the thing I have ſaid, viz. That Ezraes Father was named Serajah, yet not Serajah the High Prieſt, hath in it a probability, is clear, becauſe Nichem. 11.11. we read of one Serajah, which could not be Serajah the High Prieſt, who was ſlain long before, but this Serajah was then living, and dwelling in Jeruſalem, and yet notwithſtanding his Line is the very ſame with Ezraes, for he is Son of Hilkiah, Son of Meſhullam, (or Shallum) Son of Zadok, &c. and therefore in all likelihood no other but Ezraes Father.

And here again obſerve as a further confirmation of the thing before noted, viz. That becauſe the ſame name ſhould not be brought over twice, therfore is Serajah the High Prieſt here paſſed over, and all betwixt him and Nehemiahs Serajah; and the Pedigree of this Serajah begins with Hilkiah, the Son of Shallum, the Son of Zadok, though yet Hilkiah was not immediate Father to this Serajah, but at a great diſtance ſeparated from him two or three generations at leaſt; two we read of, Ezra 7.1. viz. Serajah the High Prieſt, and Azariah, which both come betwixt Nehemiahs Serajah and Hilkiah. I ſay therefore, that it is a thing very likely, that Ezraes immediate Father was named Serajah, and for the reaſon he would not come twice over with the ſame name, and the former reaſons put together, he therefore paſſeth him over, and begins more upwards in his Line, viz. with Serajah the High Prieſt, which is a thing more probable by farre, then to imagine that Ezra who was fifty years old in the firſt of Cyrits, ſhould afterwards out-live four Generations, and in the Fifth be a Writer of Chronicles, as doth neceſſarily follow upon Doctor Light-foots opinion; yea that he who was fifty years old when the Perſian Monarchy began, ſhould live (as ſaith Doctor Lightfoot) till towards the expiration of it; which conſidering that the Perſian Monarchy laſted two hundred years, it beginning (ſaith Helvicus) in the ſixty ſecond Olympiad, and ending in the one hundred and twelfth, now to each Olympiad four years being allowed (which is the rule of computation by Olympiads) the fiftie Olympiads of the Perſian Monarchy make up the even ſum of two hundred years, which is a term ſo long, that notwithſtanding with God nothing is impoſſible, yet to me it ſeems very improbable, That Ezra, a man fifty years old at the beginning of this time, ſhould live towards or near the end of it. This very number of years I confeſſe is not mentioned in Scripture; yet however the fore-going Text aſſuring us this Monarchy laſted no leſſe then five generations, we may well conclude the time could not be much leſſe:

6 Particular, That the deſign of the Holy Choſt, in Ezra and Nehemiah, is to give us a Chronicle of the Perſian Kings.

Anſ. This cannot I conceive, but judge the contrary, viz. That the deſign of the Holy Ghoſt is another thing, namely, to record the ſtate of the Jewiſh affairs, not in the leaſt intending a Chronicle of the Kings of Perſia; and my reaſon is, becauſe the Scripture hath not aſcertained us that Artaxerxes Ahaſuerus was next Succeſſor to Cyrus, nor Darius to him, nor hath it told us how long any one of the Perſian Kings did reign, and therefore it ſeems very unlikely that the intendment of the Holy Ghoſt ſhould be to give us a Chronicle of the times, and yet leave us altogether in the dark, as to the perſons that reigned, and the time how long.

Nay, what need was there of continuing the ordinary Scripture Chronicle any further then the end of the ſeventy years Captivity? ſeeing with the firſt of Cyrus, where the ſeventy years expire, we have a Divine Chronologie left us of the whole of the time from that very year, until the ſecond coming of Chriſt; if therefore we have but ſufficient left us in the Scripture to make out upon ſure grounds this account, viz. of the two thouſand three hundred years, we need not after once they are begun, carry on the Scripture Chronicle upon any other foot but this only, of the two thouſand three hundred years. By the help of which number, being ordered by a wonderful hand of Providence, there to begin where the ſeventy years of the Captivity ended, (after which we are altogether in the dark, as to the queſtions, Who reigned, or how long? having nothing (were this number thrown aſide) to build our ſaith upon but Human reports) we have a certain Scripture Chronologie from the very day of the Creation untill the day of Chriſts ſecond coming. Thoſe know not what they loſe, nor indeed what inconvenience in this reſpect they draw upon themſelves, who would have theſe two thouſand three hundred days to be Natural days; nor that Author neither, who would have but half ſo many years underſtood as there are days, ſo fixing the head of this number downwards very low in the times of the New Teſtament; for ſeeing Daniels four hundred and ninety years cannot be begun with the firſt of Cyrus (as I have proved before) but do begin with the twentieth of Artaxerxes, let it be ſhewn from any other Scripture (this Number, and the Argument lying in it, being ſet aſide) the certain number of years betwixt Cyrus firſt, and the twentieth of Artaxerxes; if this can be done, I am wonderouſly miſtaken, and I think I may be bold to ſay it cannot; If it be not done, I am ſure then the very grounds of Chronologie will be fallible; and if ſo, what may we expect the Concluſions will be? Well therefore (if all be conſidered) may this number go under the title of the account of the Wonderful Numberer, as Daniel calls it.

By this I am further confirmed in my beginning of the two thouſand three hundred years, that I have begun them aright, in beginning them with the firſt of Cyrus; and that they may not be begun either higher or lower for what need have we of beginning them with the beginning of Nebuchadnezzars Tyranny over Iſrael, ſeeing the duration of that is ſet forth by another number of Seventy years, to the end of which Seventy years the grounds of Chronologers are perfect, without a ſupply from this? to carry this therefore up into that time is ſuperfluous.

Again, ſhould we begin them lower then the firſt of Cyrus, then becauſe we have no other Scripture-ground to go upon but this only, for many years that followed, a defect will be (as I have ſaid) in the very foundation of Chronologie. Seeing therefore we may not begin them either higher or lowet, the beginning we have ſtated, and that only is the truth.

From all that hath been ſaid, it appears, that Dr. Lightfoot's Suppoſitions, are but Suppoſitions, not having in them the force of Arguments to uphold the thing they would countenance; Nay, the very things themſelvs, look upon them in our Anſwers, do clearly argue the time betwixt Cyrus firſt, and Artaxerxes twentieth, to be much more then ſeven and thirty years.

Beſides, Dr. Lightfoots ſuppoſitory grounds, ſomething farther of a like nature may be urged, which ſeems to argue that the time betwixt Cyrus firſt, and Artaxerxes twentieth year, could not be long. As

Firſt, the names of thoſe who ſealed the Covenant with Nehemiah, Chap. 10. are many of them the very ſame with the names found in the Regiſter of thoſe who came up with Zerubbabel, Ezra. 2. it ſeems therefore that thoſe perſons were now living, if ſo, then cannot the time be eſteemed long.

Anſ. The names, Ezra 2. and again Nehem. 10. are not names of men, as particular perſons, but as Heads of Families, for which cauſe the perſons mentioned by name, are called the chief of the People, the Princes, Nobles, Neh. 9.38. Chap. 10.14.29. Hence the Head of the Family of Paroſh, goes under the name of Paroſh (as he was a publick perſon, and Head of a Family ſo called) in the generation Zerubbabel lived in, and alſo afterwards in Nehemiahs generation. Not that Paroſh (and ſo of all the reſt) ſignifies in both one and the ſame particular perſon, but indeed the Head or common perſon of one and the ſame Family, which (that the diſtinction of Families hereby might be the more conſpicuous, and the better preſerved) is called Paroſh in Zerubbabels time, and Nehemiahs likewiſe, though theſe two were ſeparated at leaſt a generation from each other, as I have already obſerved. And that it is a thing ordinary to give to a publick perſon, whether Prince, or Noble-man, as Marqueſſe, Earl, &c. beſides his own proper name (which is peculiar to him) a name common to him, and all that do, or ſhall ſucceed him in his place, as ſuch, is a thing we cannot be ignorant of. And alſo (which is the thing to be minded) as ſuch a one who is a publick perſon in all his publick actions, layes by his private name, and acts by vertue of his name as ſuch; ſo the Heads of each Family acting as publick perſons; Firſt, In leading their Families forth out of Babylon in Zerubbabels time; Secondly, In ſealing the Covenant for themſelves, and the whole Family they were Heads of, in Nehemiahs time, they loſe their names as they were private men, and retain only that common name, which was given to them as publick perſons; and hence it comes to paſſe, that there is ſtill the uſe of the ſame names, though yet perſons and generations were different.

Secondly, The Regiſter mentioned Nehem. 7. doth ſomewhat vary, in reſpect of the number of perſons in ſundry of the Families, from that we read of Ezra 2. Now what may be the reaſon hereof? Why, (ſaith Dr. Lightfoot in his Harmony upon Nehem ah, page 204.) Nehemiahs Regiſter is a Regiſter of the perſons as they were then living in his time; but Ezraes of the perſons as they were at their firſt coming up with Zerubbabel in the firſt year of Cyrus. And if ſo, then conſidering that the variation betwixt one Regiſter and the other, is but ſmall, it will ſtrongly argue, that the time betwixt Zerubbabel and Nehemiah could not be long.

Anſ. The Reaſon given by Dr. Lightfoot is a miſtake, and againſt the Text, and will not reconcile each place; For obſerve, It is expreſly ſaid of Nehemiahs Regiſter Chap. 7. that the ſame was found by Nehemiah, yea and found ſo written as he delivers it in the following verſes, verſ. 5. And my God put it into my heart to gather together the Nobles, and the Rulers, and the People, that they might be reckoned by Genealogre. And I found a Regiſter of the Genealogic of them which came up at the firſt, and found written therein, Theſe are the Children of the Province, &c. The Regiſter therefore was not a Regiſter made up partly of the perſons then living, and partly of thoſe mentioned in the old Regiſter, becauſe then the Regiſter ſhould be of Nehemiahs making; but the Regiſter he ſpeaks of, was a Regiſter he ſound written to his hand. Nay, how can we think it ſhould be ſo, ſeeing it was upwards of ſeven and thirty years (in caſe we follow Dr. Lightfoots own reckoning) from the time Zerubbabel went up (when the firſt Regiſter was made) unto this time, which was after Nehemiah was come to Jeruſalem, and had built the walls of the City? Now obſerve, as there is in moſt families mentioned in either Regiſter the very ſame number of perſons; ſo likewiſe is there in both Regiſters one and the ſame number of Horſes, Mules, Camels, Aſſes, as compare, Ezra 2.66, 67. with Nehem. 7.68, 69. Now who can beleeve it, that in ſeven and thirty years there ſhould not be diminiſhed, nor increaſed not one perſon in many Families, which Families too conſiſted ſome of divers hundreds of perſons, ſome of thouſands? Nor in ſo great a multitude, not one Horſe, nor a Mule? It is therefore more conſonant to truth, and will better reconcile each place, to ſay, That as Zerubbabel at his firſt coming up drew that Regiſter, Ezra 2. So ſuddenly after, when by coming and going, ſome change and alteration was made of perſons, he drew a ſecond; which ſecond Liſt or Catalogue, Nehemiah in ſearching lights upon, but miſſeth the firſt. And as this doth much better reconcile each place, ſo doth it no way injure us; Nay, that Nehemiah is fain to go to ſearch old Regiſters to find the Genealogie of the perſons then living, is an Argumeat rather that the former generation who came up with Zerubbabel was extinct, yea had been ſo ſome time (the perſons now living having in a manner forgotten their deſcent) then that they ſhould be alive.

Thirdly, Ezra is particularized by name, as being one of thoſe that came up at the firſt with Zerubbabel, Nehem. 12.1. it cannot therefore be, conſidering how active this Ezra was even in Nehemiahs dayes, that the diſtance of time betwixt Zerubbabel and Nehemiah ſhould be very great.

Anſ. No Argument at all is, or can be fetched out of the Books of Ezra and Nehemiah from the agreement or likelihood of names, unleſſe only in ſuch places, where beſides the bare name we have ſomething elſe laid down that carries proof with it, that we are by the ſame name alwayes to underſtand the ſame particular perſon, and no other. And the reaſon is, becauſe it is a thing of moſt common uſe in theſe two Books, to give the ſame names to diverſe and ſundry perſons, as who conſults either book diligently ſhall find no leſſe then three or four different Jeſhuaes, and about ſome eight or nine diſtinct Zechariahs; four ſeveral Eliaſhibs, viz. Eliaſhib the High Prieſt, and three other of that name, we have in the tenth Chapter of Ezra only; Seven or eight diſtinct Shemiahs, and as many Meſhullams are recorded in theſe two books. Divers other like inſtances its moſt eaſie to produce. Whence it follows, that the uſe of the ſame name proves nothing at all as to this or that particular perſon, in caſe there be not in the Text ſome other notation, which devolves the name upon this or that perſon, as conſidered diſtinct from all others; As for example, When Jeſhua is called, either Jeſhua the High Prieſt, or Jeſhua the ſon of Jozadak, this is a manifeſt notation of the perſon, diſtinguiſhing him from all others of that name; when Nehemiah is called Nehemiah the Tirſhatha, or the Governor, or Nehemiah the ſon of Hachaliah, this denotes the particular perſon, and diſtinguiſheth him from that Nehemiah the ſon of Azbuk, Chap. 3.16. But now in the Text objected, we have only a bare name, without any other notation, and therefore it proves nothing. Nay, it is manifeſt from the Text, that that Ezra who is recorded as one of them that came up with Zerubbabel, cannot be the Ezra ſo much ſpoken of in this Book; For obſerve, verſ. 12, 13, &c. and we ſhall find, that in the dayes of Jojakim, who was Father to that Eliaſhib that was High Prieſt in the dayes of Nehemiah (as verſ. 10.) the Ezra who came up with Zerubbabel, and alſo the Serajah, the Jeremiah, Amariah, &c. mentioned with him, verſ. 1, 2. were gone, and another generation were come up in their rooms, in the place of Serajah, we have now Merajah; of Jeremiah, Hananiah; of Ezra, Meſhullam; of Amariah, Jehohanan, and ſo of all the reſt; ſo that not only this Ezra is gone, but there is a change even of a whole generation in the dayes of Joiakim. And this Jojakim being father to Eliaſhib muſt needs be of the generation before Nehemiah, for in Nehemiahs dayes, Eliaſhib the ſon is High Prieſt, by conſequence therefore Jojakim was now dead. Now conſider, the Ezra who wrote the book of Ezra, lived and acted with Nehemiah, but the Ezra who came up with Zerubbabel was removed, and another in his place a generation before Nehemiahs dayes; therefore though the name is one, yet have we not one, but two perſons ſignified by it; the Ezra who came up with Zerubbabel was one, the Ezra who acted with Nehemiah another; and for this reaſon is this latter (as ſeems to me) called Ezra the Prieſt, the Scribe, verſ. 26. and Ezra the Scribe, verſ. 36. to diſtinguiſh him from the foregoing Ezra, verſ. 1.

From the whole it appears, that as Dr. Lightfoots Allegations ſingly are too weak, ſo theſe added to them (which (if I miſtake not) is the utmoſt that with colour of reaſon can be urged from Scripture-Text) will not help his opinion, to narrow the time betwixt Cyrus firſt, and Artaxerxes twentieth into ſo little a compaſs as thirty ſeven years; nor will they maintain any other opinion whatſoever, that either is, or may be ſtated, that doth or ſhall ſo ſhorten this time, as that the whole put together will not amount to more then one full age.

Yet with all let me ſay, when I conſider the whole, and how great a ſhew of reaſon there is (if things laid down in the Books of Ezra and Nehemiah be taken up upon the firſt look) to cut this time ſhort, I do not at all wonder, that the Jewiſh Writers (whoſe averſneſſe to take up reports from Heathens, though ever ſo true, and aptneſſe to look upon theſe Books as a Chronicle (a thing never intended by the Holy Ghoſt) and miſ-underſtanding the Story by taking up things too haſtily, might cauſe in them this error) ſhould adhere to this opinion of the ſhortneſſe of the time betwixt the firſt coming up from the Captivity, and Nehemiahs dayes, and that Dr. Lightfoot, Mr. Broughton, and others, ſhould follow them; for truly there ſeems at firſt bluſh, to be much more reaſon for ſuch an opinion, then any other; but when things are once throughly weighed, and well digeſted, the contrary is manifeſt, and an unprejudiced eye will eaſily ſee that this Thred muſt be drawn out ſomewhat more at length, then the Jewiſh Writers, or Chronologers that adhere to them will allow of.

The Concluſion is, That the Opinion of Dr. Lightfoot, and others, who following the ſteps of the Jewiſh Writers do bring this time into a little ſcantling, is a miſtake, and not that certain rule by which we are to meaſure this Period.

SECT. 2.

Seeing we may not ſteere our courſe by the fore-going opinion, it is neceſſary that ſome further enquiry be made into this buſineſs, viz. What number of years paſſed betwixt the firſt of Cyrus, and the twentieth of Nehemiahs Artaxerxes.

Now becauſe Artaxerxes (as alſo Darius) was a name common to more then one or two of the Perſian Monarchs, we muſt therefore in order to the Principal Queſtion in the firſt place diſcuſſe another, viz.

Queſt. What Artaxerxes was that from whom Nehemiah received Commiſsion to build Jeruſalem?

Anſ. That we may the better find out this, I ſhall firſt enquire, What Darius that was by whoſe order the Temple work was revived; for that Darius was Predeceſſor to this Artaxerxes, as is evident.

1 From his place in the Story, we read of Darius, Ezra 5. but not of this Artaxerxes till afterwards.

2 The Holy Ghoſt making a clear diſtinction betwxit Cyrus, Darius, and Artaxerxes, placeth Artaxerxes after Darius, as being his Succeſſor, as he doth Darius after Cyrus as his, Ezra 6.14.

3 Ezra coming up to Jeruſalem in the ſeventh year of that very ſame Artaxerxes, in whoſe twentieth Nehemiah received his Commiſſion, findes a Temple there, and did ſacrifiſe, Ezra 8.34, 35. therefore muſt this Artaxerxes be Succeſſor to Darius, for untill the ſixth of Darius no Temple was built.

Nay, he was not only Succeſſor to him, but Succeſſor at ſuch a diſtance, as appears to me he was not his next Succeſſor, but rather next to his next, which is clear from that great change and alteration that there was in the Jewiſh Church and State both, betwixt the ſixth year of the one, and the ſeventh of the other.

1 In the Church, in the ſixth year of Darius, Jeſhua in all probability was alive, and High Prieſt, as lay theſe Scriptures together, Hag. 1.14, 15. Chap. 2.2, 3, 4. Zech. 3.6, 7. Chap. 6.11, 12. but in the ſeventh of Artaxerxes (as I have before obſerved) Eliaſhib who was Grandchilde to Jeſhua, ſtands in place of his Grandfather.

2 In the State, there had been Governours that oppreſſed the people, and did not fear God, betwixt Zerubbabels time, who was Governour in the ſixth of Darius (and how long after is not known to us) and Ezraes, who came up to Jeruſalem in the ſeventh of Artaxerxes, which is an Argument of ſome good diſtance of time betwixt theſe two.

The queſtion here then will be,

What Darius was that who by his Decree did the ſecond time ſet the Temple-work on foot?

Anſ. Some (and not a few) will have this Darius to be Darius Hyſtaſper, who ſucceeded Cambyſes the Son of Cyrus in the Kingdom: But this cannot be, becauſe betwixt Cyrus and that Darius who ſet the Temple-work on foot, did reign one Artaxerxe, Ch. 4.7. by whom the work was hindred; but none ſuch reigned betwixt Cyrus and Darius Hystaſpes.

To ſay (as do ſome) this Artaxerxes, though recorded before, yet reigned after Darius, is ſo expreſly againſt the Text, that I cannot admit ſuch a thought, for the Copy of the Letters of Artaxerxes is the very thing which puts ſtop to the work of the Temple; for it ſeems the Jews upon the change that now was in the Empire, through the death of the Monarch that was, had by vertue of their old Commiſſion from Cyrus, ſet upon, anew of themſelves, the Temple-work, as hoping the new Prince would favour their enterprize; now the enemies ſeeing this, diſpatch away Letters in haſte to Artaxerxes, containing a charge againſt the Jews, who in anſwer returns them Letters, with a ſtrict command to go up to Jeruſalem, and cauſe the work to ceaſe, which upon receipt of, and reading the Kings Letter, they ſtraightway did, and thereupon the Work of God ceaſed untill the ſecond year of Darius, Ezra 4.23, 24. it is therefore a Queſtion without queſtion that Darius was Succeſſor to this Artaxerxes, as he was Predeceſſor to the other.

Some others therefore perceiving that the former opinion will not agree with the Text, will have this Artaxerxes to be Cyrus Son, and next Succeſſor (commonly called by Hiſtorians Cambyſes) but this opinion is as unlikely as the other is untrue, as I have proved already in anſwer to Doctor Lightfoot.

There is yet another opinion, which affirms this Artaxerxes to be Smerdis Magus, the Counterfeit, who reigned ſeven Months betwixt Cambyſes and Darius Hyſtaſpes. But certainly had the ceſſation of the Work of the Houſe of God been for no longer time then is given to it by this opinion, wch cannot be much above a year, if we conſider that Smerdis (as themſelves ſay) reigned but ſeven Months, out of which ſeven Months we muſt allow ſome time for the news of Cambyſes death, being brought to Judahs Adverſaries; ſome time more for their ſending their Letters, (which being ſubſcribed by ſo many ſundry people, living in ſundry places, as verſe ninth intimates, it is likely could not be much leſs time in preparing) ſome more time for that ſearch of the Chronicles upon this Letter, verſ. 19. and ſome more yet for the Kings anſwer to them again; and conſidering withall that Darius Hyſtaſpes who ſucceeded Smordis, did (according to their Principle) in the ſecond year of his reign ſet the work on foot again; the whole compared together it will appear, that the work could not ceaſe very little more then one year; which time being ſo ſhort, it can hardly be thought that the Scripture would take notice of it, much leſſe with ſuch an Emphaſis, ſetting ſuch a mark upon this buſineſſe, as verſe laſt; Then ceaſed the Work of the Houſe of God, ſo it ceaſed untill the ſecond year of Darius. None that reads the words can think the ceſſation here ſpoken of was only a Twelve-months buſineſſe. I ſay not that the very ſtory of Smerdis (which though unto meer ſtories I give little credit, yet being the Adverſaries Weapons I may uſe them) the which reports him all his time in a manner to have been ſhut up in his Chamber, neither daring to ſhew himſelf abroad, nor admitting any to come to him, gives juſt ground of ſuſpition he could nor be this Artaxerxes, who ſeems by what is recorded of him in this Chapter, Ezra 4. to have been no ſuch retired perſon, but of a more publick life.

But to put an end to this variety of opinions, I take it the Text it ſelf hath decieed the Controverſie, telling us plainly that this Artaxerxes was no other then Ahaſuerus; he who is called Artaxerxes verſ. 7. being called Ahaſuerus verſe 6. the perſon in both being one and the ſame; only the Holy Ghoſt having firſt made mention of the accuſation of Judahs Adverſaries in the general, with a declaration of the time when they wrote it, viz. in the beginning of Ahaſuerus reign, verſe ſix, proceeds to mention the ſame more particularly, with the names of the Perſons that wrote it, and a Copy of the Accuſation it ſelf, and what effect it had; in which following diſcourſe there is only a change of the name, he being now called Artaxerxes (a name common to many of the Perſian Kings, as Pharaoh was to the Aegyptians) who had before been called Ahaſuerus. If you ask what Ahaſuerus this was, I anſwer, The ſame in all likelihood that we read of throughout the Book of Heſter; for, ſetting aſide Heſters ſtory, we do not read of the name Ahaſuerus but twice in all the Bible, Dan. 9.1. and here in Ezra. That Ahaſuerus Daniel mentions cannot be Heſters Ahaſuerus, for that Ahaſuerus Daniel tells us was King of the Medes only, Heſters is King of Media and Perſia both; Heſter 1.3. 2. Daniels Ahaſuerus being Father to that Darius who together with Cyrus took Babylon, could not (becauſe the Babylonian Monarchy was ſtanding in his days, and poſſeſſing a great part of thoſe Countries) have his Monarchy extended from India even to Aethiopia, over one hundred twenty ſeven Provinces, which Ahaſuerus who married Heſter had, Ch. 1.1. In all likelihood therefore (we reading of no other of that name) this Ahaſuerns Artaxerxes, Ezra mentions, is the very ſame with him we read of in Hester. And indeed the Apccryphal Book of Heſter (which although I credit not as Scripture, yet may the ſame credit be given to it as to other Hiſtories) calls him by no other name then Artaxerxes, who in Hester is called Ahaſuerus; ſo that it ſeems either name was given to him, and becauſe of that (he being known to ſome by the one, to ſome by the other) doth Ezra give him both, firſt calling him Ahaſuerus, then Artaxerxes.

If it be ſaid, But if this Artaxerxes were Ahaſuerus in Heſter, one would think Heſter having ſuch influence upon him, and Mordecai ſuch power under him, it ſhould have cauſed that the work of the Temple ſhould have gone on again?

Anſ. Not ſo, for the Decree to hinder the Work of the Temple was made, as the Text ſaith, in the beginning of his reign, which was before that Heſter was married to him. Now a Decree once made, Heſter (as appears in the buſineſſe of Haman) was not forward to move the King to alter his Decree; yea, put caſe ſhe had, yet was it a cuſtom amongſt the Medes and Perſians, not to repeal any Law, whilſt the King that made it lived; and therefore Ahaſuerus, though Heſter begged it on her knees, could not repeal the Decree againſt the Jews, only by another Decree gives them liberty to ſtand up in their own defence, and make reſiſtance againſt thoſe that ſhould ſeek their lives. So that I ſay the Law once made, it was not an eaſie thing, though Heſter was greatly in the Kings favour, and Mordecai in great power, to repeal it, whilſt Ahaſuerus lived, but for his life the work is, and muſt be at a ſtand, though Darius after him (which is an argument that this cuſtom of making irrepealable Laws was binding only to that King that made them, the term of his own life, but not to his Succeſſor or Succeſſors) did repeal this Statute, and by a contrary Decree ſet the work on foot again.

Now it being ſo, that in all likelihood that Ahaſuerus Husband to Heſter is the ſame here meant that hindered the work of the Temple, then, as both the former opinions (which carry not half the probability this doth) concerning Cambyſes and Smerdis are diſproved; who both put together (and allowing them whatſoever is in any Hiſtory given to them for the time of their reign) did not reign ſo many years as we have in Scripture recorded touching this Artaxerxes: ſo it is evident that Darius Hyſtaſpes could not bee that Darius that gave life again to the Temple-work; for he ſucceeded in the Monarchy (as all affirm) within one year after the death of Cambyſes, Cyrus Son, and next Succeſſor; but now, betwixt Cyrus and that Darius, did reign, and that for many years, one Ahaſuerus, or Artaxerxes, by whom the work was obſtructed.

If any yet further curiouſly enquire, which of thoſe Kings named by the Greeks this Ahaſuerus ſhould be, ſeeing they give to none of the Perſian Monarchs that name;

I anſwer; I ſuppoſe him to be Darius Hyſtaſpes himſelf, and amongſt other Reaſons might be named, this is one, The activeneſs of Mordecai in his Court; now Mordecai being one of thoſe carried Captive in the days of Jeconiah, Heſter 2.5, 6. which was at the beginning of the ſeventy years, the age of Mordecai, in caſe we fix upon any of the Perſian Monarchs on this ſide Hyſtaſpes, will be ſuch as will hardly agree with the ſtory of him and his activity; and this being ſo, the ſuppoſed helper of the Temple-work, is the ſeal hinderer of it.

The Concluſion is, That that Darius who after Cyrus ſet the Temple-work on foot, cannot be Darius Hystaſpes.

Another opinion there is, which will have this Darius to be Darius Nothus; but to this cannot I ſubſcribe, partly for what I have already ſaid in anſwer to Maſter Medes beginning of the ſeventy weeks, who there maintains this opinion; and further, for what I ſaid but even now, in my anſwer to Doctor Lightfoot, That Ezra upon his comming to Ieruſalem found that generation who had been builders of the Temple, and the next generation to theſe, extinct, and in their Graves, and a third generation ſurviving. Now Darius Nothus reigning but nineteen years, we can hardly think (Artaxerxes being next Succeſſor to him) that by the ſeventh of Artaxerxes when Ezra went up to Ieruſalem, which accounting from the ſixth of Darius, when the work of the Temple was finiſhed (at which time Zerubbabel and the reſt were alive) amounts but to one and twenty years; that I ſay in one and twenty years ſpace (though it is granted many might) yet that a whole generation ſhould be gone, and the generation after them, and a third generation come in place, ſeems very ſtrange.

Darius Nothus therefore was not that Darius which did advance the building of the Temple.

Queſt. But what Darius are we then to fix upon?

Anſ. Darius Longimanus, called moſt commonly, Artaxerxes Longimanus, who was Son to Xerxes the Great, and Father to Darius Nothus.

Now the reaſon why I fix here, is, becauſe this fixation agrees well to the ſtory of things on both ſides, in reſpect of time more eſpecially.

1 For the ſucceeding part of the ſtory, that which follows betwixt the finiſhing the Temple-work, and the building Ieruſalem, it will well ſuit with it; for this Darius reigning forty years, (which long reign above other his Predeceſſors I conceive was the fruit of Gods Peoples prayers, which Darius makes one reaſon of his Decree for carrying on the work of the Temple, that the Iews might offer Sacrifice, and pray for his life, Ezra 6.11.) I ſay, he reigning forty years; if we begin from the ſixth year of his reign when the Temple-work was finiſhed, and adding to the thirty four years, the remainder of his reign after the Temple was built, the nineteen years of Darius Nothus his Succeſſor, and the ſeven years of Artaxerxes who ſucceeded him, at which time Ezra went up to Ieruſalem, the whole amounts to ſixty years; and if we alſo take in the thirteen years after, when Nehemiah went up, it advanceeth the number to ſeventy three: now that in the ſpace of about ſeventy years there ſhould be ſuch a change of Governours and People, the old dead and gone, new come in their room, is no ſtrange thing to conceive. This opinion therefore well ſuits the ſucceeding part of the ſtory.

2 For the fore-going part, it ſuits it much better then any of the other opinions. For, thoſe that fix upon Darius Hyſtaſpes, cannot (as I have proved) finde an Artaxerxes between him and Cyrus, that was a hinderer to the work, which yet that ſuch a one was, is evident from the ſtory. Thoſe that fix upon Nothus make the time ſo wide betwixt the laying the foundation of the Temple, and the finiſhing the work, as can hardly be imagined; neither of theſe opinions therefore will ſuit with that part of the Divine Story, which precedes the building of the Temple. But ours, which fixeth upon Longimanus, wil ſuit it very wel; for firſt, The block that lies in the way of the firſt of the two former opinions, is by it removed, we having already found an Artaxerxes that was a hinderer, and alſo a Predeceſſor to this Longimanus. Secondly, The block that lies in the way of the ſecond, in regard of the length of the time, is hereby well removed, our opinion cutting the time betwixt the laying the Temples foundation, and the finiſhing the work, ſhorter by full forty years then that opinion doth.

Obj. But yet it may be ſaid, That even according to our opinion, the time betwixt Cyrus firſt, and Darius ſecond year will ſeem too long, for walking by our own rule laid down in our Key, Theſ. 45.48. the time amounts to ſeventy years, thus; Cyrus, three years. Cambyſes with the Magi, eight. Darius Hyſtaſpes, thirty ſix. Xerxes, twenty one. Darius Longimanus, two.

The current year, viz. the ſecond of Longimanus, I take into the number, becauſe it is very probable it was not till towards the end of that year that Darius Decree came forth, for the Jews fall not to the work till the latter end of the ſixth month, Hag. 1.14, 14, 15. and it was ſome time after that (as Ezraes Story makes appear) that the Decree came forth; which may therefore poſsibly, and moſt likely, if we throughly weigh the whole of Zecharies Viſion, be in that eleventh Month he mentions, Zec. 1.7. and being ſo, but a month and a few days are wanting of a compleat year, which little want, where the account is by years, is never reckoned.) Now hence the Objection riſeth; If ſeventy years be alotted to this time (which our opinion grants) then muſt the age of ſome perſons, viz. thoſe who had ſeen Solomons Temple, and were alive at this day, as Hag. 2.2, 3. be no leſſe then one hundred and thirty years; for ſuppoſe them to be ſixty years old in Cyrus firſt; to which ſixty, adding theſe ſeventy, we have the aforeſaid number; which age ſeems to be too great for the generations ſince Moſes his time.

Anſ. Not ſo; for we finde Jehoſada the High Prieſt (who was not long before the Babylonian Captivity) to have lived as long, 2 Chron. 24.15. and alſo (as is teſtified in the firſt Book of Maccabees) Mattathias the Prieſt, Father to Judas Maccabeus lived one hundred forty ſix years, Chap. 2. verſe laſt. Indeed the age might ſeem too great, ſhould we (as do ſome) ſix upon Darius Nothus, ſo taking in forty years more; but here it is otherwiſe, forty years is cut off, which in a mans age is no little matter.

Again, Obſerve, that this age was not the age of Zerubbabel, Jeſhua, and that generation that came out of Babylon, but the age of thoſe who were carried into Babylon by Nebucadnezzar, and ſo indeed were of the generation before Zerubbabel, and the multitude that came up with him, though yet ſome of them were living at this day.

Obj. 2. I have met with it objected, That the time from Cyrus firſt, to the end of Darius ſecond, could not be very long, becauſe no Prieſt was by the Law to officiate above twenty years; from thirty years old to fifty was their limited time, Numb. 4. verſ. 2, 3, 22, 23, 30, 35, 30, &c. now Jeſhua was High Prieſt in Cyrus firſt, and ſo likewiſe in Darius ſecond, the diſtance therefore could not be great, no not twenty years.

Anſ. This Law was not a Law for the High Prieſt, but only for the inferiour Prieſts, the Levites, as is clear;

1 Becauſe whereſoever it is ſpoken of, Levites only are mentioned, as being ſubject to it.

2 Becauſe the work it ſelf, that at fifty years of age they were exempted from, was ſervile work, work that was a burden, as the bearing about of the Tabernacle, verſ. 24, 25, 26. which work too they were to be appointed unto by the High Prieſt, as their Maſter and Lord, as verſ. 19, 27. therefore did not this work, and ſo not this Law, belong to him.

3 I finde particular inſtances of High Prieſts that did officiate when they were above fifty years old; what ſhall we ſay to Eli? was not Eli High Prieſt when upwards of fifty, conſidering he was ninety eight years old when he died, 1 Sam. 4.15. and yet Samuel (who it is evident was born in the time of Elies Prieſthood) but a childe even then when Eli was very old, and his eyes dim, as is clear, chap. 2. compare verſ. 18, 19. with ver. 22. and chap. 3. verſ. 2. compare with verſ. 8.

But the inſtance of Iehojada is undeniable; for obſerve, he creates Ioaſh King, 2 Chron. 23. Ioaſh reigns forty years, chap. 24.1. Iehoſada dies before Ioaſh, ver. 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22. Iehoſada is one hundred and thirty years old when he dieth, ver. 15. if therefore Iehojada died in Ioaſh his fortieth year, yet conſidering that he crowned Ioaſh King, and that in the time of his Prieſthood, and died not till he was aged one hundred and thirty years, it will neceſſarily follow that he was High Prieſt at ninety years old. This Law therefore was not a Law for the High Prieſt, but only for the Levites; they ceaſed to officiate at fifty years of age, but the High Prieſt was ſuch during life; and indeed he could not otherwiſe have been a fit Type of Chriſt, who ever liveth to make interceſſion for us.

This Objection, becauſe I have met with it, I thought good to anſwer, though otherwiſe I ſhould never have objected it to my ſelf.

I know nothing elſe can be ſaid for a ſhorter time, unleſſe we ſhould here again bring up thoſe forty ſix years, Iohn 2.20. with Daniels ſeven weeks, chap. 9.25. both which I have anſwered before in traverſing the ſeventy weeks.

The time therefore from the beginning of Cyrus first, unto the end of Darius ſecond, may well bee reckoned ſeventy years, notwithſtanding the weight of any objection againſt it.

But to come nearer; what if we may finde in Scripture this time to be meted and meaſured ſeventy years? If the Scripture meaſure agree to the meaſure of the ancient Greeks, it will adde credit to their reports in more things then this one.

Let us here take into conſideration Zecharies ſeventy years, Chap. 1.12. chap. 7.5. this ſeeming to me to be their proper place.

That theſe ſeventy years ſhould be underſtood of the ſeventy years of the Captivity, cannot be, becauſe (as Doctor Lightfoot hath well obſerved in his Chronicle upon Heſter ten) the ſeventy years of the Captivity, beginning with the fourth of Jehojakim, did end long before this time, viz. with the third of Belſhazzar, or the laſt year of the Babylonian Monarchy; but the ſeventy years Zechary ſpeaks of, bring us to the ſecond of Darius, which is many years upwards in the Perſian Monarchy.

Doctor Lightfoots own account will not neither help the buſineſs; for as he hath nothing but thoſe former ſuppoſitions (which having been put into the ballance were found too light) to maintain that conception, viz. That that Darius who advanced the work of the Temple, did reign at ſuch a diſtance from Cyrus; ſo if theſe two things bee throughly ſcanned,

1 What Darius it was who ſet this work on foot.

2 At what diſtance from Cyrus (I ſpeak now of time in the general only) the compelling circumſtances of the ſtory, each duly weighed and laid together, will neceſſarily infer him to have lived, (both which my former diſcourſe will give ſome light into) it will then appear, That Doctor Lightfoot himſelf hath exceeded the bounds of ſeventy years, as many years as hee chargeth upon the fore-going reckoning, accounting it worthy, for that reaſon only, to be caſt out; by his own rule therefore, his own muſt go out with it.

What will thoſe Opinions make of theſe ſeventy years, that will have the finiſhing of the Temple-work to ſtand at forty ſix years diſtance from Cyrus, as ſome; or elſe at one hundred and eleven, or one hundred and thirteen years, as others; ſeeing it is moſt evident that the complaint the Angel makes of ſeventy years ſufferings was in the ſecond of Darius, Zech. 1.7. compared with ver. 12. which was but four years before the work was finiſhed, as appears from Ezra 6.15. May theſe allow the ſeventy years to be the years of the Captivity? if ſo, there had need be ſome good reaſon ſhewn for it, why the Holy Ghoſt, after the ſeventy years of the Captivity were ended, and forty and odde years more run out (as it follows upon the one opinion) or upwards of an hundred years more, (as it follows upon the other) ſhould ſpeak ſtill of ſeventy years.

For my own part, I think theſe ſeventy years are to be reckoned from the firſt of Cyrus, from the beginning of which year untill the end of Darius ſecond, (at which time the Angel makes this complaint, and therefore the time of the complaint is expreſly noted to be in the eleventh Month, upon the twenty fourth day of the Month, in the ſecond year of Darius, which was the very cloſe of the year, only one Month and a few days wanting) are reckoned by the Greek Hiſtorians exactly ſeventy years, as I have before obſerved, and ſo indeed theſe ſeventy years are not the ſeventy years of the Captivity, but another ſeventy, taking beginning where they end?

Obj. But if ſo, why doth the Angel plead Gods having had indignation againſt his people threeſcore and ten years? he might have pleaded twice threeſcore and ten years.

Anſ. We muſt conſider the Angel here ſpoken of (which is Jeſus Chriſt) now ſpeaks by way of complaint, How long, Lord wilt thou not have mercy — and therefore he purpoſely lets fall the firſt ſeventy years, taking no notice of them, becauſe as to that time he had no cauſe to complain, they had deſerved it highly, provoked his Father, for which cauſe Jeruſalem was juſtly made a ruinous heap: It was the penalty of that Law, or outward Covenant made with this people at the coming out of Aegypt, that in caſe they did rebel they ſhould be carried captive into other Countries out of their own Land, Levit. 26. verſe. 27, 28. to the end; and obſerve, this was the higheſt puniſhment of all, inflicted for higheſt breach of the Law, therefore mentioned in the laſt place. Now all the ſeventy years of the Captivity they were under this very puniſhment, therefore the thing being moſt righteous, and indeed a thing unavoydable, if God would be juſt, conſidering the terms of the Covenant this people ſtood under, Chriſt (who pleadeth righteouſly) will not complain of it, leſt he ſhould complain of his Father for doing that which was moſt righteous, and which he could not without breach of Juſtice have omitted. But now as to the time that paſſed afterwards, he had cauſe to complain, becauſe all this time was over and above the prefixed time of their puniſhment, and therefore hee complains, Lord how long wilt thou not have mercy on Jeruſalem, and on the Cities of Judah, againſt which thou haſt had indignation theſe threeſcore and ten years? as to ſay, Theſe ſeventy years of thy indignation are more then ſhould be; and that Chriſt ſpeaks by way of complaint is clear, becauſe God is fain to give him good words to ſtill him, and tell him the work ſhould be deferred no longer, verſ. 13, 14, 16, 17. an Argument that he had ſome cauſe to complain, and that upon this account, the work had been deferred, and that for ſo long a time as ſeventy years. So that this Text, rightly conſidered, is an Argument for us, and holds forth thus much, That we are not to begin theſe ſeventy years till the ſeventy of the Captivity were ended; for Chriſt complains of the wrath of his Father to his people all theſe ſeventy years; but as to the ſeventy years of the Captivity, which was only ſatisfaction to that outward Covenant they had broken, Chriſt had no cauſe to complain of one day of that, nor would he, the puniſhment being moſt juſt, and the Covenant broken, and no puniſhment inflicted had been unjuſt.

Obj. 2. But if this opinion be true, why alſo are the Faſts of the fourth, and the fifth, and the ſeventh, and the tenth Month ſaid to be of ſeventy years continuance, Zach. 7.5. with Chap. 8.19. ſeeing from the time Jeruſalem was taken, the Temple deſtroyed, &c. which things are the grounds of their faſting, it was now to this time (as we account it) one hundred and twenty years, viz. fifty in Babylon after Jeruſalem and the Temple were deſtroyed, and ſeventy after the coming thence?

Anſ. The only foot that this Objection ſtands upon, is a ſuppoſition that the aforeſaid Faſts were kept in Babylon; Now as to that I anſwer.

1 That there is no Scripture proving ſuch a thing. That, Pſal. 137.1, 2. will not do it, for it is one thing to weep occaſionally, (which is the weeping there mentioned, Gods people ſit down by the Rivers of Babylon, one while they call Sion to remembrance, another while they are ſcoffed at by the Babylonians, theſe things draw forth occaſional tears) but it is another to weep in the ſolemn Aſſembly, and as a ſolemn Ordinance, which calls upon me to weep and mourn, and that at ſuch a time. Now ſuch was the weeping of the fourth, and fifth, and ſeventh, and tenth Months, which were times of weeping and mourning, inſtituted and ordained by the publick authority of the Jewiſh Church, to be celebrated yearly, though by the way remember, that their practice in this is not a binding rule to us in Goſpel days; National inſtitutions in Spiritual matters ceaſing with their National Church.

2 As there is no Scripture for it, that theſe ſolemn Faſts were kept in Babylon; ſo look upon the thing in reaſon, and it ſeems no way likely or probable; for conſider, the Faſts were Publique and National, kept not by ſome particular perſons, but by the whole Body of the Congregation of Iſrael, as appears, Chap. 7. ver. 5, 6. Now it may with good reaſon be queried, Whether it be a thing at all probable, that the Babylonians would admit of ſuch exerciſes under their very Noſes?

Obj. If it be ſaid, Though the thing were publique, as to the Jews, that is, the whole Body of that Nation in Babylon did Faſt, yet might they ſo appoint their meetings, as that the thing might well be kept from the knowledge of the Babylonians?

I anſwer; Conſider, that as theſe Faſts were Publique, ſo alſo they were ſet Faſts, appointed to ſeveral times, and theſe celebrated annually, year after year, and that for a long time, ſeventy years; all which things laid together, we cannot imagine that the celebration of ſo many days, for ſo many years together, ſhould, or could be a thing ſo private as to be hid from the Babylonians; if it were known, then I ſay muſt they be kept with their allowance. Now conſidering Babylon the place, Satans buſie rage to ſtir up his Inſtruments againſt any Spiritual work, the Babylonians themſelves being Idolaters, and Worſhippers of a falſe god, withall the occaſions of theſe ſolemn meetings, whereof that of the fourth Month was in memorial of Nebuchadnezzars taking Jeruſalem, which fell out in this Month, 2 King. 25.3, 4. Jer. 39.2, 3. That of the fifth, for the burning of the Temple, which was done the tenth day of this Month, 2 King. 25.8, 9. Jer. 52.12, 13. That of the ſeventh Month for the death of Gedaliah, which hapned in this Month, and was the cauſe of the total diſperſing of the remnant left in Judea, Ier. 41.1, &c. That of the tenth, for Nebuchadnezzars ſiege which was laid againſt Jeruſalem in the tenth day of this Month, 2 King. 25.1. Jer. 52.4. All which occaſions of theſe ſolemn Aſſemblies (that of the ſeventh Month excepted) was ſuch as might ſuggeſt to the Babylonians, that this people aſſembled together yearly to lament their good ſucceſſe and proſperity. Let us lay all together, and where we want a determinate rule, conjecture, whether (the premiſes conſidered) it be a thing likely that the Babylonians would permit ſuch conſtant yearly Exerciſes in Babylon or no?

I am therefore inclined to think, That the appointment and celebration of theſe Publique ſolemn Faſts, was not in Babylon, but upon their coming thence; after the people of Iſrael had liberty given them by Cyrus to return from Babylon, and were come up to Jeruſalem, with their hearts greatly raiſed through the preſent ſenſe of their deliverance, and alſo with expectations of ſomething more then ordinary, that God would now do for them; and having no ſooner ſet hand to the work, but are ſtopped, contrary to expectation, they are now put upon looking backwards, to ſee what might be the cauſe God ſhould deal thus with them. And to this, their hearts being now melted, and affected under the preſent ſenſe of their deliverance, they are in a frame and poſture much better then while they remained in Babylon under a Cloud, and a ſenſe of wrath, which we know ever unfits, and makes a Soul uncapable of looking back upon former ways and walkings. Now looking backwards they finde, That they had received ſuch and ſuch heavy ſtroaks from God formerly, which ſtroaks fell upon the whole Body of the Nation, yet had they never as yet in any ſolemn way humbled themſelves before God for thoſe their ſins and provocations, which brought theſe ſtroaks upon them: Hereupon they appoint ſeveral days of Humiliation to bee kept yearly, till the anger of the Lord ſhould be removed; and the better to ſtir up their hearts, (through a putting them in remembrance by the ſtroak) they appoint their days upon ſuch and ſuch times as the ſtroaks, which did prove moſt fatal to them, fel upon them, which is all the reaſon can be given of the appointment of the Faſts in ſuch and ſuch Months, as is before ſpecified.

And therefore obſerve, in the fourth of Darius, in the ninth Month, when now the people of God perceiving the ſtorm to be well blown over, the Temple-work being now on foot again, and brought to ſome perfection, do ſend men, as Sherezer, Regemmelech, &c. to enquire whether they ſhould any longer (it ſeeming that God was now pacified) go on with that faſting which they had continued for ſeventy years; the anſwer is given by the Prophet to the Congregation there preſent, and the People that were in the Land, ver. 4.5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10. and not to thoſe in Babylon, of whom not one ſyllable is ſpoken. A clear Argument that Sherezer, Regemmelech, &c. were not ſent by the people in Babylon, (as ſaith the generall opinion) but were indeed employed, being two Honourable perſons, by the whole Body of the People now in the Land, to go up to the Houſe of the Lord, and enquire for them, concerning this practice they had ſo long continued among them; Whether Gods wrath ſeeming now to be pacified, they ſhould continue it any longer. Anſwer hereupon by the Prophet is given to the people of the Land, proving clearly, that this Faſt was not a Faſt in Babylon, but a Faſt that had been kept up and continued by the people of the Land, which (as I have ſaid) began upon their coming thither, and the cauſe till this day remaining, had been continued by them ever ſince; through which long continuance of time it was even now grown into a form, therefore God by the Prophet ſeems at firſt to diſown it, Chap. 7.5, 6. and yet afterwards (as being a thing lawfull and good in its firſt inſtitution, though through continuance of time abuſed by them) he ownes it, Chap. 8.19. So that this text rightly underſtood, is ſo farre from hurting us, that contrariwiſe it brings with it a ſecond teſtimony to prove the truth of our Aſſertion, that it was ſeventy years betwixt Cyrus, and the Darius that forwarded the Temple-work.

If any ſhould yet think our meaſure to be miſapplied, and that ſurely it could not be ſo long as ſeventy years from the return of the Captivity to the end of Darius ſecond, I ſhall adde one conſideration more, viz. That Iddo, who was Grandfather to the Prophet Zechary, as appears Zech. 1.1. was one of them that came up with Zerubbabel, as we ſhall finde, Nehem. 12.4. which Iddo Nehemiah ſpeaks of, that it was the ſame perſon, and not another of the ſame name appears, in that we finde Zechariah, (and that in the daies of Jojakim ſonne of Jeſhua, which well agrees to the latter times of Zechariahs Prophecy) mentioned by name, as ſucceeding in the line of Iddo, ver. 16. and though Zechariah is there recorded amongſt the chief of the Prieſts, yet doth not that hinder but it ſhould be this very Zechariah, ſeeing moſt ordinarily Prophets were taken from amongſt the Prieſts; Jeremiah was of the Prieſts of Anathoth, and yet a Prophet, Jer. 1.1. Ezekiel was a Prieſt, Ezek. 1.3. and yet a Prophet. All therefore that can be gathered thence is, That Zechariah as hee was a Prophet, ſo alſo he was one of the chief of the Prieſts.

Now Zechariah who mentions theſe ſeventy years, being Grand-childe to one that came up with Zerubbabel, it may very well bee thought, that betwixt theſe two, as much time as ſeventy years may be allowed, and yet no monſtrous Concluſion.

From the whole it appears, That to fix the advance of the Temple-work upon the ſecond year of Darius Longimanus, doth not at all jarre, but rather hath an admirable concurrency, ſo as no opinion beſides it, with what ſeems to be moſt clear in Scripture, as touching the time betwixt Cyrus firſt year, and Darius ſecond.

Withall (though I would not be over-curious, for I hate over-much niceneſs and curioſity in Notions, as well as in Words, yet let mee ſay) hereby we gain this, to run the time betwixt the beginning of the Babyloniſh Captivity, and Chriſts Paſſion, all along upon ſeventies; (the Number ſo famous for ſetting forth this time.)

Firſt, We have Seventy years Captivity in Babylon.

Secondly, Seventy years of mourning in the Land after their return thence, before the Work of the Temple can go on.

Thirdly, After that we have Seventy years, and ſeven odde, (obſerve, though we have ſome odde, yet they run ſtill upon the Number ſeven) before the Jews can have liberty to build their City, and form themſelves into a Common-wealth; for ſo many years paſſed betwixt Darius ſecond, and the time of Nehemiahs Commiſſion.

Laſtly, We have Seventy Weeks, which makes ſeven ſeventies, from the building Jeruſalem, to the Paſſion of Chriſt.

In a word, from the beginning of the Captivity, untill Chriſts Paſſion, we have ten Seventies, and three odde years; for though I mentioned even now ſeven odde years, yet it muſt bee remembred, that four years out of that ſeven are to be deducted, to ſupply the want of thoſe four years, which I have before proved are to be cut off from the ſeventeeth and laſt of Daniels weeks; theſe deducted, there then remains three odde only. Now allowing theſe three to the time Chriſt Preached, which was three years, we may then ſay, That from the beginning of the Babyloniſh Captivity, when Iſrael loſt their Kingdome, to the annoynting of the Meſſiah, or the firſt viſible appearance of Chriſt their King, was exactly ten times ſeventy years, which maketh ſeven hundred, running ſtill upon the Number ſeven, both in the tens and hundreds. Within which time Matthew makes mention of fourteen Generations to have lived, Matth. 1.17. Note, That they muſt make ſhort Generations, that begin the ſeventy weeks with the firſt of Cyrus.

Seeing therefore that to pitch upon Darius Longimanus, as he that in his ſecond year ſet on foot the work of the Temple, doth better then any other opinion agree to the Divine Story, and other Scriptures, as to the time and things fore-going and ſucceeding the Temple-building, I do therefore conclude, That that Darius, whom the Greeks call Longimanus, was the Darius under whom the Temple-work was finiſhed.

Another Queſtion now will ariſe, (which anſwered, we come to our main Concluſion driven at throughout this Section) viz. What Artaxerxes was that which ſucceeded Darius Longimanus? for (as I ſaid at firſt) the Artaxerxes we are now enquiring after muſt needs be, by the clear circumſtances of the text, ſuch a one as did ſucceed that Darius, which gave life to the building of the Temple.

Now this is confeſſed on all hands to be that Artaxerxes whom the Greeks call Mnemon, who was next Succeſſor to Longimanus his next, Darius Nothus ſucceeding Longimanus, and Artaxerxes Mnemon, Darius Nothus.

This Artaxerxes was he that firſt gave Commiſſion to Ezra, in the ſeventh year of his reign, to go up to Ieruſalem, furniſhing him largely with Monies, and afterwards to Nehemiah, in the twentieth of his reign, to build Jeruſalem; which friendlineſs of his to Gods Cauſe and people went not unrewarded, for he reigned forty three years.

And which I cannot but mention to ſet it before Rulers, of all the Perſian Monarchs, Longimanus and Mnemon, who had been of the moſt forward in favouring the People of God, and promoting his Cauſe, were bleſſed of God with length of days beyond any their Predeceſſors, or Succeſſors in the Empire.

And which is another thing moſt obſervable, that by looking over theſe Hiſtories mine eye hath been caſt upon, viz. That ſo long as any of the Race of Cyrus (who firſt appeared to own the Cauſe of God) did continue, ſo long did the Perſian Monarchy ſtand; but under the very firſt King that was of another Race, viz. Darius Codomannus, or Darius the laſt, who was (as is affirmed) a ſtranger to the bloud of Cyrus, the whole Monarchy is loſt, and tranſlated from the Medes and Perſians to the Grecians; So mindful was God of what Cyrus did for his people, that whilſt any of his Seed remained, he would not give the Kingdom to another.

Now, beſides what hath been ſaid already from the ſcope of our Diſcourſe ſince I entred this Section, it is a thing moſt evident, that that Artaxerxes from whom Nehemiah received his Commiſsion, was, yea can be no other than, Artaxerxes Mnemon, becauſe two things are clear in Scripture concerning this Artaxerxes, which can be applied to no other but Mnemon; as,

1 That he reigned many years, two and thirty Nehemiah mentions, Chap. 13.6.

2 That the time of his reign was towards the latter end of the Perſian Monarchy, which is clear hence, becauſe Nehemiah, who lived all the time of this Artaxerxes, did afterwards live to ſee that Generation in which the Monarchy was tranſlated: for he makes particular mention of Iaddus the High Prieſt, who met Alexander the Great at his coming to Ieruſalem, and of that Darius under whom the Monarchy was loſt, Nehem. 12.11.22. which clearly proves this Artaxerxes muſt be Mnemen, none of the Monarchs after him reigning ſo long, as the Scripture it ſelf records him to have done.

Ere I can yet reach our Concluſion, there is one knob in the way to be even'd.

Obj. If Artaxerxes Mnemon be the Artaxerxes we are to ſix upon, from the twentieth of whoſe reign Daniels ſeventy weeks are to be begun, then conſidering they end with Christs Paſsion, Daniels account will ſuperabound the account of all Hiſtorians, who finde not ſo many years as four hundred and ninety betwixt the one time and the other.

Anſ. 1. There are not ſo many over and above in this account, but there are full as many wanting in their account, who begin Daniels ſeventy weeks with the Decree of Cyrus; and whether we reckon more or leſs, the matter is one and the ſame; yet is the bone there ſwallowed without pricking, by not a few godly and able men.

2 I anſwer; In caſe what I have ſaid as touching the beginning and ending of Daniels ſeventy weeks be truth, and it will not accord with Daniels Prophecy of the ſeventy weeks, nor with other Scriptures, to ſtate any other beginning or ending; then of neceſſity muſt we either condemn the Holy Ghoſt for mentioning more years within that time then indeed there are, or Hiſtorians of neglect, in not having accounted for ſo many years as they ſhould; and who ſhall we? Let God be true, but every man a Lyar.

If it be ſaid, But why will I depart from the reports of Human Writers here, when as I made uſe of them before to meaſure another time?

Anſ. 1. I did not make uſe of them before, as building any faith upon them, but becauſe I finde the account they have kept of the time to be agreeable to the Scripture account; and ſo farre I am bound to beleeve they have kept accounts aright, not becauſe they ſay ſo, but becauſe the Scripture ſaith ſo; and this I verily think, that there is ſufficient in Scripture to make out this our account, though they (I mean the Heathen Writers) were not; yet withall I am of the minde, that the conſidering what they ſay, and laying it to thoſe things that are left us in the Word, may (through the Spirits guidance) be a help to us in things wherein they are in the right, as to the more ſpeedy finding them, and the more caſie making them out; yet we holding this as a moſt conſtant and infallible rule, That all their reports muſt be bowed to the Scripture, and not one tittle of Scripture made to bow to them; Upon this Principle therefore, ſuppoſing the Heathen Writers to have computed ſixty or eighty years from Cyrus firſt to Longimanus ſecond, yet would I reckon ſeventy, and not regard their reports; and alſo upon this Principle, becauſe the Scripture hath ſo clearly determined the beginning and ending of the ſeventy weeks, I judge I am bound to account as many years betwixt time and time as Daniel doth, though Human Writers will not allow it. This Scripture rule once found determines all the different accounts of times that are left us by Human Writers, and declares whether or no any of them be in the truth; and in caſe any are, who they are.

But ſecondly, Should we go to the bare Authority of Man, yet in common reaſon more credit is to be given to what is recorded by the Greeks as touching the times of the Perſian Monarchy, then to what Writers in after times did record, as touching the continuance of the Graecian, and the ſucceeding years of the Roman until Chriſt. The reaſon is, becauſe the Monarchy of the Perſians was more ſtable, and not ſubject to thoſe ſtrange mutations, (toſſing the Ball of the Kingdome from one to another, and back again) which ordinarily cauſe miſtakes in Hiſtorians. But who knows any thing of the Graecian Monarchy, knows that it was after Alexanders death a very heap of confuſion, through the ſcuffle that aroſe betwixt Alexanders Captains, as was the whole World afterwards, when that terrible Beaſt, the Roman Monarchy, was riſing; ſo that within this time the beſt of Hiſtorians might miſtake, and loſe many years. If I had not therefore Scripture to back me, yet this would a little help the cauſe, why I follow the reports of ſome, and reject others, becauſe more credit upon a meer rational account is to be given to thoſe I follow, then to the other from whom I diſſent.

From the whole of my Diſcourſe in this Section my Concluſion is, That that Artaxerxes, in the twentieth of whoſe reign Nehemiah went up to Jeruſalem, was Artaxerxes Mnemon.

SECT. 3.

It being clear from what we have ſaid in the fore-going Section, That Artaxerxes Mnemon was the Artaxerxes that gave Commiſsion to Nehemiah, in the twentieth year of his reign, to go up to Jeruſalem and build it; The way now lies open for us to compute the years appertaining to this period, which is the firſt upon account, though in order of handling I have placed it in the cloze of our Diſcourſe, as ſeeming to me to be in that reſpect its proper place.

The Queſtion is, What number of years are we to account from Cyrus firſt, where begins the two thouſand three hundred days, till Artaxerxes Mnemons twentieth (or to ſpeak more properly his one and twentieth) where begins Daniels ſeventy weeks?

If the Scripture will help us here, then need wee not much regard what Chronologers ſay; but we may without, and though it bee againſt them, conclude the full and certain number of years even from Cyrus firſt till Chriſts Paſſion, for as for the time betwixt Mnemons twentieth and Chriſts Paſſion, Daniels ſeventy weeks are an infallible rule to meaſure that by; now, if a like Scripture-rule, or a rule equivalent thereunto, whoſe very matter whereof it is made is the Word, may be found to meaſure the time betwixt Cyrus firſt, and Mnemons twentieth, then have we the meaſure of the Sanctuary to mete the time from Cyrus firſt till our Lords Paſſion; this being the only approved and ſealed meaſure, all other meaſures muſt be ſquared by it, not it by them.

The Account the Greeks give us of this time, (which almoſt all Chronologers adhere unto) I have laid down in my Key, Theſ. 45, 46, 47. by which reckoning (but three years being allowed to Cyrus after his taking Babylon) the years are one hundred forty ſeven.

The reaſon why I give to Cyrus but three years, when the Greeks allow him thirty, I have alſo there declared, Theſ. 48.

Some more perſons then I have there ſpecified did reign in the Perſian Monarchy betwixt Cyrus and Artaxerxes Mnemon, as betwixt Cambyſes and Darius Hyſtaſpes, the Magi reigned ſeven Months; betwixt Xerxes and Artaxerxes Longimanus, Artabanus reigned ſeven Months; betwixt Artaxerxes Longimanus, and Darius Nothus, reigned firſt Xerxes the ſecond two Months, after him Sogdianus ſeven Months. But the time of the reign of theſe, as laid down by Chronologers, doth not at all break ſquares, as to the fore-going number of one hundred forty ſeven years, for the ſeven Months of the Magi are reckoned into the laſt year of Cambyſes, to whom, together with the Magi, eight years is given, but he alone reigned but ſeven years and five months, to which Chronologers adde the ſeven months of the Magi, ſo giving eight years to Cambyſes. So for the reſt, Artabanus ſeven months are included in the laſt year of Xerxes, whoſe reign with theſe ſeven months added made up but twenty one years. The two months of Xerxes the ſecond, and the ſeven of Sogdianus are all included in the fortieth and laſt year of Longimanus, who with theſe nine months added, reigned forty years.

And for this reaſon, becauſe theſe reigned ſo ſhort a time, no one of them filling up a year, and the time of the reign of each being alwaies included in the reign of his Predeceſſor, are the Names of theſe by many left out, and not put into the ordinary Catalogue of the Perſian Kings.

But ſhould I lay the bottome of my demonſtration here, I ſhould depart from my own rule; I am therefore to enquire what Scripture ſaith to our Queſtion, and whether that will allow this number of years, yea or no.

As to the Queſtion therefore, firſt in the generall, let us ſee whether there bee any footing in Scripture for ſo long a time, leaving the ſet number of years.

Now as to this let it only bee minded again which hath been proved already, viz. That it was Seventy years from the firſt of Cyrus, till the time that the Work of the ſecond Temple was again ſet on foot by Darius; here wee have (the odde ſeven years ſet aſide) the half of the time, now for the other ſeventy ſeven wee have this to ſay (the ground of which hath been alſo laid down before) that Jeſhua was High Prieſt in Darius ſecond year, Ezra 5.1, 2. but now in Artaxerxes twentieth, Eliaſhib (Jeſhuaes Grand-childe) was High Prieſt, Nehem. 3.1, 20. who alſo was ſo aged at Ezraes coming up to Jeruſalem, which was thirteen years before Nehemiahs, that he had a Son a Prieſt, Ezra 10.6. time muſt be allowed for this change, and to allow ſeventy ſeven years is no abſurd concluſion. Put the one and the other together, and as many years as one hundred forty ſeven may well be thought to have paſſed, betwixt the time of Cyrus Decree, and Nehemiahs Commiſſion.

But it wil be ſaid, Although it may be conceived that this time was as long, yet is not what hath been ſaid ground ſufficient for a determined time; But now the time we are ſeeking after muſt be a determined time, for a few years more or leſſe puts our whole account out of order.

In anſwer hereto, I grant that we have not a determined time of one hundred forty ſeven years upon any particular ſum mentioned in Scripture, but in caſe wee have it upon general Scripture Principles, or the account of any groſſe ſum, and no particular text ſo contradicting, but that the time may be judged as long, the proof is good, and proof of this kind is as firm as any other; for if proof by a groſſe ſum be not admitted, let any (if they can) caſt the time how many years Iſrael abode in Aegypt, and after that how many years it was from Ioſhuaes dividing to the twelve Tribes the Land of Canaan by Lot, untill the time that the Judges began to bear rule; theſe times can be counted no otherwayes, but only by a groſſe ſumme; if therefore proof by a groſſe ſumme be denied, the very foundation of all Chronology is razed.

Now I ſay, though we have not any particular Text that doth aſcertain us that this time was exactly a hundred forty and ſeven years, neither more nor leſſe; yet we have it upon general Scripture principles, and the account of a groſſe ſumme.

My Argument lyes thus, The two thouſand three hundred dayes muſt expire at the ſame point with the one thouſand three hundred thirty five. The truth of this is evident beyond denial, from what hath been already ſaid as touching either Propheſie, that Chap. 8. and the other Chap. 11, 12. which determines, Firſt, that the matter and ſcope of either Propheſie is one and the ſame. Secondly, that either Propheſie hath one and the ſame end, both ſhutting up with the end or final deſtruction of the fourth Monarchy. This being ſo, the two thouſand three hundred dayes, which bring us to the end of one Propheſie; the one thouſand three hundred thirty five, which brings us to the end of the other, muſt neceſſarily expire at one and the ſame point.

Hence I conclude,

That having ſo much of the two thouſand three hundred dayes upon firm and particular ground as will make the two thouſand three hundred dayes to end with the one thouſand three hundred thirty five, ſaving only theſe one hundred forty ſeven years, that therefore becauſe they 〈1 page duplicate〉 〈1 page duplicate〉 muſt end together, and with this allowance will, but without it cannot, muſt the remaining years run upon the groſſe ſumme, and ſo be counted one hundred forty ſeven, not a year more or leſſe. And this conſequence is ſo natural and neceſſary, that put caſe the account of the Greeks were thrown out of the doors, and all that we have ſaid before in our two former Sections and this, proving that the time may well be judged as long, were yet unſaid, yet in caſe no particular Scripture do neceſſarily prove this time muſt be either ſhorter or longer, I ſay this alone determines that the years from Cyrus firſt, to the time of Nehemiahs Commiſſion, muſt be one hundred forty ſeven, not a year more or leſſe.

If it be ſaid, But the weight of our Argument lyes upon the beginning of the one thouſand three hundred thirty five dayes; which ſhould another beginning then that which I have elſewhere ſtated be found for them, our Concluſion is nothing.

I anſwer, Whoſoever is not ſatisfied with that beginning we have formerly laid down, but ſeeks another, muſt mind theſe two things; 1 That he ſo ſix the head of the one thouſand three hundred thirty five dayes, as that he make them to expire at the ſame point with the two thouſand three hundred. 2 That he alſo make the one thouſand two hundred and ninety, (which ariſeth from the ſame Head with the one thouſand three hundred thirty five) to end at the ſame point with the one thouſand two hundred and ſixty. If either of theſe be not done, thoſe manifeſt Scripture-principles, laid down in my Key, Theſ. 17. and Theſ. 34. are deſtroyed. Now he that ſhall undertake this work, I queſtion not but that after he hath well conſidered all, he will find it a more eaſie thing to beleeve, then prove.

But ſecondly, I anſwer, That the beginning of the one thouſand three hundred thirty five dayes with Julian, is the only beginning (ſetting the Harmony aſide) that is conſonant to truth. I argue thus, The taking away of the daily ſacrifice, and ſetting up the abomination that maketh deſolate, which is the Head of this number, Dan. 12.11, 12. muſt be taken either in a litteral ſenſe, as referring to the people of the Jews, or in a ſpiritual, as referring to the Gentile Saints. That the words ſhould here be underſtood in a ſpiritual ſenſe is no way likely to be the mind of Daniel in this place, the reaſon is clear, becauſe, the promiſe of a certain time of Deliverance, verſ. 1. which was the very thing that put Daniel upon querying, and drew forth theſe anſwers about the time, is made expreſly to the Jews, which therefore are twice in that firſt verſe called Daniels People. The Prince that ſtandeth for the children of thy people — at that time ſhall thy people be delivered. — Although the Gentile-Saints in Daniel are called the holy people, the understanding people, the people that know their God, the Saints of the moſt high, &c. yet are they never called thy people; that is a phraſe peculiar to the Jews, as chap. 9.24. chap. 10.14. chap. 11.14. and no where applied to the Gentiles. Now whereas the Holy Ghoſt when hee gives forth that time of deliverance by way of Promiſe, which afterwards hee meaſures, uſeth this phraſe twice together, thy people, thy people, it clearly denotes, that he is ſpeaking of the Jews, and that the time of deliverance firſt promiſed, afterwards meaſured, hath a ſpecial relation to that people; ſo as that no deliverance whatſoever from Captivity and Bondage, unleſs it bee a deliverance of Natural Jews, can be a fulfilling of this place. Seeing therefore that the taking away of the daily Sacrifice in this place muſt bee underſtood literally, we muſt apply it to the time when this was done in part, or in the beginning, or elſe to the time when this work was throughly perfected. The partial performance hereof was in Veſpatians time, when the Jews loſing their Temple, in reſpect of the outward building, were put by ſacrifiſing, and could ſacrifiſe no longer, the place in which all their Sacrifices were to be offered, being now demoliſhed. This is that Chriſt points at, Matth. 24.15. and this was, to ſpeak properly, rather a Ceſſation of the daily Sacrifice, then a taking it away.

The compleat performance hereof was in Julians time, when the Jews loſt their Temple, not only in reſpect of building, but alſo in reſpect of the very being of it, the very foundation being now removed, and the Temple-ground it ſelf loſt by an Earthquake.

Now the Queſtion is, Whether of the two are we to chuſe for our Head to the one thouſand three hundred thirty five days, whether the demoliſhing of the Temple-building in Veſpaſians time, or the utter deſtruction of the Temple being, in Julians?

Anſ. Not the firſt, becauſe the deliverance pointed at in the end of this time, being (upon our aforeſaid ground) a deliverance of the people of the Jews, the event (conſidering that the time from that beginning is expired long ſince) doth neceſſarily prove it falſe. And this Argument from the event is firm and good, conſidering the premiſes, viz. That the Jews are here ſpoken of, and aſſurance given to Daniel of their deliverance after ſuch a time. If therefore we ſee the time run out, and that many years, and yet no ſuch thing in accompliſhment as the Jews deliverance, wee may truly ſay, ſome other beginning muſt bee ſought; for there can be no error in the Word it ſelf, whatſoever may bee in mens interpretations thereof. It neceſſarily therefore follows, (becauſe the words being to be underſtood literally, as pointing to the Iewiſh people, and the place of their Worſhip, we have no other beginning) that we ſhould begin with the ſecond, viz. The compleating of this work of Temple-deſolation, which fell out in the time of Julian. So that to begin the one thouſand three hundred thirty five days with Iulian, hath more approbation from Scripture (waving our Harmony) than any other opinion.

Now the one thouſand three hundred thirty five days being begun there, our former Argument for one hundred forty ſeven years betwixt the coming out of Babylon, and Nehemiahs time, will appear good upon the groſs ſum: for, by this allowance, the two thouſand three hundred days wil, without it cannot, end (as yet they muſt) with the one thouſand three hundred thirty five.

That the Greeks, and moſt Chronologers that follow their accounts, do compute the ſame number of years from the beginning of Cyrus firſt, untill the end of Artaxerxes Mnemons twentieth, cannot be looked upon as an Argument againſt us, but if any thing, it is rather an Argument for us; Let us not, becauſe every man is a Lyar, make the Word of God (which in this caſe ſpeaks enough for us, though men had ſaid nothing) a Lyar too. If the Devil ſhould ſpeak agreeable to this rule, ſo farre there is truth in him; but if Angels ſpeak againſt it, it is becauſe there is no truth in them.

Obj. But Daniel, chap. 11.1, 2. reckons but four Kings, after Cyrus, to have reigned in the whole Perſian Monarchy, untill the time that the Monarchy was tranſlated to the Greeks. And if ſo, then may not this time, which contains not the whole, but a part of the time of that Monarchy, be counted ſo long as one hundred forty ſeven years.

Anſ. Should I grant the thing, yet is it not impoſſible; for if but four reigned, if we allow to the reign of each fifty years (which is no thing miraculous) the three firſt alone will exceed our time, and the others reign added will go as farre as any conceive the Perſian Monarchy did laſt. They that urge this, muſt prove from Scripture, that theſe did not reign ſo long, or they do nothing againſt our former Arguments, which do ſtrongly infer, (till the contrary be proved) that if betwixt Cyrus and Alexander, but four did reign, they muſt reign ſo long.

But ſecondly, I do not grant the thing, nor ſee the leaſt ſhew of reaſon from the text to recede from the account of the Greeks, but rather to adhere to them.

The Queſtion is, Whether the fourth King there ſpoken of be the laſt King of the Perſian Monarchy, yea or no?

Anſ. Daniel ſaith not ſo, nor will his words rightly interpreted infer ſo much. The words in Daniel, (which were ſpoken in the third year of Cyrus, as Daniel 10.1.) are only theſe, Behold, there ſhall ſtand up yet, (i. e. ſucceeding Cyrus, who was preſent King when this was ſpoken) three Kings in Perſia, and the fourth (i. e. the King that ſhould ſucceed theſe three) ſhall be farre richer than they all, and by his ſtrength, through his riches, he ſhall ſtir up all againſt the Realm of Graecia.

Here is not a word that the fourth ſhould bee the laſt, but that the fourth ſhould be richer than all the other, and by his ſtrength, through his riches, ſtir up all againſt the Realm of Graecia. Now how exactly doth this anſwer to what is recorded by the Greek Hiſtorians? if we count the Government of the Magi to be one of the three firſt Kings that ſucceeded Cyrus; for though they continued in the Government but a little while, for which cauſe ſome (as I have ſaid) confound their reign with the reign of Cambyſes; yet they being a Head diſtinct, the Scripture, which ſpeaks of things diſtinctly, and as they are, account them ſo, not regarding their ſhort continuance.

Now I ſay, the Magi being reckoned one of theſe three, how patly do Daniels words anſwer to the reports of the Greeks? for Cyrus they reckon as the firſt, and the founder of the Perſian Monarchy; after him they reckon, 1 Cambyſes, 2 The Magi. 3 Darius Hyſtaſpes. Here are the three ſtanding up after Cyrus, the fourth they mention (who ſucceeded Darius Hyſtaſpes) is Xerxes the Great, who is famouſly known in the ſtories of thoſe ancient Writers, for two things.

1 For his Riches, which his Father Darius Hyſtaſpes had hoorded up, and that in ſo great abundance, that he was called the Hoorder of the Kingdom.

2 For his notable expedition againſt Greece, carrying with him no leſſe than a Million of Souldiers (ſome reckon them very many more, almoſt two Millions) which were tranſported over the Sea, with upwards of five thouſand Gallies, and other Veſſels. See Sir Walter Rawleighs Hiſtory of the World, Lib. 3. Cap. 6. Sect. 1. Theſe two things which Xerxes (who according to the Greeks was the fourth King after Cyrus) was ſo famous for, are the very things pointed at by Daniel, as 1. That the fourth King ſhould be farre richer than they all, i. e. than all his Predeceſſors. 2. That by his ſtrength, through his riches, hee ſhould ſtir up all againſt the Realm of Graecia.

Obj. But though Daniel doth not call the fourth King after Cyrus, the laſt of the Perſian Monarchy, yet the following words infer little leſſe; for the very next that we read of after this fourth King, is Alexander the Great, verſ. 3. And a mighty King ſhall ſtand up, that ſhall rule with great Dominion, and do according to his will. Theſe words can be underſtood of none but Alexander the Great, as the following verſe makes appear. And when he ſhall ſtand up, his Kingdom ſhall be broken, (ſo was Alexanders by his ſudden death) and ſhall be divided towards the four Winds of Heaven, and not to his poſterity; (thus was Alexanders, who dying without iſſue, his Kingdom was divided betwixt his four chief Captains) nor according to his Dominion which he ruled, i. e. none of Alexanders Captains were ſo potent as he; which words agree exactly to thoſe, Dan. 8. verſ. 8, 21, 22. where we have the very ſame deſcription of Alexander.

Anſ. I grant it, that Alexander is here meant, yet doth it not therefore follow that the fourth King before mentioned muſt be the laſt of the Perſian Monarchy, unleſſe it could be proved, that Daniels enumeration of Kings, reſpects the whole Monarchy of the Perſians, ſo as not one King more reigned in that Monarchy than is there mentioned, which I am ſure cannot be done from Scripture. The ſtory of Ezra will not at all help it, till they have proved the ſame of that alſo, viz. That it is a perfect Chronicle, and hath given us a perfect enumeration of the Perſian Monarchs; which is a thing (as I have formerly obſerved) not in the leaſt intended in thoſe Books.

But rather to put the matter out of all doubt, the buſineſſe in Daniel lyes thus. The Holy Ghoſt is treating, not of particular Kings, but of Monarchies in generall; and therefore it is no part of his ſcope to tell us how many Kings did reign in this or that Monarchy, (which is not a thing obſerved in any of the Kingdoms afterwards ſpoken of in this Chapter, therefore ſhould not be urged as any part of the ſcope here) but his drift is to ſhew us;

1 How many Monarchies, from that time untill the time of the end, ſhould bee in the world.

2 What remarkable changes ſhould be in theſe Monarchies themſelves, not as to the reign of particular Kings, but as to the alteration of Governments.

3 What more noted things ſhould be done in the time of theſe Monarchies, by either of them, as conſidered under this or that Government, either againſt Gods people that were, the Jews; or Gods people that are, the Gentiles; or againſt both in the time of the end, or the evening of the Worlds, or worldly Kingdoms day; or what more remarkable rents, occaſioning fearfull Civil broyls, Commotions, Diviſions, &c. ſhould befall this or that Monarchy within the time of its particular continuance.

And laſtly, Whence, or upon what occaſion, the tranſlation of Monarchies from one people to another (as from the Medes and Perſians to the Greeks, from them to the Romans, and from them the tranſlation of the Kingdom and Dominion, and greatneſſe of the Kingdom under the whole Heaven, into the hands of another people, viz. The Saints of the moſt High, who till this day had always and ever been cruſhed, by and under theſe Monarchies) ſhould ariſe. In theſe things lies the main ſcope of the Holy Ghoſt, who doth not in the leaſt drive at ſuch a thing, as to tell us what particular Kings ſucceeded one another in this or that Monarchy, but only names things of this nature ſo farre as they ſerve the main ſcope, but no further.

Now obſerve, the thing the Holy Ghoſt would have us learn (as ſeems to me) from the ſecond and third verſes of this Chapter, is this; As to take notice of ſuch a Monarchy as was that of the Perſians, ſo more eſpecially to minde the cauſe, and the occaſion of the tranſlation of this Monarchy from the Perſians to the Graecians, and the time when this cauſe ſhould be given, and the ground of a Quarrel betwixt theſe two Nations laid. Now to make out this, he tells us, how that after Gyrus three Kings ſhould ariſe in Perſia, and a fourth after them, which fourth ſhould be very rich, and ſtrong, and through the greatneſs of his ſtrength and riches, ſhould ſtir up all againſt the Realm of Graecia. This (as I have before ſaid) was moſt exactly to a tittle fulfilled in Xerxes the Great, who was the fourth King after Cyrus in the Perſian Monarchy; exceeding all his Predeceſſors in power and riches, and with all his power invades the Realm of Graecia. Here now is the ground of an inveterate hatred and quarrel laid betwixt theſe two Nations, which afterwards occaſioned the tranſlation of the Monarchy; for the Greeks, though at preſent they maintained their own Cauſe, and did worſt their potent Enemie, yet was this work (as Hiſtories record) chiefly done by Sea, where (though they were but a handful to the other, yet being of the two the more skilful in Sea-affairs, and the more reſolute in this kind of fight, having withall the better ſhips) in the great Battail of Salamis they gained the day; yet when this was done, though hereby they delivered themſelves, were they not ſo potent by Land as to invade their enemie. But many years after, when that valiant Commander, Alexander the Great (who durſt attempt any thing) aroſe in Greece, then the bad bloud begotten by this invaſion (though it were more than a Generation or two before) began to work, and the old grudge is remembred; and Alexander, in way of revenge of the old Quarrel, invades the Perſians, by which invaſion the Monarchy is tranſlated from the Perſians to the Graecians. So that the Holy Ghoſt takes notice of the Kings reigning in Perſia, only ſo farre as ſerves his turn, viz. To point out the time when the ground-work of that irreconcilable quarrel betwixt the Perſians and the Graecians ſhould be laid, which would in time prove the overthrow and tranſlation of the Monarchy, as it then was in the hands of the Perſians. This was done by Xerxes invaſion of Greece, which quarrel afterwards is taken up by Alexander, who to revenge the injury done to his Country (though long before) by the Perſians, invades them, overthrows their Power, wreſts the Monarchy out of their hands.

This is the true meaning of the place, without forcing or ſqueezing the text. Now conſider the thing, and what can more punctually agree to the Heathen ſtories than doth this of Daniel? to which, if we lay what wee have ſaid before, as touching the time betwixt the return from the Captivity, and Nehemiahs days, from both wee may conclude, That theſe ancient Writers, (though Heathens) have given us a true account of the Perſian Monarchy, both as touching the Perſons that reigned, and the Time how long.

And notwithſtanding the Jewiſh Writers, as Joſephus, Philo, &c. vary from the Greeks, yet are not their reports to be credited ſo much as the reports of the Greeks; and the reaſon is, becauſe we have much more ground to ſuſpect them of partiality, than the other; for Joſephus, Philo, &c. might out of deſign mention ſuch Kings only as they finde in Ezra, becauſe, beſides the miſunderſtanding this place of Daniel, they might have ſuch a conceit that Ezraes Book was a perfect Chronicle, and therefore in naming more, ſhould croſſe not this only, but that alſo; and alſo, being Jews, might ſcorn to take a relation from the Gentiles, whom they eſteemed Lyars, and accurſed. But now the Greeks had no temptation of this nature before them, which might move them out of meer deſign to be ſilent as touching any Kings that were, or tell us of Kings that were not. Nay, how can we readily think they ſhould ſo do, when as they do not only record Perſons but their Acts, of which many are things known, and famous? yea further, whereas the Hiſtory-Writers themſelves living at ſundry times of the Perſian Monarchy, did each mention the King that reigned whilſt he lived, as Herodotus mentions Xerxes, Thucydides, Artaxerxes Longimanus; Xenophon, Darius Nothus, Artaxerxes Mnemon, &c. Now is it likely they would tell ſuch lies in the very face of the times they lived in, as to endeavour to make people beleeve ſuch and ſuch Kings reigned over them, when every Childe knew the contrary. Let us not Cenſure even Heathens beyond the rules of Reaſon, nor, becauſe we are ſick of their reports, ſpew out the truth of the Scripture with them.

This Objection therefore doth not ſo offend us, but that we may, notwithſtanding it, ſafely and truly conclude, That the number of years from Cyrus firſt, to Artaxerxes Mnemons twentieth (taking in each current year) are one hundred forty ſeven.

SECT. 4.

Having found out the true and certain Number of years from Cyrus firſt, unto the year of Chriſts Paſſion, we are now to run the remaining years of the two thouſand three hundred, upon our Chriſtian Epock, or that account which is commonly called the Year of the Lord.

Here I muſt nakedly confeſſe my ſelf to bee ſhort of a clear Scripture-rule, to aſcertain us how many years have paſſed ſince the time of Chriſts Paſſion. And this I may ſay, it is a thing impoſſible (conſidering all Scripture Records did ceaſe ſuddenly after) that ſuch a rule ſhould be produced by any, as yet; though withall I am of the minde, that a little time will furniſh us with a clear Scripture-rule (all the accounts of men being ſet aſide) to meaſure the years of the World by, and that from the day of the Creation, untill Chriſts ſecond coming. And leſt this ſhould ſeem a Paradox, I explain my ſelf thus; That I conceive the Scripture hath determined the whole of this time, either by particular ſums, or groſſe ſums; now concerning every groſſe ſum this rule is to be obſerved, That the ending of this or that groſſe ſum (where the Scripture hath left us no other rule but only the groſſe ſum) can never be apprehended by a Divine Faith, but only in the accompliſhment of that thing the groſs ſum points at. When the thing is in being, then we may (though there were no account of mans in the World) ſay, now ſo many years are paſt; but before it is in being, though wee know the true beginning of the groſſe ſum, yet can we have only a Human Faith as concerning its end, i.e. to ſay, at ſuch or ſuch a time the thing pointed at by the groſſe ſum will have its accompliſhment. Now for ſo much as concerns the time from the Creation untill the ending of the ſeventy years of the Captivity, we have it all in Scripture, partly upon particular ſums, partly ſuch groſſe ſums, whoſe ends being already paſſed, they are in that reſpect as clear and demonſtrative as any particular ſum; but for the time ſince, it runs wholly upon the groſſe ſum, which groſſe ſum is this wonderfull Number of two thouſand three hundred years. Now obſerve, although we have ground (and that from the neceſſary concurrency of each Number in their end, ſo farre as the fixation of the Head of the one thouſand three hundred thirty five with Julians Act, is Scripture-proof) to conclude, that at the time when Julian ſet the Jews to re-edifie their Temple, ſo many years of the two thouſand three hundred were run out, as that the remaining years at that day were only one thouſand three hundred thirty five, yet can wee not upon Scripture-ground deſcend lower, untill we ſhall ſee the Jews beginning to ſtir.

When this thing ſhall be viſible, then may we, becauſe Daniel hath expreſly determined this to be forty five years before the ending of the one thouſand three hundred thirty five, or the two thouſand three hundred days, upon Scripture-ground alſo determine, That now ſo many of the two thouſand three hundred years are expired, as that the years which remain are only forty five. This therefore would bring light into the whole, and, did we ſee their ſtirring, it would be no difficult thing to meaſure by an infallible rule the years of the world, from the Creation untill Chriſts ſecond coming, (which ſpeaks much for the perfection of the Scriptures, viz. That they alone, without any help of mans (could we but patiently wait for the times of manifeſtation) are throughly able to perfect every of their accounts) but, till the ſet times of manifeſtation, it cannot infallibly be; for taking it for granted, That we have upon Scripture-account the Heads of Daniels one thouſand two hundred and ninety, or Iohns one thouſand two hundred and ſixty years, i. e. that the one and the other muſt begin at ſuch and ſuch a year; yet muſt we (till we ſee the things in accompliſhment, that each Number points at) truſt Human Records as to this, viz. That ſo many years from the beginning of the one or the other Number, untill this day, are run out. This I ſay, till we ſee the accompliſhment of things, can never be known but by the accounts of men; but when once we ſee things in accompliſhment, then ſuppoſe men had kept no account at all, yet may we determine as well without them as with them; and all Concluſions then being founded upon pure Scripture, will be infallible.

Obj. But it may be ſaid, Perhaps when theſe things pointed at by theſe Numbers ſhall come to be in accompliſhment, it will be ſo darkly, as that we ſhall not be able to diſcern it.

Anſ. Not ſo; for obſerve it, thoſe actions which have been the concluding-points of groſſe ſums, God did never in Old Teſtament-times bring forth in obſcurity, but clearly and manifeſtly, ſo that his people could ſee the action, and the end of the ſet time together; much leſſe therefore ſhould we expect it in New Teſtamenttimes, in which all things are more clear. It is therefore ſufficient to call into queſtion the Head of any Number whatſoever, in caſe we ſee the whole of the time run out, and yet the thing in accompliſhment ſo dark, as that wee cannot tell whether it be fulfilled or no. God never dealt thus by his people in times of Old, when light was leſſe, therefore we are not to think he will deal thus by them in Goſpel-times, when light is greater. Moſt ſurely, when Gods times are run out, his very works will be ſo manifeſt, that reaſon ſhall finde no room for to object; Divine actions will then ſilence reaſoning.

I do therefore conclude, That although unto the beginning of the one thouſand three hundred thirty five days, our rule for the meaſuring of the two thouſand three hundred is clear from Scripture upon the fore-going Principle, that theſe two Numbers end together, and therefore whereſoever wee begin the one thouſand three hundred thirty five days, muſt we conclude, that with that time or year, whatſoever it be, muſt of neceſſity be run out exactly nine hundred ſixty five of Daniels two thouſand three hundred years; for otherwiſe the years remaining of the two thouſand three hundred will bee more or leſſe then one thouſand three hundred thirty five; and if ſo, then cannot the two thouſand three hundred, and the one thouſand three hundred thirty five, end together; yet as to the time ſince, till we ſee the Iews ſtirring, we cannot by any Scripture-rule determine how many years have paſſed from that time to this.

Here therefore I freely confeſſe, wee are (and muſt be till we ſee things in accompliſhment) at a loſſe, as to our certain and infallible rule.

We may ſay, That it is a thing very probable, (and my reaſon for it I ſhall give by and by) that our Chriſtian Epock (more eſpecially within this time) hath given us a true account, and neither loſt nor gained years; but to conclude the thing abſolutely, becauſe the teſtimony, though ever ſo true, is but Human, we may not.

Though therefore I determine upon a particular year, yet not ſo abſolutely, but that I do confeſſe, That in caſe men in their accounts of that time, which at preſent to us is undetermined by Scripture, have loſt or gained years; by ſo much will things in accompliſhment fall either ſooner or later than the year I have fixed upon.

Now, though I will not here take upon me to determine (as judging the thing upon a pure Scripture-account indeterminable) whether Scaligers account of the Year of our Lord, or the vulgar account be the true (only adde, That ſhould the firſt, which fixeth the day of Chriſts Birth two years higher than the vulgar account, be the truth, then the one thouſand two hundred & ſixty days, the one thouſand two hundred & ninety, do end with the end of the preſent year, one thouſand ſix hundred fifty four; but if the laſt, viz. the vulgar have the truth in it, then do they end with the end of the year, one thouſand ſix hundred fifty ſix, the year I have always hitherto pitched upon for the Witneſſes Riſe, Iews ſtirring, &c. though I confeſs I am in a great doubt, which we are to hold to, but leſſe than twelve Months will untie this knot, and unriddle this Myſtery;) yet that neither account, though they vary two years as to their beginning, have ſince upon their reckoning either loſt or gained years, ſeems to mee a probable truth upon our fore-going Principle, viz. of the concurrence of the two thouſand three hundred, and the one thouſand three hundred thirty five days, in their end. For ſuppoſing ſome miſcarriage may have crept into either of theſe, or rather both (for ſetting aſide their ſmall difference as touching the beginning, they both, as to number of years ſince Chriſt, ſpeak the very ſame thing) in all likelihood the miſcarriage muſt bee within the time of the firſt three hundred years; for ſince that time Chriſtian Religion hath been the Religion of a principal part of the World, and hath always gone upon a publique date; but now in caſe any miſcarriage were in that time, then ſeeing we muſt after once Daniels one thouſand three hundred thirty five years are begun, allow the like number of years (viz. one thouſand three hundred thirty five) of the two thouſand three hundred, to it, that theſe two by this allowance may concur in one end; it will follow, that ſo many years over or under as the miſcarriage hath been, ſo many years, by that time we have counted the years of the two thouſand three hundred before Chriſts Paſſion, and the years of the two thouſand three hundred which follow the beginning of the one thouſand three hundred thirty five, will be found within this time (viz. betwixt Chriſts Paſſion, and the beginning of the one thouſand three hundred thirty five years) over or under the general ſum of two thouſand three hundred; for if the years within this time have been counted more than they ſhould, then will the totall ſum of the years be more upon account of the whole time put together, than two thouſand three hundred; if leſſe, then leſſe; ſo that the two thouſand three hundred muſt by this means either be ſtretched or crooked, neither of which muſt be; for this, two thouſand three hundred, is of all, the moſt exquiſite and perfect rule to meaſure times by, it being the very Date that Heaven hath ſet upon all worldly Kingdoms, the account that the wonderfull Numberer of times and ſeaſons hath left us. It therefore being a thing Divine, determines of all accounts that are Human, but ſuffers it ſelf to be determined by none.

This Harmony therefore of the two thouſand three hundred years, and the one thouſand three hundred thirty five in their end, as it doth determine the truth of all our account till Julian, viz. That we muſt of neceſſity reckon nine hundred ſixty five years, of the two thouſand three hundred, to be expired at the time of Julians Act, not a year more or leſſe, for if upwards of nine hundred ſixty five years were expired before Julian, then would there not be one thouſand three hundred thirty five remaining; if leſſe, then more, either of which deſtroys the harmony: So likewiſe doth it determine, that in all probability our Chriſtian Epock hath neither loſt nor gained years from that time to this day, becauſe if any where it had loſt or gained years, it is likely it ſhould be within the firſt three hundred years; but there it did not, therefore much more unlikely that ſince, (when Chriſtian Religion hath been more famous, and gone upon the publique Date of the greateſt Empire in the World) it ſhould have loſt or gained any.

Having thus made good the whole of our account, there is nothing now remaining but that we caſt it up, to the end we may ſee where, or with what year Daniels two thouſand three hundred years expire.

For the better doing hereof I ſhall divide the whole into Six Periods.

1. Period, Contains the number of years from the beginning of Cyrus firſt, unto the end of Artaxerxes Mnemons twentieth, (note, That the twentieth year of Mnemon, though Nehemiah received his Commiſſion within that year, yet being the current year, is to be reckoned into this Period; the ſame rule is alſo to be obſerved in all the following Periods) the years of this Period are one hundred forty ſeven.

2 Period, From the end of Artaxerxes Mnemons twentieth year, unto the end of the thirty fourth year of our Lord; The years of this Period are (the four laſt of Daniels four hundred and ninety being cut off, for our Reaſons laid down in opening Daniels ſeventy weeks) four hundred eighty ſix.

3 Period, From the end of the thirty fourth year of our Lord, untill the end of the year three hundred ſixty ſix; the years of this Period are three hundred thirty two.

Theſe three firſt Periods contain years, nine hundred ſixty five.

4 Period, From the end of the year three hundred ſixty ſix, untill the end of the year three hundred ninety ſix; the years of this Period are thirty.

5 Period, From the end of the year three hundred ninety ſix, to the end of the year one thouſand ſix hundred fifty ſix; the years of this Period are one thouſand two hundred and ſixty.

6 Period, From the end of the year one thouſand ſix hundred fifty ſix, to the end of the year one thouſand ſeven hundred and one; the years of this Period are forty five.

Theſe three laſt Periods contain of years, one thouſand three hundred thirty five.

The years of the three firſt, and the three laſt Periods put together, make up exactly 2300.

The ſum of all is, That Chriſts Perſonal Appearance,

Iſraels compleat Redemption,

The final overthrow of Beaſt, and Great Turk,

The binding of the Dragon,

The total diſſolution of the Fourth Monarchy,

The beginning of the one thouſand years reign of Chriſt and the Saints, (all which things are concurrent) falls to be, Anno Dom. one thouſand ſeven hundred and one, about forty ſeven, or forty eight years hence.

Yet whether or no Jeſus Chriſt, who tells us, that for the Elects ſake thoſe days (that is, the days of the ſore trouble which will befall the Jews more eſpecially towards the ending-time of the laſt forty five years) ſhall be ſhortned, may not appear ſome years ſooner, and ſo cut ſhort this determined time, is a queſtion too hard for mee to decide; but the appearance of our bleſſed Lord, the great God, and our Saviour Jeſus Chriſt, will put an end to this, and all other Controverſies. When we ſhall ſee no more (as all our ſight now is) through a Glaſſe darkly, but face to face: Now wee know in part, but then ſhall we know perfectly, even as we are known.

In faith of which bleſſed day let us rejoyce, in expectation of it let us always bee found waiting and watching, That whenſoever our Lord cometh, whether at even, or at midnight, or at the Cock-crowing, or in the morning, he may not, coming ſuddenly, finde us ſleeping. And what I ſay unto you, I ſay unto all, watch, Mark 13.37. So enable us Lord to do, and come O Lord Jeſus, come quickly.

Amen, Amen.

The Calculation of Daniels 2300 Years, ſhewing their beginning, their end, and the Harmony of other Myſtical Numbers with this. The ſeveral Periods The years of each Period. The Harmony of other myſticall Numbers. The total Sum. 1 From Cyrus firſt to Artax. Muemons 20. 147.     2. From Artax. 20. to Chriſts Paſſion. A.D. 34 486.   633. 3. From Chriſts Paſſion to Julians act, A.D. 366. 332.   965. 4. From Julians act to Beaſts Riſe, A.D. 396. 30. With the beginning of this Period begins Daniels 1290, 1335 years. 995. 5. From Beaſts Riſe to the end of his reign, A. D. 1656. 1260. Johns 1260 years begin & end this Period. 2255.     Concurrent with the end of this Period is the end of Dan. 1290. days, the 30 of the former Period added to the 1260 of this, making up that number.       Thus Dan. 1290. and Johns 1260. concur in their end.   6. From the end of Beaſts reign, to the end of the Fourth Monarchy, A. D. 1701. 45. Concurrentwith the end of this Period is the end of Dan. 1335 years, the 45 years of this Period added to the 1200. of the two former, making up that number. 2300.     Thus the 1335 & the 2300. concur likewiſe in their end.  

A General Rule for the right underſtanding of Prophecies, together with a more full opening the great Myſtery of Daniels little Horn.

IT is a moſt certain truth, That every Prophecy left us in the Word of God, hath in it ſelf ſufficient Characters to lead us, by comparing the Characters of it with the minde of God in other Prophecies, to the knowledge of the ſubſtance of that truth that is in it held forth; for otherwiſe the word ſhould be imperfect, and not able to expound it ſelf.

Theſe Characters are the Keys of this or that Prophecy, which when found, it will be eaſie to unlock it; but if theſe be miſſed, all mens endeavours in opening Prophecies will be in vain, and their labours loſt.

Theſe Keys, in ſome Prophecies where a man can hardly go any way but one, are quickly and with eaſe found; but in others, where by reaſon of the various turnings and windings there ſeem to be as many ways to go in as there are words, the finding of them is a thing moſt hard; and the Searcher, in caſe he have not a better guide than himſelf, ſhall never finde them.

The knowledge of the true Keys of any Prophecie from Counterfeit ones, ariſeth from the fitneſs of the Keys to the Wards of the Lock, i.e. to the ſeveral parts of the Prophecie it ſelf, and all other Prophecies concurrent with it; for this is certain, that if the true Key be found, it will open whatſoever lyes within that Prophecy, or any other that hath dependence upon it. Hence, thoſe Keys how neatly ſoever they may be wrought, which will open but a part of a Prophecy, but not the whole, are not the true Keys, but counterfeit.

Two things there are that are abſolutely deſtructive to the finding of theſe Keys.

1 An Affection to any pre-conceived opinion that may bee in a man, as touching this or that Prophecy, before yet hee hath found the certain Key thereof. So farre as any ſuch thing is in any, inſtead of ſeeking the true key, hee will make a key, and form it to his own opinion.

2 A founding Concluſions (which ſhould all bee built upon manifeſt demonſtrations taken from the naked Letter of the Text, and no other foundation) upon Allegories, i. e. becauſe many things in this or that Prophecy ſeeme fairly to allude to ſuch or ſuch an event, therefore muſt that event needs be the meaning of the Prophecy.

This is the moſt fallible way of interpreting Prophecies of all other; for how eaſie a thing is it, conſidering that ſome Prophecies (as Daniels for inſtance) lead us through many Ages, as many as amount to no leſſe than two thouſand years and upwards, that within ſo long a time a man ſhould finde more occurrencies than one that will in many things agree to what is fore-told in ſuch or ſuch a Prophecy?

Hence come thoſe innumerable miſtakes of Expoſitors, both of former, later, and preſent times alſo, they run (without a due reſpect to the indubitable Characters of the text) the meaning of this or that Prophecy, upon this or the other likely event, and ſo, as many likely events as mens reading or wits can help them to, ſo many interpretations ſhall we have of the Prophecy. And this evil hath crept in, by that in ſome ſenſe good, but as it is ordinarily underſtood and made uſe of, greatly abuſed Saying, viz. That the beſt Interpreter of Prophecies is the event.

It is a moſt dangerous thing therefore to run from the naked Letter of the text, when the meaning of any Prophecy is ſought after, to Allegorical flouriſhes, becauſe where the Letter is ſet aſide, and the Allegory made the rule of interpretation, there can be no certainty of truth, in regard Allegorical interpretations are as various as mens inventions.

Now how a man ſhall ever bee able to judge of truth in variety, in caſe he have not ſome other rule to walk by than that which produceth this variety, I cannot tell.

Although therefore it is confeſſed, that many phraſes in this or the other Prophecy do require a Spiritual meaning to be put upon them; yet (I ſay) the Characters themſelves, by which this or that Prophecy, as to ſcope and time, is diſtinguiſhed from all others, are ever to be looked for in the naked letter of the Text, which is the only ſtanding and fixed rule, and not in any Myſtical or Spiritual interpretations, which are as variable and uncertain as mens imaginations; and in caſe theſe general Characters which are deducible only from the letter, are once found, it will be then a thing more eaſie to give a right ſenſe of particular Phraſes, and to determine concerning them, in which we are to cleave to the literal, in which to ſeek a Spiritual interpretation.

For an example, I ſhall pitch upon Daniels little Horn, which as it is one of the moſt famous Prophecies in all the Scripture; ſo is there not any one (I mean that is ſo conſiderable) that hath fallen under more miſ-interpretations then it; which miſtakes are multiplied daily through that earneſt inquiry that by the Saints of this Generation is made after the minde of Daniel; and though it may be thought, enough as to it hath been already ſaid in the precedent Diſcourſe, yet becauſe ſome through weakneſſe cannot, others byaſſed with ſome particular affection to this, or the other opinion, will not apply thoſe things as they ought to be applied, I thought it not unmeet to take up this Prophecy here again, and make it the example of my Rule.

Now the ſure and certain Characters of this little Horn, which are deducible from the letter of the text, and which (all put together) cannot be made agree to any opinion but only that which is the truth, are ſuch as theſe.

1 CHARACTER, The Kingdom of the little Horn muſt be in the latter days; the reaſon is, becauſe the extreme and utmost part of Nebuchadnezzars great Image, viz. the feet and toes, Dan. 2.41, 42, 43. are the ſame with the little Horn, Chap. 7. This needs no proving, becauſe it is univerſally granted, whatſoever interpretation is by any put upon the little Horn, carries along with it this conceſſion, That the little Horns Kingdom, cha. 7. and the feet and toes of Nebuchadnezzars Image, chap. 2. are the ſame, at leaſtwiſe in reſpect of time. Now the feet and toes of Nebuchadnezzars Image falls within the later days; the reaſon is, becauſe the Image it ſelf brings us down to the latter days, verſ. 28. which cannot be, in caſe the feet and toes which are the extreme and utmoſt part thereof, were not to be extended as farre as the latter days.

To whoſe Kingdom this phraſe is moſt properly appliable, the Apoſtles uſe of the ſame phraſe, 1 Tim. 4.1, 2, 3. doth clearly teach us.

2 CHARACTER, This Kingdom of the little Horn muſt neceſſarily appertain to the Roman Monarchy.

That it cannot belong to the Graetian is clear, becauſe the Graecian Monarchy, whether we conſider it as united under Alexander, or as in its fourfold diviſion afterwards, is comprehended under the third Beaſt, Dan. 7.6. but now the Kingdom of the little Horn belongs not to the third Beaſt, for the Little Horn ariſeth among the ten Horns of the fourth, verſ. 8.

That it cannot be any power diſtinct from, and ſucceeding the Roman Monarchy, is alſo clear.

1 Becauſe no place in Daniel or elſewhere doth ſo much as once countenance any ſuch opinion as this, viz. That there ſhould be any worldly Government ſucceeding the Roman Monarchy. Nay, let me ſay, the Scripture is clear againſt ſuch a Notion, for it is manifeſt, Dan. 7.12, 13, 14. Revel. 19.11, 12. compared with verſ. 19, 20. That the deſtruction of the Beaſt, (i.e. the Roman Monarchy as under Antichriſt) is upon the appearance of Chriſt; if ſo, where ſhall we then finde room for the Government of the little Horn to ſucceed the Roman Monarchy?

2 Becauſe the Beaſt is ſlain, his body deſtroyed, and given to the burning flame: and that for the blaſphemies of the little Horn, Dan. 7.11. This Beaſt (I ſay) can be no other but the fourth and laſt Beaſt, verſ. 7. which Beaſt is the Roman Monarchy.

Hence I gather two things.

1 That the government of the little Horn cannot be a Government diſtinct from the Roman Monarchy, a thing the Roman Monarchy hath nothing to do with; for then, why is the Roman Monarchy puniſhed for the blaſphemies of the little Horn?

2 That the Government of the little Horn cannot be a government ſucceeding the Roman Monarchy; for it is moſt clear from the words, That the fourth Beaſts Kingdom is in being, and that at the time the little Horn blaſphemes. Now it would be improper to ſay, That the little Horns Government ſucceeds the Fourth Monarchy, and yet that Monarchy ſtill in being, even in the time of the little Horns Dominion.

3 Becauſe if the little Horns Kingdom, or Government, ſucceed the Roman Monarchy, then have we in Daniel five Monarchies preceding the Kingdom of Chriſt and his Saints, viz.

1 The Monarchy of the Babylonians.

2 Of the Medes and Perſians.

3 Of the Graecians.

4 Of the Romans.

5 The Monarchy or Government of the little Horn. If ſo, then muſt not Chriſts Kingdom hee called the Fifth Monarchy, but the Sixth.

If therefore the little Horn can neither belong to the Graecian Monarchy, nor ſucceed the Roman, then muſt the ſame of neceſſity appertain to the Roman Monarchy.

3 CHARACTER, The Little Horn muſt be a power equivalent to the whole body of the Fourth Monarchy. This is clear, Dan. 2. which Prophecy conſiders the Fourth Kingdom. 1 As an Iron Kingdom, verſ. 40. 2 As a Kingdom of Iron and Clay, verſ. 41, 42, 43. yet both but one Kingdom, and therefore that which is called the Fourth Kingdom, verſ. 40. is called the Kingdom, verſ. 41, 42. ſhewing us, That the Holy Ghoſt was ſtill ſpeaking of one and the ſame Kingdom, for otherwiſe he would for diſtinction ſake have called the feet of Iron and Clay another Kingdom, but calling it the Kingdom, it hath a manifeſt reference to that Kingdom he had mentioned laſt, viz. the Fourth, which Kingdom is called an Iron Kingdom, to ſet forth the ſtate before Antichriſt came in, a Kingdom of Iron and Clay, to ſet forth the ſtate afterwards.

They that would ſee more reaſon hereof, may conſult with our fore-going Diſcourſe.

4 CHARACTER, The little Horn ſignifies ſuch a power as conſiſts of ten parts, which ten parts are ſo many Kings, not ſucceeding in one and the ſame Kingdom, but reigning in a Kingdom divided into ten parts. This appears Dan. 2.41, 42, 43, 44. for the Power here mentioned (which is the ſame with the little Horn, Chap. 7.) conſiſts of ten toes, verſ. 42. which toes are called Kings, verſ. 44. In the days of theſe Kings ſhall the God of Heaven ſet up a Kingdom; which words cannot have relation to all the Four Monarchies; for the God of Heaven ſet up no Kingdom, no not in a Spiritual ſenſe, in the time of any of the Four, but the laſt only; why ſhould it then be ſaid, theſe Kings in the plural number? if not to give us to underſtand,

1 That the ten toes here ſpoken of are to be underſtood of ſo many Kings.

2 That the Kingdom of the Stone ſhould begin, and that before the Roman Monarchy, as conſiſting of ten Kingdoms, ſhould be ruined; for it is the Kingdom of the Stone that ſmites the feet and toes, and breaks them to peeces.

Again obſerve, That theſe Kings are not to be underſtood of ſo many Kings reigning ſucceſſively in one and the ſame Kingdom, but muſt of Kings reigning contemporary in ſo many diſtinct Kingdoms, which Kingdoms (though diſtinct in themſelves, yet) do all meet in one common Head, as the toes do all meet in the feet, This is evidenced, not only by the diſtinction of the toes in themſelves, but alſo by the diviſion of the fourth or grand Kingdom among them, ſo as that no one hath the whole, but one hath this part, another that, therefore it is ſaid to be divided, verſ. 41. And alſo by their endeavour to mingle themſelves, thereby to form themſelves again (if it might be) into one entire Kingdom, verſ. 43. an Argument that they cannot be Kings ſucceeding each other, but muſt be contemporary. To whom, or to what power this Character of ten Kings agreeth, ſee Rev. 17.11, 12, 13, &c.

5 CHARACTER, The little Horn is a Power of long continuance; which is clear,

1 From the many and great things attributed to the little Horn, Chap. 7.20, 21, &c. Chap. 8.10, 11, 12, 24, 25. but chiefly, Chap. 11. verſ. 21. to 40. which things cannot be performed in one, no not in many ages.

2 From ſundry Phraſes and expreſſions that the Holy Ghoſt uſeth in deſcription of him, Chap. 7.25. he ſhall wear out the Saints of the moſt High, which Phraſe plainly imports length of time; a ſhort ſuffering, though ever ſo bitter, cannot properly bee ſaid to wear out the Patient, but an affliction is ſaid to wear out a man when it is heavie and long. So Chap. 11.33. They that underſtand among the people ſhall inſtruct many, yet they ſhall fall by the Sword, and by flame, by Captivity, and by ſpoyl many days; noting a long time, verſ. 35. And ſome of them of underſtanding ſhall fall to try them—even to the time of the end, becauſe it is yet for a time appointed; which words clearly hold forth, That the end is not preſently to be expected, when this little Horn ſhall begin to rage, but rather it is to be looked upon to be at ſome diſtance, therefore theſe words are brought in together with the little Horns rage, the end is yet for a time appointed; as to ſay, Do not look for the end preſently, no, this ſuffering muſt be both ſharp and long alſo.

6 And laſt CHARACTER, The little Horn muſt be underſtood of ſuch a Perſon, State, or Power, unto whom the Characters Daniel in his Four Prophecies hath left us, will agree; 1 Univerſally. 2 In a more eminent manner than to any other Perſon, State, or Power that ever hath been in the world.

This Character, though it is not ſo properly built upon the expreſſe Letter of the text, as are the fore-going, yet is it founded upon right reaſon, conſentaneous unto the letter of the text. For obſerve, the agreement of the Characters of the little Horn to the Thing, Perſon, or Power ſignified by it, muſt be,

1 Univerſal, for otherwiſe we irreverently, and blaſphemouſly charge the Holy Ghoſt with multiplying Characters ignorantly, and in vain, in caſe but one Character be unappliable to the thing Characterized.

2 They muſt agree in a more eminent manner to that thing, whatſoever it be, that is ſignified by the Little Horn, than to any other thing; the reaſon is, becauſe whatſoever is ſpoken of as done by the Little Horn, he is ſpoken of as doing that thing by way of eminency, i.e. ſo, and in ſuch manner, as never any other did.

He is a Blaſphemer by way of eminency; for he ſpeaks great words against the moſt High himſelf, Dan. 7.25. Marvellous things againſt the God of gods, Chap. 11.36. Magnifies himſelf to the Prince of the Hoſt, Chap. 8.11. i.e. makes himſelf equal with Chriſt.

An Idolater by way of eminency; for he honours a God whom his fathers knew not, Cha. 11.38. a ſtrange God, not acknowledged by any before him, verſ. 39.

An Oppreſſor by way of eminency; for he changeth Times and Laws, Dan. 7.25. divides the Land for gain, Dan. 11.39 invades (not by force of Arms, but) peaceably, the fatteſt places of the Province, doing therein that which his Fathers have not done, nor his Fathers Fathers, Dan. 11.24.

A Perſecutor by way of eminency; for he doth by his Perſecutions even wear out the Saints of the moſt High, Chap. 7.25. Deſtroys wonderfully, i. e. ſo as never any before him did, the mighty and holy people, Chap. 8.24. Deſtroys the underſtanding people all manner of ways, by Sword, by Flame, by Captivity, and by Spoyl, Chap. 11 33. whatſoever he doth, he doth it by way of eminency, i. e. in ſuch manner as was never done before.

Thus much for the Characters of the Little Horn.

I ſhall in the Concluſion adde this word, That as the fore-going Characters agree to none ſo fitly as the Romiſh Antichriſt (to whom as theſe, ſo all the Characters beſides them in Daniel, will moſt aptly accord) So, in caſe the Romiſh Antichriſt be not the little Horn, it will neceſſarily follow, that we have nothing left us from firſt to laſt in this Prophecy that conc • rns Antichriſts rage againſt the Saints and holy City, his tyranny over, and oppreſſion of the Nations, which now hath continued, in ſuch manner, as the like was never before it, for above one thouſand two hundred years; for in caſe the things ſpoken of the little Horn be not appliable thereto, nothing throughout this Prophecy is. Whatſoever is ſpoken of the Fourth Beaſt, ver. 7. of his dreadfulneſs and ſtrength, his Iron teeth, his devouring, breaking in peeces, ſtamping the reſidue with his feet, his having ten Horns, had all its accompliſhment, (as my fore-going diſcourſe proveth) in the Roman Monarchy before Antichriſt came in; which was the moſt dreadful Power, devouring, breaking in peeces the Nations, ſtamping the reſidue, (i. e. the Powers of the Monarchies before it) with its feet, that ever the earth ſaw, and had alſo ten Horns, being exactly divided into ten parts by Auguſtus Caeſar. The whole therefore of the ſeventh verſe is but a deſcription thereof, which will be more clear, if wee compare it with verſe twenty three, which tells us, That the power of this Fourth Beaſt was exerciſed, not againſt the Saints in any peculiar way, as all Antichriſts rage hath been, and the little Horns is, but againſt the whole earth, without difference or reſpect, making it its great and only buſineſſe to tread that down, and ſubdue it to it ſelf; It ſhall be diverſe from all Kingdoms, and ſhall devour the whole earth, and tread it down, and break it to peeces. This being ſo, I ſay, in caſe that part of the Prophecy which concerns the Little Horn be not to be applied to Antichriſts rage and tyranny, no part is, and if ſo, let it be conſidered,

1 How unlikely a thing it is that the Holy Ghoſt, when he was informing Daniel of the ſtate of things in the World, from the time that the Kingdom of the Houſe of David was ſubjected by Nebuchadnezzar, till it ſhould bee reſtored by and under Chriſt the true David, ſhould leap over at once above half the time, not leaving us throughout the whole Prophecy ſo much as one ſyllable to inform us, what ſhould be done within that time.

2 That he ſhould leap over that time too, which was a time in many reſpects ſo remarkable for obſervation, as never was time in the world before.

1 In reſpect of a new kinde of Power bearing rule all this time, viz. a Civil Power and a Spiritual mixed together, and in this mixture the Spiritual to be the Head, the like to which was never found in any of the preceding Monarchies, no not in the world before.

2 In reſpect of a new kind of Idolatry, worſhiping a Breaden god, Saints; Reliques of Saints, &c. an Idolatry never heard of in the world before.

3 In reſpect of a new kinde of Perſocution, a Perſecution of the precious Servants of God, by one profeſſing himſelf in his Title to be the Servant of the Servants of God; a Perſecution of the true and faithful Members of Chriſt, by one ſtiling himſelf Chriſts Vicar.

4 In reſpect of a new kinde of Tyranny; tyrannizing over the Conſcience, and forcing it, making Merchandiſe of the ſouls of men, Revel. 18.12, 13.

5 In reſpect of a new kind of oppreſſion; oppreſſing the people, robbing them of their wealth and ſubſtance, by craft, and not by power; as what are all the Popiſh inventions of Maſſes, Pardons, Pilgrimages, Penance, Purgatory, their Abbies, Monaſteries, &c. but meer tricks and devices, by which they divide the Land, Dan. 11.39. enter into the fatteſt places of every Province or Nation, ver. 24. and this by craft, Dan. 8.25?

6 In reſpect of a new kinde of Blaſphemy; for a man to profeſs the greateſt holineſs and love to God of all others, and yet to make himſelf God, ſuffer himſelf to be called God, worſhipped as God; thus robbing God of his honour, whilſt he profeſſeth to ſerve, love, and honour him.

I ſay, that a time having ſuch noted Characters upon it, as never had time in the world before, ſhould by the Holy Ghoſt (whilſt leſſe things are obſerved) be wholly buried in ſilence, cannot be thought.

Nay thirdly, That the Holy Ghoſt here ſhould wholly leap over that time, and thoſe tranſactions, which are in a manner the ſubject of all, or moſt of the Apocalyptical Viſions, when as Daniel and John do help to expound each other, is very ſtrange.

An Objection.

The Conception of ſome good men of our days is, That the little Horns Kingdom doth not denote the whole body of Antichriſt, but points at ſome ſingular Perſon or Power that is to ariſe in the evening time of Antichriſts Kingdom; ſo making in their concluſion the Saints of this Age to be the only ſubjects of the Little Horns rage.

Anſwer.

1 This is very improbable, though it were upon no other reaſon but the former only, viz. the loſſe of ſo much, and withall ſo remarkable a time, as is, and muſt be loſt by this opinion.

2 Very uncomfortable; for ſuppoſing the Little Horn to be but newly riſen, yet if withall wee conſider thoſe things which are moſt evident from the text, concerning him. 1. That his continuance muſt be long. 2 That throughout this long time, he ſhall in a moſt fearful and diſmal manner rage and tyrannize, trample the Saints, oppreſs the Nations; What an uncomfortable opinion is this to us, and all the people of God at this day, who look for their redemption to be at hand, to entertain ſuch a thought, that the Little Horns Kingdom is but now begun? which if ſo, then ſure enough neither we, nor our Childrens Children, no nor the Generation after them, ſhall ever live to behold thoſe glorious days, which, yet is the faith of many, will break forth even in this Generation. Nay how uncomfortable a thing is it, to think that all the Perſecutions that have every yet been in the World, are in a manner but Flea-bites, both for greatneſſe and length of time, to that perſecution that is now beginning? which muſt be in caſe the Kingdom of the Little Horn be but now begun; for he is the only Perſecutor of the Saints, and oppreſſor of the Nations by way of eminency; that Monſter that never had the like before him, nor ſhall have after him.

3 Grounded upon a miſtake, which miſtake is another conception of ſome, who are of opinion that the Little Horn denotes a ſingle Perſon, viz. That the Little Horns riſe and rage is to be the immediate fore-runner of the Beaſts final ruine, and that for this reaſon the deſcription of this Little Horn is inſiſted upon ſo largely in Daniels Prophecies.

But this cannot be,

1 Becauſe it is needleſſe and ſuperfluous ſo much ſhould be fore-told of this Little Horn, to this end only, when as in caſe nothing had been ſpoken of him, we have a more ſure, certain, and undoubted word to point us to the ending-time of the Beaſts reign, viz. the truth of thoſe ſoveral myſtical numbers that concern the Beaſt; It is unacquaintedneſs with the one hath made good men ſo apt to cloſe in with this other.

2 Becauſe the deſtruction of that which comprehends the whole of the Beaſts Kingdom, cannot be a ſign of the deſtruction of the Beaſts Kingdom; but ſo doth the Little Horn; for it is equivalent to the whole body of the Fourth Monarchy, and is a Power conſiſting of ten Kingdoms, as I have before proved.

4 The fore-going conception ſavours too much of partiality, and of too high thoughts of our ſelves, and too low of the Saints before us, whilſt in effect by ſuch a concluſion we render the Holy Ghoſt mindeleſs of all the ſufferings of ſo many Millions of the precicus Servants of Jeſus Chriſt, who in former Ages have in the flames, by Sword, and otherwiſe, ſacrificed their lives for the teſtimony of Jeſus, againſt the Beaſt, as not to mention one word of all their ſufferings; and yet ſo mindful of us, who comparatively with them have never ſuffered the thouſandth part, nor can ſuffer more ſhould men do their worſt, as to leave ſuch a large Narrative of our afflictions.

Nay further let me adde, (which follows upon the other) we do hereby in a manner accuſe the moſt righteous God of partiality and inequality, whilſt we make him to forget all his other Children much better than we, and to take notice of us, and our ſufferings only. Let us not have ſo much affection to our ſelves, as not only to lay aſide all due reſpect to that bleſſed cloud of Witneſſes our Fore-runners and Betters, but alſo to make the ways of the moſt righteous God unequal; yet this (remembring what but now was ſaid, that in caſe by the Little Horns rage and blaſphemy the tyranny of Antichriſt be not ſet forth, no mention at all is by Daniel made thereof) doth neceſſarily follow, ſuch a conception being admitted.

The ſum of all is, That as thoſe Charactors of truth left us in the naked letter of the text, are the moſt certain rule to go by, to finde the minde of the Holy Ghost in Prophecies; ſo walking by that rule, Daniels Little Horn is, and can be no other, but, the whole body of the Romiſh Antichriſt.

A particular Clauſe, in our Diſcourſe about the Times, opened.

IT hath been ſaid in the cloſe of my fore-going Diſcourſe about the times, That (it cannot bee determined from Scripture, whether the preſent year one thouſand ſix hundred fifty four, or tho approaching year, one thouſand ſix hundred fifty ſix, be the laſt of the Beaſts reign, and the Witneſſes wearing ſackcloth.

The ground of this uncertainty lies in the doubtfulneſs of the year of our Saviours Birth, which although the Scripture tells us it was in the days of Augustus Gaeſar, yet in regard it hath not, told us, how long the ſaid Auguſtus Caeſar reigned, therefore the doubt remaineth. Nor will Human Records help us herein, becauſe they are divided within themſelves, and differ ſome from others a year or two, as touching the number of the years the ſaid Auguſtus reigned.

Two opinions there are about the time of Chriſts Birth, the one fixing it two years higher, the other two years lower. The Vulgar Account, (which wee have followed, becauſe the moſt known, and the common Date) inclineth to the latter. The account of Scaliger (which is owned by other Modern Chronologers, as Calviſius, Alſtedius, Helvicus, &c.) chuſeth the former.

The difference betwixt theſe cannot be determined by Scripture, nor can it be certainly made appear, till the event hath decided it, which is the truth.

Our proof from Scripture is firm and good, that the year one thouſand ſix hundred fifty ſix from the birth of Chriſt, muſt neceſſarily be the laſt year of the Beaſts reign, and the Witneſſes wearing ſackcloth.

This is demonſtrable from the two thouſand three hundred days; for ſith that with the year of Chriſts Paſſion, which was, Anno Dom. thirty four, ſix hundred thirty three of Daniels two thouſand three hundred yeers were expired (as I have proved) it therefore follows, that from that year to the end of the Fourth Monarchy are to be reckoned but one thouſand ſix hundred ſixty ſeven years more, which one thouſand ſix hundred ſixty ſeven years being added to the former number ſix hundred thirty three, as they make up the two thouſand three hundred years (which are the utmoſt date of the Fourth Monarchy) compleat; ſo do they alſo make the two thouſand three hundred years to expire with the year from Chriſts Birth, one thouſand ſeven hundred and one, for adde one thouſand ſix hundred ſixty ſeven to thirty four (the year in which Chriſt ſuffered) and we have the aforeſaid ſum. Now in regard the end of the Beaſts reign, and the Witneſſes wearing Sackcloth falls forty five years before the final deſtruction of the Fourth Monarchy, it therefore follows (the Date of the Fourth Monarchy expiring in the year one thouſand ſeven hundred and one from Chriſts Birth) that the end of the Beaſts reign, and the Witneſſes wearing Sackcloth, which is to be fixed forty five years above the other, muſt of neceſſity expire with the end of the year one thouſand ſix hundred fifty ſix from the birth of Chriſt.

But now, becauſe the time of Chriſts Birth is (as to the year) doubtful, therefore (I ſay) can it not be determined what year we are to pitch upon, as the year one thouſand ſix hundred fifty ſix from the Birth of Chriſt.

If the account of Scaliger (which aſcends two years above the vulgar) be the truth, then of neceſſity (in caſe years ſince Chriſt in the counting have not been loſt, as it is a thing very improbable any ſhould, upon the reaſon we have given in the precedent Diſcourſe) muſt this preſent year one thouſand ſix hundred fifty four, be the laſt of the Beaſts reign, and the Witneſſes wearing ſackcloth; for in caſe Chriſts Birth be to be fixed two years higher than the beginning of our Vulgar account, it will follow, that the year which we (following the Vulgar account) call the year one thouſand ſix hundred fifty four, ought to be accounted, and really is, from Chriſts Birth the year one thouſand ſix hundred fifty ſix; and if ſo, then will the next year after this be the year in which the German Witneſſes, and the Saints elſewhere ſhall put off their Sackcloth, and be no longer ſubject to the tyranny of the Beaſt. But if the Vulgar account be true, then will the year we commonly call fifty ſix be the laſt year of the Beaſts tyranny, and the Witneſſes wearing Sackcloth, and conſequently with the beginning of the year one thouſand ſix hundred fifty ſeven muſt wee expect the bleſſed day of the Saints putting off their Sackcloth, and leading into captivity that Beaſt, that for one thouſand two hundred and ſixty years together hath captivated them. This being a queſtion of great moment, which makes a variance two years throughout all our accounts, and withal not being (as I judge) determinable by Scripture, unleſſe (as I have ſaid) it could be proved how many years Auguſtus Caeſar reigned, which in caſe it could be done, then indeed Johns beginning to preach in the fifteenth year of Tiberius, Luke 3.1. would ſomewhat help us, I thought good (having but hinted it before) to give here in our cloſe the true and full ſtate thereof, leaving the two different accounts to the Readers conſideration, and the certain determination of the thing it ſelf to the event; Only adding, that although in my account of times I have walked by the Vulgar reckoning, as that which is to perſons generally beſt known, yet have I not done it from any ſuch light, as perſwades me, that the Vulgar account is to be choſen and adhered unto rather than the other; therefore having ſhewed where this knot lies, I leave it to time and Divine Providence to unty. A few days wil reſolve this queſtion, and many more.

FINIS.

AN APPENDIX Wherein is contained, 1 Some Concluſions as touching Chriſts Kingdom, and the generall Deſign, Scope, and Method of Daniels Prophecies. 2 A General Rule for the right underſtanding of Prophecies, together with a more full unfolding the Great Myſtery of Daniels Little Horn. 3 An Explication of a particular Clauſe in the fore-going Diſcourſe about the Times.

BY J. T.

Printed at London by R. I. for L. Chapman, dwelling at the Sign of the Crown in Popeſ-head Alley. 1654.

A few Concluſions touching Chriſts Kingdom, and the generall Scope and Method of Daniels Prophecies.

THat Chriſt ſhould have an outward viſible Kingdom, in which as King of Kings he ſhould be exalted, is the promiſe of the Father antiently made to Chriſt, (Gen. 49.10, 11. compared with Iſa. 63.1, 2, 3. Revel. 19.15, 16. Numb. 24.17, 18, 19. So Rom. 4.13. compared with Gal. 3.16.) and is that thing of which all the Prophets have ſpoken.

A Type of this Kingdom was the Kingdom of the Houſe of David, erected in the midſt of Gods peculiar, in time of old, and bearing rule over the Nations about it. Hence Chriſt as King goes frequently under the name of David, Ezek. 34.23, 24. Chap. 37.24, 25. Hoſ. 3.5.

This Kingdom became, in time, ſubjected by Nebuchadnezzar, and after that wholly removed (the Scepter being taken away) by the Romans, at the time of Chriſts firſt coming, ſo that from Nebuchadnezzars time until this day, no outward viſible Kingdom, which may bee called Chriſts, hath been in the world.

Yet an outward viſible Kingdom Chriſt ſhall have, elſe could not the Promiſe have its fulfilling, nor the Type its Anti-type.

But yet as Davids Kingdom, the Type, was very little in its beginning, and afterwards became a Monarchy, bearing rule over the Nations about it: ſo doth this Kingdom of Chriſt begin as a Stone, afterwards becomes a Mountain.

Further, as Davids Kingdom went to decay before Chriſts firſt coming, its abſolute Sovereignty being taken away by Nebuchadnezzar, yet had not the Scepter wholly removed untill the time of his coming: So doth this Kingdom begin to recover, as it is the Stone, before Chriſts ſecond coming, therefore ſaid to be ſet up in the days of the ten Kings, Dan. 2.44. yet ſhall it not be compleatly a great Mountain (or a Monarchy bearing rule over all the earth) untill this coming.

Yet as God is ſwift to take Vengeance for his people, but ſlow to take vengeance upon them: So when God comes to recover this outward Kingdom, by breaking in peeces all worldly Powers that now poſſeſſe it, the time betwixt the beginning of this work, (which begins with the time where the Stone begins to ſmite) and the compleating of it, is by the determinate Counſel of God much ſhorter, than was the time betwixt the ſubjecting and total removing of that foregoing outward Kingdom, which was the Type of this.

As the people of God in the time of the Old and New Teſtament both, did and do by faith expect this Kingdom, and ſhall accordingly, when the ſame ſhall be ſet up be Joynt-heirs, and Inheritors thereof: So hath God given us perfect aſſurance of it, and how, and when the ſame ſhall bee erected, and what ſhould befall the people of the Old Teſtament, and of the New alſo, throughout all Ages till the erecting of it, and that out of the mouthes of two infallible Witneſſes, viz. Daniel a Prophet of the Old Teſtament, and John an Apoſtle of the New.

The ſcope of Daniels Prophecies, which begin, ſome with, ſome ſuddenly after, the time where the Kingdom of the Type was ſubjected, and terminate with the compleat ſetting up of the Kingdom of the Anti-type; is to give full aſſurance of the thing it ſelf, viz. That this Kingdom, which for many Ages together before Daniels time had had being in the Type, ſhould alſo after many days have being in the Anti-type; and alſo to give certain knowledge (that thereby the faith of Gods people throughout this long time might be the better born up in a patient expectation of this Kingdom) how, and by whom the Scepter of the World ſhould be ſwayed from that day, in which the Kingdom of the Houſe of David was ſubjected, until the time the ſame ſhould be reſtored with greater Power and Glory, and more Dominion, than ever before it had, under Chriſt the true David. And for this reaſon it is that Daniel takes notice of no worldly Monarch before Nebuchadnezzar, by and under whom Davids Kingdom was ſubjected.

As this outward viſible Kingdom, throughout this long Period, was by Divine appointment to fall into the hands of four great Monarchies, viz. 1 The Babylonians, 2 Medes and Perſians, 3 Grecians, 4 Romans, which one after the other ſhould poſſeſſe the Kingdom, and bear rule over all the earth, till in the end that Ruler ſhould come, whoſe goings out have been from everlaſting, and whoſe right by Purchaſe, Promiſe, and Donation of the Father, the Kingdom is, and take the ſame from the laſt of theſe into his own hands: So anſwerably in the Book of Daniel wee have in four Prophecies (his Seventy weeks excepted, which treat of another thing) theſe deſcribed, the time of their reign determined, and their final ruine (and therewith the revolution of the Kingdom into the hands of Chriſt, and his Saints) fore-told.

The Four-fold Repetition of the ſame things, or the ſpeaking of the ſame things over in four Prophecies, was, to the end Daniel might have light let in by degrees, as he was able to bear it, and alſo, that it might be ſet home more ſtrongly upon his heart, and the hearts of Gods people in general, to whom theſe glorious Diſcoveries were made, that the things themſelves were eſtabliſhed by God, and ſhould moſt certainly be fulfilled in their ſeaſon, Gen. 41.32.

The Prophecies themſelves are, 1 That of the great Image, Chap. 2. 2 That of the four Beaſts, Chap. 7. 3 That of the Ram, Hee-Goat, and Little Horn, Chap. 8. Laſtly, Of the King of the North, and King of the South, Chap. 11. the matter contained in the three firſt of theſe is repreſented to Daniel by way of Viſion, in the laſt, by lively voyce.

The two firſt of theſe, viz. That of the Great Image, and that of the four Beaſts, comprehend within them all the four Monarchies; the two laſt, the three laſt only; the reaſon whereof is, becauſe Daniel had not his two laſt Viſions till the expiration of the firſt, or Babylonian Monarchy: Now Prophecies being not of things paſt, but to come, therefore the Babylonian Monarchy being paſſed at the time of the two laſt Viſions, no mention at all is made in them of that Monarchy.

The ſucceſſion of theſe four Monarchies is excellently ſet forth in that golden Method, and Order, that is obſerved in each of the aforeſaid Prophecies; the deſcription of them in that wonderful ſuitableneſſe and harmony that is in the matter.

The Babylonian Monarchy is the firſt, to which the Images head of fine Gold, Dan. 2.32. compared with 37, 38. and that firſt Beaſt, Chap. 7.4. do relate.

The Medes and Perſians ſucceed the Babylonian, to whoſe Monarchy belongeth the ſilver Breaſt, and Arms of the Great Image, Chap. 2.32. The ſecond Beaſt, chap. 7.5. The Ram with two Horns, Chap. 8.3, 4, compared with verſ. 20. and what by lively voyce is ſpoken to Daniel, Chap. 11. verſ. 1, 2.

The two Arms joyned to one Breaſt, which is the Perſian reſemblance, Chap. 2. and the two Horns growing upon one Head, which is their reſemblance, Chap. 8. are a moſt lively embleme of two powerful Nations, viz. Medes and Perſians, either of which hath an Arm, & a Horn of ſtrength, uniting into one, to make a Monarchy.

The third Monarchy is of the Graecians, which is conſidered in Daniel, Firſt, as united in one; Secondly, as divided and broken.

To the Graecian Monarchy, in its united ſtate, doth belong that devouring belly, which gathers all to it ſelf, Chap. 2.32. That third Beaſt, conſidered as winged, and ſwift in motion, Dan. 7.6. (which ſwiftneſſe of march is noted as peculiar to Alexander, Dan. 8.5. and is here excellently ſet forth by giving four Wings, i. e. two pair of Wings to this Beaſt, noting his ſwift march, and ſpeedy conqueſts) the Great and notable Horn of the rough Goat, Dan. 8.5. compared with verſ. 21. and what is ſpoken to Daniel of that mighty King, Dan. 11.3.

The divided ſtate of the Graecian Monarchy, is ſet forth by the thighs of the great Image, Dan. 2.32. the four Heads of the third Beaſt, Dan. 7.6. the four Horns of the He-Goat coming up in the room of the great Horn, Dan. 8.8. with verſ. 22. and what by voyce is delivered to Daniel chap. 11. ver. 4, 5, &c. to ver. 14.

The Fourth and laſt Monarchy is of the Romans, which Monarchy in either Prophecy is ſet forth in its two-fold ſtate. Firſt, its ſtate before Antichriſts riſe. Secondly, its ſtate afterwards; the one I have formerly called its pure Civil State, the other its mixt State.

The Roman Monarchy in its firſt State, wherein it chiefly attended to the work of Conquering, and ſubduing Nations, is ſet forth by the Iron Leggs of the great Image, Dan. 2.33. which Iron-legged Kingdom, or rather this fourth Kingdom conſidered as Iron-legged, is ſaid to break in peeces, and ſubdue all things, verſ. 40. By the fourth Beaſt, Dan. 7.7. but yet conſidered only as a warlike Beaſt, moſt dreadful and terrible to the Nations, devouring the whole earth, treading it down, and breaking it in peeces, verſ. 23. By the Little Horn, conſidered in its firſt waxing great, Dan. 8.9. by which waxing it becomes exceeding great, puſhing down all ſtanding in its way, towards the South, and towards the Weſt, and towards the pleaſant Land; and by what is ſpoken to Daniel, of the Conqueſts of the King of the North, verſ. 14. to 21.

The Roman Monarchy in its ſecond State, wherein the work it principally attends to, is, oppreſſing the Nations ſubdued already, perſecuting the Saints, treading under-foot the Holy City, is ſet forth by the feet of the great Image of Iron and Clay, Dan. 2.33. by the Little Horn, Cha. 7. by the Little Horn in its ſecond waxing great, Chap. 8.10, 11, 12, 24, 25. by the vile Perſon, or that proud King, Chap. 11. whoſe deſcription we have at large, verſ. 21. to verſ. 40. and afterwards goes under the title of the King of the North, ver. 40. to the end of the Chapter.

All the aforeſaid Prophecies, though their beginnings are different, yet have they but one and the ſame general end.

This end is the final diſſolution of the Fourth Monarchy, and the eſtabliſhment of the Fifth, contemporary with both which is the Perſonal appearance of Chriſt.

The two laſt Prophecies conclude with the deſtruction of the Fourth Monarchy, the two firſt with the greatneſſe and glory of the Fifth, yet are not for this reaſon their ends different, becauſe, though the things themſelves are two, yet both ſhall be performed by that one act of Chriſts Perſonal appearance. It is the appearance of Chriſt that deſtroys the Fourth Monarchy, eſtabliſheth the Fifth.

The admirable Harmony in every title betwixt theſe ſo antient Prophecies and the events; or betwixt the things fore-told ſo many Ages ago, and the things tranſacted in the Ages ſince, is a ſtrong and convincing Argument of the infallibility of the Prophecies themſelves, and of the certainty of the performance of the things yet to bee accompliſhed.

The glorious work of ſetting up Chriſts outward viſible Kingdom, which is the thing pointed at in all the fore-going Prophecies, is the great work of the preſent age, and time we live in.

The myſtical Numbers of Daniel and John both, which direct us to the time in which this Kingdom is to be ſet up, all which expire (as the fore-going Diſcourſe proveth) within the compaſſe of this Age; the viſible diſpenſations of God, which in our days have been very wonderful, all tending to ſuch a thing; the cries of Saints, and their faith and expectations generally looking this way; the oppoſition of the Devil, and the World againſt, and the malignity of men of worldly Principles, unto this glorious truth, and bleſſed work, do all ſpeak that we are come to the dawning of that day in which Chriſt will, in deſpite of Satan, and the Worlds rage, and all the Carnal policy of men of earthly Principles, eſtabliſh his own Kingdom.

The former being true, it is in its ſelf no ſtrange thing, nor ought to be matter of ſtumbling or offence to any, that the Witneſſes of Chriſt in this our day direct their teſtimony againſt Civil Powers (as they are in their preſent conſtitution, bearing forth evidently the excellent brightneſſe, and the terrible form of the Great Image, Dan. 2.31.) which yet Saints of formet Ages ſubjected themſelves unto, and never medled with, becauſe the caſe with them and us is vaſtly different. They lived within the compaſſe of that time in which the Great Image was to ſtand, the World and worldly Powers were to bear rule; which that they might do till their day ſhould come to an end, it was neceſſary that Saints in all Ages heretofore ſhould ſubject themſelves to them, and never bear a teſtimony ſimply and directly againſt Civil Powers of a worldly conſtitution: nor indeed could it be any part of their teſtimony, becauſe God having ſet a time how long worldly Powers ſhould continue, it behooved not them to attempt before the time, to take from the World what by Divine permiſſion for ſuch a time was allotted them. But now the caſe is otherwiſe, for we being come to the beginning of that day, in which the Great Image muſt be ſmitten, till the ſame is crumbled to duſt, and finally carried away with the wind of Gods Wrath, and that Kingdom and Dominion which before the Great Image did hold as its by right, to bee tranſlated and given to the Saints of the moſt High; as every Work of God muſt have light for its Baſis, becauſe God leads his people to the execution of his will, not blinde-fold, but by light; therefore of neceſſity muſt the Witneſſes of Chriſt in this Age bear forth ſuch a teſtimony of truth as may lay a foundation in the hearts of Gods people for ſuch a work. And indeed, as the work that God is now about to do is a new thing in the World, viz. the regaining that Kingdom which hath been in the hands of the World for now upwards of two thouſand three hundred years (viz. ever ſince the beginning of the Seventy years Captivity in Babylon) ſo by the ſame reaſon, that truth which muſt be laid as foundation to this work, can bee no other but a new thing in the World. It is therefore no Argument againſt the truth of Chriſts viſible Kingdom, that Saints, our predeceſſors in the Ages before us, medled not with theſe things, nor ſtickled in ſuch a Cauſe or Controverſie as the Saints now do; it was then no part of their work, but it is now the Maſter-peece of ours.

And in caſe any then at that time did ſtickle, yet they brought nothing to perfection, becauſe they attempted Gods Work before his time. But now the time being come, as God hath in a more wonderful manner than ever ſtirred up the hearts of his Saints to bear witneſſe, ſo ſhall not their Witneſſe-bearing (as to this great thing) be in vain; for let the Devil and the World do their worſt, the outward viſible Kingdom, and Dominion, and the greatneſſe of the Kingdom under the whole Heaven ſhall revolve (and that ſuddenly) into the hands of the people of the Saints of the moſt High, who ſhall then take them Captives whoſe Captives they were, and ſhall bear rule over their Oppreſſors. Amen.

Daniels Deſcription of the Four Monarchies in Four Prophecies, and Christs Kingdom ſucceeding them, ſhewed in the following Table.

Firſt Monarchy. Firſt Prophecy, Chap 2. Second Prophecy. Cha. 7. Third Prophecy, Chap. 8. Fourth Prophecy. Cha. 11. Golden Head, verſ. 32, 38 Firſt Beaſt, verſ. 4.     Second Monarchy Silver Breaſt and Arms, ver. 32, 39. Second Beaſt, verſ. 5. Ram with two Horns, verſe 3, 4. with 20. The matter delivered by voyce, verſe 1, 2. Third Monarchy United Divided Belly of the Image, ver. 32. Third Beaſt as ſwift and winged, ver. 6. Hee-Goats great Horn, ver. 5, 6, 7, 8. with 21. Mighty King, ruling with great Dominion, verſ. 3. The Images Thighs, verſ. 32. Third Beaſt as having four Heads, ver. 6. Hee-Goate four notable Horns, verſ. 8.22. The matter delivered by voyce, verſ. 4, 5. to 14. Fourth Monarchy Second State Firſt State Iron Leggs, verſ. 33.40. Fourth Beaſt as Warlike, ſubduing Nations, ver. 7. Little Horn, in its firſt waxing great, ver. 9. King of the North deſcribed, verſ. 14. to 21. Feet of Iron and clay, ver. 33, 41, 42, 43. Little Horn, ver. 8, 20, 21, 24, 25, 26. Little Horn in its ſecond waxing great, ver. 10, 11, 12.24, 25. Vile Perſon, ver. 21. to 40. and King of the North, ver. 40. to end. Chriſts Kingdom, or 5. Mon. Begins as a ſtone in the days of the ten Roman Kings, Chap. 2.34.44. Becomes a Mountain filling the earth, upon Chriſts appearance, and total diſſolution of the Fourth Monarchy, Chap. 2.35. Chap. 7.13, 14. with 26, 27.

A TABLE OF The moſt material things handled in this Book.
Part I. HAndling ſome things of more general concernment as to the whole diſcourſe. Chapter 1. Shewing the juſtifiableneſs of the enquiry, p. 1. to 9 Chap. 2. Proving, That the myſtical Numbers of Daniel and the Revelations, do hold forth a certain, definite, and determinate time, p. 9. to 14 Chap. 3. Clearing and confirming our General diſtinction, That the end of the Beaſts tyranny relates to one time, the end of the Fourth Monarchy to another. p. 14. to 21
Part II. COmputing the time of the Beaſt, and ſhewing where the limited time of his tyranny ends. Chap. 1. Diſcuſſing ſome things of more general concernment, as to this particular. Queſtion. Sect. I. Stating the Queſtion, and ſhewing the ground we are to go upon for anſwering it, viz. The forty two Months, the one thouſand two hundred and ſixty Days, wherein theſe differ, and why the one number reckons by months, the other by days, p. 21, 22 Sect. II. Proving, that both days and months are Prophetical, p. 23 Sect. III. Shewing, that the forty two Months, the one thouſand two hundred and ſixty Days, ſignifie one and the ſame time, and alſo begin and end together, p. 24, to 28 Chap. 2. Diſproving the ſundry falſe beginnings of this Epock. Sect. I. That the forty two Months, the one thouſand two hundred and ſixty Days, are not to be begun with the time of Conſtantine the Great, p. 28. to 37 Sect. II. That they are not to be begun with the year four hundred forty two, p. 37, 38 Sect. III. That they are not to be begun with the time when Boniface was made univerſal Biſhop by Phocas, p. 39, 40 Chap. 3. Stating and confirming the true beginning. Sect. I. The true beginning fixed Anno Dom. three hundred ninety ſix. This to be the true is proved by two Reaſons. 1 Taken from the Harmony of myſtical Numbers. 2 From the eminent Apoſtacy about this very time. p. 41, to 48 Sect. II. A third reaſon of our beginning taken from the devaſtation of the Roman Empire. Two things proved. 1 That our account is to begin from the time this devaſtation began. 2 That this was in the aforeſaid year, p. 48, to 56 Chap. 4. Proving and confirming yet further our fore-going beginning. Sect. I. A Fourth Argument of our beginning taken from the time of the riſe of the Beaſts Horns, wherein is ſhewed, Firſt, When the Horns began to appear; Secondly, That the riſe of the Horns muſt neceſſarily be a little while after the riſe of the Beaſt, p. 56, to 61 Sect. II. An Objection made, Daniel ſaw the riſe of the little Horn after the riſe of the ten. Here by way of digreſſion is diſcourſed of Daniels Little Horn, and it is proved, That Daniels little Horn cannot ſignifie Mahomet, or the Turkiſh power, p. 61. to 69 Here alſo occaſionally Daniels King of the North, and King of the South, chap. 11. is diſcourſed of, p. 69. to 77 Sect. III. Proving, That by Daniels Little Horn cannot bee meant William the Conqueror, taking in with him the whole Norman Race of Kings ſitting on the Engliſh Throne, nor Charls Stuart the laſt of that Race, p. 77. to 83 Sect. IV. A returning to the Objection, to which anſwer is given, p. 83. to 89 Sect. V. Three Arguments more to prove our beginning. 1 Taken from the great likelihood there is of the Witneſſes lying dead at this day, which thing the aforeſaid beginning doth neceſſarily infer, p. 89 2 Taken from the viſibility of thoſe very things at this day, which the Scripture hath fore-told us ſhall occur within the laſt three days and a half of the one thouſand two hundred and ſixty. Five things are inſtanced in, which the Scripture hath fore-told ſhall happen within that time, all which are viſible at this day, p. 90, 91, 92 3 Our beginning may not be fixed either higher or lower, therefore muſt be as it is ſtated, proved. p. 92. to 98
Part III. COmputing the time of the Fourth Monarchy. Chap. 1. Of Daniels two thouſand three hundred days. Sect. I. That the two thouſand three hundred days do not belong to the time and Story of Antiochus Epiphanes; where is ſhewed at large that Antiochus Epiphanes cannot be he of whom ſo much is ſpoken in Daniels Prophecies, p. 98. to p. 120 Sect. II. Proving, that the Little Horn, ſpoken of Dan. 8. ſignifies the whole Body of the Roman Monarchy, p. 120. to p. 127 Sect. III. Shewing, that the two thouſand three hundred days are not to be underſtood of half ſo many years, but ſignifie ſo many years compleat, p. 127. to 133 Sect. IV. That the two thouſand three hundred days are not to be begun with the firſt year of Cyrus, p. 133. to 137 Sect. V. Shewing two things: 1 That Darius the Mede, of whom Daniel ſpeaks Chap. 5.30. did not belong to the Babylonian Monarchy, but the Perſian, p. 137. to 142 2 That the firſt year of Darius the Mede, and the firſt of Cyrus the Perſian, are one and the ſame year, p. 142. to 152 Chap. 2. Wherein, in order to a more full clearing up of the fore-going account, viz. of two thouſand three hundred days, are Daniels ſeventy weeks diſcuſſed. Sect. I. That the Seventy weeks do not relate to New Teſtament-times, p. 152. to p. 161 Sect. II. That the Seventy weeks are not to be begun with the Decree of Cyrus, p. 161. to 183 Sect. III. That they are not to be begun with the Decree of Darius, Ezra 6.6, 7.8, &c. p. 183. to p. 193 Sect. IV. That they are not to be begun with the Decree of Artaxerxes, in the ſeventh year of his reign, Ezra 7.11, 12, 13. p. 193 That they are to be begun with the twentieth year of Artaxerxes, when Nehemiah received his Commiſſion to build Jeruſalem, Nehem. 2. p. 194. to 198 Sect. V. That the Seventy weeks end with the Paſſion of Chriſt, p. 198, 199 Sect. VI. A reſolution of ſundry knots about Daniels Seven weeks, his Sixty two weeks, his one week, and his half week, p. 200. to 217 Sect. VII. An Objection againſt our ending of the Seventy weeks, anſwered, p. 217. to 225 Chap. 3. Wherein enquiry is made into the number of the years that paſſed betwixt the firſt of Cyrus, and the twentieth of Artaxerxes, when Nehemiah received his Commiſſion to build Jeruſalem. Sect. I. Diſproving the grounds of that Opinion, which cuts this time much ſhorter than it ſhould bee, p. 225. to 251 Sect. II. Proving, That that Artaxerxes, from whom Nehemiah received his Commiſſion, was him whom the Greeks call Mnemon, p. 251. to p. 281 In order to the clearing this, is ſhewed, That that Darius who advanced the Temple-building, could not be Darius Hyſtaſpes, p. 253. to 281. nor Darius Nothus, p. 259. but was Darius called by the Greeks Longimanus. Here Zecharies ſeventy years are opened, p. 260. to p. 274 Sect. III. Proving, that the time betwixt Cyrus firſt, and Artaxerxes twentieth, was exactly one hundred forty ſeven years, p. 281. to. p. 290 An Objection from Dan. 12.1, 2. That but four Kings did reign in the Perſian Monarchy after Cyrus, anſwered, p. 290. to p. 298 Sect. IV. Something diſcuſſed about our Christian Epock, p. 298. to p. 305. The computation of the whole, p. 306, 307, 308.
Added by way of Appendix. 1 A general Rule for the right underſtanding of Prophecies, together with a more full opening the great Myſterie of Daniels Little Horn, p. 311. to p. 320 2 A particular Clauſe in our Diſcourſe about the times, opened, from p. 328. to 331 3 Some Concluſions touching Chriſts Kingdom, &c.
FINIS.
Books lately Printed, and ſold by Livewell Chapman.

THe Voyce of the Spirit, or a Diſcovery of the Witneſſing work of the Spirit, by Sam Petto Miniſter of the Goſpel.

The New Non-conformiſt, witneſſing both to ſmall and great, ſome of thoſe glorious things which the Apoſtles, the Prophets, and Moſes did ſay ſhould come to paſſe. Written by Mr. Chriſtopher Feak Miniſter of the Goſpel, and now a Priſoner for the Truth.

A Declaration of ſeveral of the Churches, and godly People, in and about the City of London, concerning the Kingly intereſt of Chriſt, and the preſent ſufferings of his Cauſe, and Saints, in England.

A Sermon of the Fifth Monarchy, proving, that the Saints ſhall have a Kingdom here on Earth, which is yet to come, after the Fourth Monarchy is deſtroyed by the Sword of the Saints, the followers of the Lamb. Preached by Maſter Tho. Goodwin, ſome years ſince, at Crooked Lane London.

An Image of our Reformed Times, or Jehu in his proper Colours; diſplayed in ſome Exercitations on the ſecond of Kings, the ninth and tenth Chapters, ſetting forth, The opportunity was given him to do his work in, The Cauſe he had committed to him to manage. Alſo his Policy, Zeal, Profeſſion, Hypocriſie; with his Sins, and their aggravations; reaſon for all this. Concluding with a word, to Jehu, Jehonadab, his Counſellor, and the perſecuted and deſpiſed people of God. By Col. Edward Lane of Hampin-nulo.

This Author hath three other Books, being called, Generation-Work, in Three Parts.

In the Firſt Part is ſhewed what Generation Work is, and how it differs from other works of a Chriſtian.

Secondly, That Saints in their ſeveral Generations have had their proper and peculiar works of their Generations.

Thirdly, That it is of great concernment for a Saint to attend to the work of his Generation.

Fourthly, What the preſent work is.

Fifthly, How each one may finde out the part of it that is properly his work.

Sixthly, How the Work may be ſo carried on, as God may be ſerved.

The Second Part is, An Expoſition of the ſeven Vials, and other Apocalyptical Myſteries.

The Third Part is, An Expoſition of the Prophecies of the two Witneſſes, from the eleventh, twelfth, and fourteenth Chapters of the Revelations.

To which is added, A Key to unlock the Myſtical Numbers in Daniel, and the Revelation.